Are you sure?
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
AMENDMENT 1
3 January 2000
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE WORLD GEODETIC SYSTEM 1984
Its Definition and Relationships with Local Geodetic Systems
These pages document the changes made to this document as of the date above
and form a part of NIMA TR8350.2 dated 4 July 1997. These changes are approved for
use by all Departments and Agencies of the Department of Defense.
PAGE xi
In the 5
th
paragraph, the sentence “The model, complete through degree (n) and order (m)
360, is comprised of 130,676 coefficients.” was changed to read “The model, complete
through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,317 coefficients.”.
PAGE 37
In Table 3.4, the value of U
0
was changed from 62636860.8497 m
2
/s
2
to 62636851.7146
m
2
/s
2
.
PAGE 44
Equation (49) was changed from “
,
_
¸
¸
+
+
· β
y x u
E u z
arctan
2
2 2
” to read
“
,
_
¸
¸
+
+
· β
2 2
2 2
y x u
E u z
arctan
”.
PAGE 51
In the first paragraph, the sentence “The WGS 84 EGM96, complete through degree (n)
and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,321 coefficients.” was changed to read “The
WGS 84 EGM96, complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of
130,317 coefficients.”.
PAGE 53
At the end of the definition of terms for Equation (53), the definition of the “k” term was
changed from “For m=0, k=1; m>1, k=2” to read “For m=0, k=1; m≠0, k=2”.
PAGE 72
In the next to the last paragraph, the sentences “Note that the National Map Accuracy
Standard requires points to be horizontally accurate to 0.51 mm (1/50 in.) for scales of
Page 2 of 3
1:20,000 or larger and 0.84 mm (1/30 in.) for scales less than 1:20,000. For example, this
corresponds to 2.5 m at 1:5,000 and 42 m at 1:50,000.” was changed to read “Note that
the National Map Accuracy Standard requires test points to be horizontally accurate to
0.85 mm (1/30 in.) for scales of 1:20,000 or larger and 0.51 mm (1/50 in.) for scales less
than 1:20,000. For example, this corresponds to 4.2 m at 1:5,000 and 25 m at 1:50,000.”.
PAGE R4
The title of the paper in reference number 40. was changed from “Status of the World
Geodetic System 1984” to read “Refinements to The World Geodetic System 1984”.
PAGE B3
In the second paragraph of Section 1 the sentence “There are 109 local geodetic datums
….” Was changed to read “There are 112 local geodetic datums ….”
PAGE B.12
The Korean Geodetic System 1995 was added.
PAGE B.13
The Old Hawaiian datum using the International 1924 ellipsoid was added.
PAGE B.14
The South American Geocentric Reference System (SIRGAS) was added.
PAGE B.32
The old Cycle 0 transformation parameters for the INDIAN 1975 datum in Thailand were
added and the code for the Cycle 1 parameters was changed from “INHA” to “INHA1”.
PAGE B.33
The Korean Geodetic System 1995 for South Korea was added.
PAGE B.35
The old Cycle 0 transformation parameters for the TOKYO datum in South Korea were
added and the code for the Cycle 1 parameters was changed from “TOYB” to “TOY
B1”.
Page 3 of 3
PAGE B.76
The South American Geocentric Reference System (SIRGAS) for South America was
added.
PAGE B.105
The Old Hawaiian datum for the Hawaiian Islands using the International 1924 ellipsoid
was added.
AMENDMENT 2
23 June 2004
PAGE 52
Equation 52 has been changed to the following;
Φ =
1
2
ω
2
(x
2
+ y
2
) (52)
NIMA/Geodesy and Geophysics Department
ii
14. SUBJECT TERMS
Datums, Datum Shifts, Datum Transformations, Datum Transformation Multiple
Regression Equations, Defense Mapping Agency, DMA, Earth Gravitational Constant,
Earth Gravitational Model, EGM96, Ellipsoidal Gravity Formula, Geodesy, Geodetic,
Geodetic Heights, Geodetic Systems, Geoids, Geoid Heights, Geoid Undulations,
Gravitation, Gravitational Coefficients, Gravitational Model, Gravitational Potential,
Gravity, Gravity Formula, Gravity Potential, Local Datums, Local Geodetic Datums,
Molodensky Datum Transformation Formulas, National Imagery and Mapping Agency,
NIMA, Orthometric Heights, Regional Datums, Reference Frames, Reference Systems,
World Geodetic System, World Geodetic System 1984, WGS 84.
iii
NIMA DEFINITION
On 1 October 1996 the Defense Mapping Agency (DMA) was incorporated into a
new agency, the National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA).
NATIONAL IMAGERY AND MAPPING AGENCY
The National Imagery and Mapping Agency provides timely, relevant and accurate
imagery, imagery intelligence and geospatial information in support of national security
objectives.
iv
This page is intentionally blank
v
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) expresses its appreciation to the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) Headquarters, NASA’s Goddard
Space Flight Center (NASA/GSFC), Hughes/STX, The Ohio State University, the Naval
Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division, the Global Positioning System Joint Program Office,
the United States Naval Observatory, the Chief of Naval Operations, Office of the Naval
Oceanographer, the International GPS Service for Geodynamics (IGS) and the International
Geoid Service (IGeS) Special Working Group (SWG) on the NIMA/GSFC Model Evaluation.
These groups provided vital resources, technical expertise and support on the refinements
documented in this report. In addition, NIMA would like to express appreciation to the
predecessor organizations that contributed to the development of WGS 84.
vi
This page is intentionally blank
vii
NATIONAL IMAGERY AND MAPPING AGENCY TECHNICAL REPORT 8350.2
Third Edition
Department of Defense
World Geodetic System 1984
Its Definition and Relationships
with Local Geodetic Systems
FOREWORD
1. This technical report defines the Department of Defense (DoD) World Geodetic
System 1984 (WGS 84). This third edition reflects improvements which have been made to the
WGS 84 since the second edition. The present WGS represents the National Imagery and
Mapping Agency’s (NIMA) latest geodetic and geophysical modeling of the Earth based on
data, techniques and technology available through 1996.
2. NIMA TR 8350.2 Third Edition contains no copyrighted material, nor is a
copyright pending. Distribution is unlimited. Copies may be requested from NIMA as
indicated in the PREFACE.
Deputy Director
Directorate of Systems and
Technology
National Imagery and Mapping Agency
Reply to the
Following:
4600 SANGAMORE ROAD
BETHESDA, MARYLAND 208165003
12310 SUNRISE VALLEY DRIVE
RESTON, VIRGINIA 201913449
3200 S. SECOND STREET
ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI 631183399
WASHINGTON NAVY YARD, BUILDING 213
WASHINGTON, DC 205050001
viii
This page is intentionally blank
ix
PREFACE
This technical report defines the Department of Defense (DoD) World Geodetic System
1984 (WGS 84). Significant changes incorporated in the third edition include:
• Refined realization of the reference frame
• Development of a refined Earth Gravitational Model and geoid
• Updated list of datum transformations
Users requiring additional information, clarification, or an electronic version of this
document should contact:
NIMA(GIMG), Mail Stop L41
Geodesy and Geophysics Department
National Imagery and Mapping Agency
3200 South Second Street
St. Louis, MO 631183399
EMail address: GandG@nima.mil
http://www.nima.mil
Since WGS 84 is comprised of a coherent set of parameters, DoD organizations should
not make a substitution for any of the WGS 84 related parameters or equations. Such a
substitution may lead to degraded WGS 84 products, interoperability problems and may have
other adverse effects.
Copies of this technical report may be requested from:
Director
National Imagery and Mapping Agency
ATTN: ISDFR, Mail Stop D17
4600 Sangamore Road
Bethesda, MD 208165003 (USA)
Commercial Voice Phone: (301) 2272495
Commercial FAX: (301) 2272498
DSN: 2872495, FAX: 2872498
Toll Free: 18008260342
x
This page is intentionally blank
xi
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The global geocentric reference frame and collection of models known as the World
Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 84) has evolved significantly since its creation in the mid1980s.
The WGS 84 continues to provide a single, common, accessible 3dimensional coordinate
system for geospatial data collected from a broad spectrum of sources. Some of this geospatial
data exhibits a high degree of ‘metric’ fidelity and requires a global reference frame which is free
of any significant distortions or biases. For this reason, a series of improvements to WGS 84
were developed in the past several years which served to refine the original version.
A consistent global set of 3dimensional station coordinates infers the location of an
origin, the orientation of an orthogonal set of Cartesian axes and a scale. In essence, a set of
station coordinates infers a particular realization of a reference frame. The station coordinates
which compose the operational WGS 84 reference frame are those of the permanent DoD GPS
monitor stations.
Within the last three years, the coordinates for these DoD GPS stations have been
refined two times, once in 1994 and again in 1996. The two sets of selfconsistent GPS
realized coordinates (Terrestrial Reference Frames) derived to date have been designated
‘WGS 84 (G730)’ and ‘WGS 84 (G873)’, where the ‘G’ indicates these coordinates were
obtained through GPS techniques and the number following the ‘G’ indicates the GPS week
number when these coordinates were implemented in the NIMA precise GPS ephemeris
estimation process. The dates when these refined station coordinate sets were implemented in
the GPS Operational Control Segment (OCS) were 29 June 1994 and 29 January 1997,
respectively.
These reference frame enhancements, as well as the previous set of enhancements,
implemented in 1994, are negligible (less than 30 centimeters) in the context of mapping,
charting and enroute navigation. Therefore, users should consider the WGS 84 reference frame
unchanged for applications involving mapping, charting and enroute navigation.
In addition to these reference frame enhancements, an intensive joint effort has been
conducted during the last three years involving analysts and resources of NIMA, the NASA
Goddard Space Flight Center (GSFC) and The Ohio State University. The result of this joint
effort is a new global model of the Earth’s gravitational field: Earth Gravitational Model 1996
(EGM96). In the case of DoD applications, this model replaces the nowoutdated original
WGS 84 gravitational model developed more than ten years ago. The form of the EGM96
model is a spherical harmonic expansion of the gravitational potential. The model, complete
through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,317 coefficients. NIMA
recommends use of an appropriately truncated (less than or equal to n=m=70) copy of this
geopotential model for high accuracy orbit determination.
xii
A refined WGS 84 geoid has been determined from the new gravitational model and is
available as a 15 minute grid of geoid undulations which exhibit an absolute accuracy of 1.0
meters or better, anywhere on the Earth. This refined geoid is referred to as the WGS 84
EGM96 Geoid.
The following names and the associated implementation dates have been officially
designated for use in all NIMA products:
1. FOR TOPOGRAPHIC MAPPING:
A. Horizontal Datum
WGS 84 From 1 Jan 1987
B. Vertical Datum
WGS 84 Geoid or
Local Mean Sea Level (MSL) From 1 Jan 1987
2. FOR AERONAUTICAL CHARTS:
A. Horizontal Datum
WGS 84 From 1 Jan 1987
B. Vertical Datum
WGS 84 Geoid or
Local Mean Sea Level (MSL) From 1 Jan 1987
3. FOR NAUTICAL CHARTS:
A. Horizontal Datum
WGS 84 From 1 Jan 1987
B. Vertical Datum
For Land Areas 
WGS 84 Geoid or
Local Mean Sea Level (MSL) From 1 Jan 1987
xiii
For Ocean Areas 
Local Sounding Datums
4. FOR GEODETIC, GIS DATA AND OTHER HIGHACCURACY
APPLICATIONS:
A. Reference Frame
WGS 84 1 Jan 87  1 Jan 94
WGS 84 (G730) 2 Jan 94  28 Sept 96
WGS 84 (G873) From 29 Sept 96
These dates represent implementation dates in the NIMA GPS precise ephemeris
estimation process.
B. Coordinates
As of 2 Jan 94, a set of geodetic coordinates shall include a designation of the
reference frame and epoch of the observations.
C. Earth Gravitational Model
WGS 84 1 Jan 1987
WGS 84 EGM96 1 Oct 1996
D. WGS 84 Geoid
WGS 84 1 Jan 1987
WGS 84 EGM96 1 Oct 1996
In summary, the refinements which have been made to WGS 84 have reduced the
uncertainty in the coordinates of the reference frame, the uncertainty of the gravitational model
and the uncertainty of the geoid undulations. They have not changed WGS 84. As a result, the
refinements are most important to the users requiring increased accuracies over capabilities
provided by the previous editions of WGS 84. For mapping, charting and navigational users,
these improvements are generally negligible. They are most relevant for the geodetic user and
other high accuracy applications. Thus, modern geodetic positioning within the DoD is now
carried out in the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame. The Earth Gravitational Model 1996
xiv
(EGM96) replaces the original WGS 84 geopotential model and serves as the basis for the
WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid, available from NIMA on a 15 minute grid. As additional data
become available, NIMA may develop further refinements to the geopotential model and the
geocentric reference frame. NIMA continues, as in the past, to update and develop new datum
transformations as additional data become available to support mapping, charting and
navigational users.
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
AMENDMENT 1
SUBJECT TERMS......................................................................................................ii
NIMA DEFINITION..................................................................................................iii
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ..........................................................................................v
FOREWORD..............................................................................................................vii
PREFACE...................................................................................................................ix
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY.........................................................................................xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS............................................................................................xv
1. INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................11
2. WGS 84 COORDINATE SYSTEM......................................................................21
2.1 Definition.....................................................................................................21
2.2 Realization...................................................................................................22
2.2.1 Agreement with the ITRF................................................................25
2.2.2 Temporal Effects.............................................................................26
2.2.2.1 Plate Tectonic Motion........................................................26
2.2.2.2 Tidal Effects.......................................................................28
2.3 Mathematical Relationship Between the Conventional Celestial
Reference System (CCRS) and the WGS 84 Coordinate System.................28
2.3.1 Tidal Variations in the Earth’s Rotation............................................29
3. WGS 84 ELLIPSOID............................................................................................31
3.1 General .......................................................................................................31
xvi
3.2 Defining Parameters.....................................................................................32
3.2.1 Semimajor Axis (a)........................................................................32
3.2.2 Flattening (f) ...................................................................................32
3.2.3 Earth’s Gravitational Constant (GM) ...............................................33
3.2.3.1 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Included (GM) .....................33
3.2.3.2 Special Considerations for GPS..........................................33
3.2.3.3 GM of the Earth’s Atmosphere...........................................34
3.2.3.4 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Excluded (GM′) ...................34
3.2.4 Angular Velocity of the Earth (ω) ....................................................34
3.3 Derived Geometric and Physical Constants...................................................36
3.3.1 Derived Geometric Constants..........................................................36
3.3.2 Physical Constants..........................................................................38
4. WGS 84 ELLIPSOIDAL GRAVITY FORMULA.................................................41
4.1 General......................... ..............................................................................41
4.2 Normal Gravity on the Ellipsoidal Surface.....................................................41
4.3 Normal Gravity Above the Ellipsoid .............................................................42
5. WGS 84 EGM96 GRAVITATIONAL MODELING.............................................51
5.1 Earth Gravitational Model (EGM96)............................................................51
5.2 Gravity Potential (W)...................................................................................52
6. WGS 84 EGM96 GEOID......................................................................................61
6.1 General ........…..........................................................................................61
6.2 Formulas, Representations and Analysis .......................................................62
xvii
6.2.1 Formulas ........................................................................................62
6.2.2 Permanent Tide Systems .................................................................64
6.2.3 Representations and Analysis ..........................................................64
6.3 Availability of WGS 84 EGM96 Data Products............................................66
7. WGS 84 RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER GEODETIC SYSTEMS ..................71
7.1 General ................. .....................................................................................71
7.2 Relationship of WGS 84 to the ITRF ...........................................................71
7.3 Relationship of WGS 84 to the NAD 83......................................................71
7.4 Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformations..........................73
7.5 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations (MRE).......................76
7.6 WGS 72 to WGS 84...................................................................................76
8. ACCURACY OF WGS 84 COORDINATES .......................................................81
8.1 Discussion...................................................................................................81
8.2 Summary.....................................................................................................83
9. IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES....................................................................91
9.1 Introduction.................................................................................................91
9.1.1 General Recommendations..............................................................92
9.1.2 Precise Geodetic Applications.........................................................92
9.1.3 Cartographic Applications...............................................................93
9.1.4 Navigation Applications ..................................................................93
9.1.5 Geospatial Information Applications ................................................94
xviii
9.2 Summary.....................................................................................................94
10. CONCLUSIONS/SUMMARY...........................................................................101
REFERENCES .................... ......................................................................................R1
APPENDIX A: LIST OF REFERENCE ELLIPSOID NAMES AND
PARAMETERS (USED FOR GENERATING DATUM
TRANSFORMATIONS)..................................................................A1
APPENDIX B: DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED USING
SATELLITE TIES TO GEODETIC DATUMS/SYSTEMS..............B1
APPENDIX C: DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED USING
NONSATELLITE INFORMATION..............................................C1
APPENDIX D: MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS FOR SPECIAL
CONTINENTAL SIZE LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS.................D1
APPENDIX E: WGS 72 TO WGS 84 TRANSFORMATION..................................E1
APPENDIX F: ACRONYMS....................................................................................F1
11
1. INTRODUCTION
The National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) supports a large number and
variety of products and users, which makes it imperative that these products all be related to a
common worldwide geodetic reference system. This ensures interoperability in relating
information from one product to another, supports increasingly stringent accuracy requirements
and supports military and humanitarian activities worldwide. The refined World Geodetic
System 1984 (WGS 84) represents NIMA’s best geodetic model of the Earth using data,
techniques and technology available through 1996.
The definition of the World Geodetic System has evolved within NIMA and its
predecessor agencies from the initial WGS 60 through subsequent improvements embodied in
WGS 66, WGS 72 and WGS 84. The refinement described in this technical report has been
possible due to additional global data from precise and accurate geodetic positioning, new
observations of land gravity data, the availability of extensive altimetry data from the GEOSAT,
ERS1 and TOPEX/POSEIDON satellites and additional satellite tracking data from geodetic
satellites at various inclinations. The improved Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96), its
associated geoid and additional datum transformations have been made possible by the inclusion
of these new data. EGM96 was developed jointly by NIMA, the National Aeronautics and
Space Administration’s Goddard Space Flight Center (NASA/GSFC), The Ohio State
University and the Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division (NSWCDD).
Commensurate with these modeling enhancements, significant improvements in the
realization of the WGS 84 reference frame have been achieved through the use of the
NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS). WGS 84 is realized by the coordinates
assigned to the GPS tracking stations used in the calculation of precise GPS orbits at NIMA.
NIMA currently utilizes the five globally dispersed Air Force operational GPS tracking stations
augmented by seven tracking stations operated by NIMA. The coordinates of these tracking
stations have been determined to an absolute accuracy of t5 cm (1σ).
The WGS 84 represents the best global geodetic reference system for the Earth available
at this time for practical applications of mapping, charting, geopositioning and navigation. This
report includes the definition of the coordinate system, fundamental and derived constants, the
EGM96, the ellipsoidal (normal) gravity model and a current list of local datum transformations.
NIMA recommendations regarding the practical implementation of WGS 84 are given in
Chapter Nine of this report.
12
This page is intentionally blank
21
2. WGS 84 COORDINATE SYSTEM
2.1 Definition
The WGS 84 Coordinate System is a Conventional Terrestrial Reference System
(CTRS). The definition of this coordinate system follows the criteria outlined in the International
Earth Rotation Service (IERS) Technical Note 21 [1]. These criteria are repeated below:
• It is geocentric, the center of mass being defined for the whole Earth including
oceans and atmosphere
• Its scale is that of the local Earth frame, in the meaning of a relativistic theory
of gravitation
• Its orientation was initially given by the Bureau International de l’Heure (BIH)
orientation of 1984.0
• Its time evolution in orientation will create no residual global rotation with
regards to the crust
The WGS 84 Coordinate System is a righthanded, Earthfixed orthogonal
coordinate system and is graphically depicted in Figure 2.1.
X
WGS 84
Y
WGS 84
Z
WGS 84
IERS Reference Pole (IRP)
IERS
Reference
Meridian
(IRM)
Earth's Center
of Mass
Figure 2.1 The WGS 84 Coordinate System Definition
22
In Figure 2.1, the origin and axes are defined as follows:
Origin = Earth’s center of mass
ZAxis = The direction of the IERS Reference Pole (IRP). This direction
corresponds to the direction of the BIH Conventional Terrestrial
Pole (CTP) (epoch 1984.0) with an uncertainty of 0.005″ [1]
XAxis = Intersection of the IERS Reference Meridian (IRM) and the plane
passing through the origin and normal to the Zaxis. The IRM is
coincident with the BIH Zero Meridian (epoch 1984.0) with an
uncertainty of 0.005″ [1]
YAxis = Completes a righthanded, EarthCentered EarthFixed (ECEF)
orthogonal coordinate system
The WGS 84 Coordinate System origin also serves as the geometric center of the
WGS 84 Ellipsoid and the Zaxis serves as the rotational axis of this ellipsoid of revolution.
Readers should note that the definition of the WGS 84 CTRS has not changed in
any fundamental way. This CTRS continues to be defined as a righthanded, orthogonal and
Earthfixed coordinate system which is intended to be as closely coincident as possible with the
CTRS defined by the International Earth Rotation Service (IERS) or, prior to 1988, its
predecessor, the Bureau International de l’Heure (BIH).
2.2 Realization
Following terminology proposed in [2], an important distinction is needed
between the definition of a coordinate system and the practical realization of a reference frame.
Section 2.1 contains a definition of the WGS 84 Coordinate System. To achieve a practical
realization of a global geodetic reference frame, a set of station coordinates must be established.
A consistent set of station coordinates infers the location of an origin, the orientation of an
orthogonal set of Cartesian axes and a scale. In modern terms, a globally distributed set of
consistent station coordinates represents a realization of an ECEF Terrestrial Reference Frame
(TRF). The original WGS 84 reference frame established in 1987 was realized through a set of
Navy Navigation Satellite System (NNSS) or TRANSIT (Doppler) station coordinates which
were described in [3]. Moreover, this original WGS 84 TRF was developed by exploiting
results from the best available comparisons of the DoD reference frame in existence during the
early 1980s, known as NSWC 9Z2, and the BIH Terrestrial System (BTS).
The main objective in the original effort was to align, as closely as possible, the
origin, scale and orientation of the WGS 84 frame with the BTS frame at an epoch of 1984.0.
The establishment of accurate transformation parameters (given in DMA TR 8350.2, First
23
Edition and Second Edition) between NSWC 9Z2 and the BTS achieved this objective with
remarkable precision. The scale of the transformed NSWC 9Z2 frame, for example, is
coincident with the BTS at the 10centimeter level [4]. The set of estimated station coordinates
put into practical use and described in [3], however, had an uncertainty of 12 meters with
respect to the BTS.
The TRANSITrealized WGS 84 reference frame was used beginning in January
1987 in the Defense Mapping Agency’s (DMA) TRANSIT precise ephemeris generation
process. These TRANSIT ephemerides were then used in an absolute point positioning
process with Doppler tracking data to determine the WGS 84 positions of the permanent DoD
Global Positioning System (GPS) monitor stations. These TRANSITrealized WGS 84
coordinates remained in use by DoD groups until 1994. Specifically, they remained in use until
2 January 1994 by DMA and until 29 June 1994 by the GPS Operational Control Segment
(OCS).
Several independent studies, [4], [5], [6], [7] and [8], have demonstrated that a
systematic ellipsoid height bias (scale bias) exists between GPSderived coordinates and
Dopplerrealized WGS 84 coordinates for the same site. This scale bias is most likely
attributable to limitations in the techniques used to estimate the Dopplerderived positions [4].
To remove this bias and obtain a selfconsistent GPSrealization of the WGS 84 reference
frame, DMA, with assistance from the Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division
(NSWCDD), developed a revised set of station coordinates for the DoD GPS tracking
network. These revised station coordinates provided an improved realization of the WGS 84
reference frame. To date, this process has been carried out twice, once in 1994 and again in
1996.
Using GPS data from the Air Force and DMA permanent GPS tracking stations
along with data from a number of selected core stations from the International GPS Service for
Geodynamics (IGS), DMA estimated refined coordinates for the permanent Air Force and
DMA stations. In this geodetic solution, a subset of selected IGS station coordinates was held
fixed to their IERS Terrestrial Reference Frame (ITRF) coordinates. A complete description of
the estimation techniques used to derive these new DoD station coordinates is given in [8] and
[9]. These refined DoD coordinates have improved accuracy due primarily to the elimination of
the ellipsoid height bias and have improved precision due to the advanced GPS techniques used
in the estimation process. The accuracy of each individual estimated position component
derived in 1996 has been shown to be on the order of 5 cm (1σ) for each permanent DoD
station [9]. The corresponding accuracy achieved in the 1994 effort, which is now outdated,
was 10 cm (1σ) [8]. By constraining the solution to the appropriate ITRF, the improved
coordinates for these permanent DoD stations represent a refined GPSrealization of the WGS
84 reference frame.
The two sets of selfconsistent GPSrealized coordinates (Terrestrial Reference
Frames) derived to date have been designated ‘WGS 84 (G730)’ and ‘WGS 84 (G873)’. The
24
‘G’ indicates these coordinates were obtained through GPS techniques and the number
following the ‘G’ indicates the GPS week number when these coordinates were implemented in
the NIMA precise ephemeris estimation process. The dates when these refined station
coordinate sets were implemented in the GPS OCS were 29 June 1994 and 29 January 1997,
respectively.
The most recent set of coordinates for these globally distributed stations is
provided in Table 2.1. The changes between the G730 and G873 coordinate sets are given in
Table 2.2. Note that the most recent additions to the NIMA station network, the station
located at the US Naval Observatory (USNO) and the station located near Beijing, China,
exhibit the largest change between coordinate sets. This result is due to the fact that these two
stations were not part of the G730 general geodetic solution conducted in 1994. Instead, these
two stations were positioned using NIMA’s ‘GASP’ geodetic point positioning algorithm [10],
which was shown at the time in 1994, to produce geodetic positions with an uncertainty of 30
cm (1σ, each component). The results shown in Table 2.2 corroborate this belief.
Table 2.1
WGS 84 Station Set G873: Cartesian Coordinates*, 1997.0 Epoch
Station Location
NIMA
Station
Number
X (km) Y (km) Z (km)
Air Force Stations
Colorado Springs 85128 1248.597221 4819.433246 3976.500193
Ascension 85129 6118.524214 1572.350829 876.464089
Diego Garcia(<2 Mar 97) 85130 1917.032190 6029.782349 801.376113
Diego Garcia(>2 Mar 97) 85130 1916.197323 6029.998996 801.737517
Kwajalein 85131 6160.884561 1339.851686 960.842977
Hawaii 85132 5511.982282 2200.248096 2329.481654
NIMA Stations
Australia 85402 3939.181976 3467.075383 3613.221035
Argentina 85403 2745.499094 4483.636553 3599.054668
England 85404 3981.776718 89.239153 4965.284609
Bahrain 85405 3633.910911 4425.277706 2799.862677
Ecuador 85406 1272.867278 6252.772267 23.801890
US Naval Observatory 85407 1112.168441 4842.861714 3985.487203
China 85409 2148.743914 4426.641465 4044.656101
*Coordinates are at the antenna electrical center.
25
Table 2.2
Differences between WGS 84 (G873) Coordinates and Prior WGS 84 (G730) Coordinates
Being Used in Orbital Operations * (Compared at 1994.0 Epoch)
Station Location
NIMA
Station
Number
∆ East
(cm)
∆ North
(cm)
∆ Ellipsoid
Height (cm)
Air Force Stations
Colorado Springs 85128 0.1 1.3 3.3
Ascension 85129 2.0 4.0 1.1
Diego Garcia(<2 Mar 97) 85130 3.3 8.5 5.2
Kwajalein 85131 4.7 0.3 4.1
Hawaii 85132 0.6 2.6 2.7
NIMA Stations
Australia 85402 6.2 2.7 7.5
Argentina 85403 1.0 4.1 6.7
England 85404 8.8 7.1 1.1
Bahrain 85405 4.3 4.8 8.1
Ecuador 85406 2.0 2.5 10.7
US Naval Observatory 85407 39.1 7.8 3.7
China 85409 31.0 8.1 1.5
*Coordinates are at the antenna electrical center.
In summary, these improved station coordinate sets, in particular WGS 84
(G873), represent the most recent realization(s) of the WGS 84 reference frame. Further
improvements and future realizations of the WGS 84 reference frame are anticipated. When
new stations are added to the permanent DoD GPS tracking network or when existing stations
(and/or antennas) are moved or replaced, new station coordinates will be required. As these
changes occur, NIMA will take steps to ensure that the highest possible degree of fidelity is
maintained and changes are identified to the appropriate organizations using the naming
conventions described above.
2.2.1 Agreement with the ITRF
The WGS 84 (G730) reference frame was shown to be in agreement,
after the adjustment of a best fitting 7parameter transformation, with the ITRF92 at a level
approaching 10 cm [10]. While similar comparisons of WGS 84 (G873) and ITRF94 are still
underway, extensive daily orbit comparisons between the NIMA precise ephemerides (WGS
84 (G873) reference frame) and corresponding IGS ephemerides (ITRF94 reference frame)
reveal systematic differences no larger than 2 cm [40]. The daytoday dispersion on these
parameters indicates that these differences are statistically insignificant. Note that a set of
26
ephemerides represents a unique realization of a reference frame that may differ slightly from a
corresponding realization obtained from stations on the Earth.
2.2.2 Temporal Effects
Since the fidelity of the current realization of the WGS 84 reference frame
is now significantly better than a decimeter, previously ignored phenomena must now be taken
into account in precise geodetic applications. Temporal changes in the crust of the Earth must
now be modeled or estimated. The most important changes are plate tectonic motion and tidal
effects on the Earth’s crust. These are each discussed briefly below. Temporal effects may
also require an epoch to be designated with any set of absolute station coordinates. The epoch
of the WGS 84 (G730) reference frame, for example, is 1994.0 while the epoch associated
with the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame is 1997.0.
2.2.2.1 Plate Tectonic Motion
To maintain centimeterlevel stability in a CTRS, a given set of
station positions represented at a particular epoch must be updated for the effects of plate
tectonic motion. Given sets of globally distributed station coordinates, represented at a
particular epoch, their positions slowly degrade as the stations ride along on the tectonic plates.
This motion has been observed to be as much as 7 cm/year at some DoD GPS tracking
stations. One way to handle these horizontal motions is to estimate velocity parameters along
with the station position parameters. For most DoD applications, this approach is not practical
since the observation period is not sufficiently long and the geodetic surveying algorithms in
common use are not equipped to perform this function. Instead, if the accuracy requirements of
a DoD application warrant it, DoD practitioners must decide which tectonic plate a given station
is on and apply a plate motion model to account for these horizontal effects. The current
recommended plate motion model is known as NNRNUVEL1A and can be found in [1]. A
map of the sixteen major tectonic plates is given in Figure 2.2 [12].
The amount of time elapsed between the epoch of a station’s
coordinates and the time of interest will be a dominant factor in deciding whether application of
this plate motion model is warranted. For example, a station on a plate that moves at a rate of 5
cm/year may not require this correction if the epoch of the coordinates is less than a year in the
past. If, however, these same coordinates are used over a 5year period, 25 cm of horizontal
displacement will have accumulated in that time and application of this correction may be
advisable, depending on the accuracy requirements of the geodetic survey.
28
2.2.2.2 Tidal Effects
Tidal phenomena are another source of temporal and
permanent displacement of a station’s coordinates. These displacements can be modeled to
some degree. In the most demanding applications (cmlevel or better accuracy), these
displacements should be handled as outlined in the IERS Conventions (1996) [1]. The results
of following these conventions lead to station coordinates in a ‘zerotide’ system. In practice,
however, the coordinates are typically represented in a ‘tidefree’ system. This is the procedure
followed in the NIMA GPS precise ephemeris estimation process. In this ‘tidefree’ system,
both the temporal and permanent displacements are removed from a station’s coordinates.
Note that many practical geodetic surveying algorithms are not
equipped to rigorously account for these tidal effects. Often, these effects are completely
ignored or allowed to ‘averageout’. This approach may be adequate if the data collection
period is long enough since the majority of the displacement is diurnal and semidiurnal.
Moreover, coordinates determined from GPS differential (baseline) processing would typically
contain whatever tidal components are present in the coordinates of the fixed (known) end of
the baseline. If decimeter level or better absolute accuracy is required, careful consideration
must be given to these station displacements since the peak absolute, instantaneous effect can
be as large as 42 cm [11]. In the most demanding applications, the rigorous model outlined in
[1] should be applied.
2.3 Mathematical Relationship Between the Conventional Celestial Reference System
(CCRS) and the WGS 84 Coordinate System
Since satellite equations of motion are appropriately handled in an inertial
coordinate system, the concept of a Conventional Celestial Reference System (CCRS)
(alternately known as a Conventional Inertial System (CIS)) is employed in most DoD orbit
determination operations. In practical orbit determination applications, analysts often refer to
the J2000.0 EarthCentered Inertial (ECI) reference frame which is a particular, widely adopted
CCRS that is based on the Fundamental Katalog 5 (FK5) star catalog. Since a detailed
definition of these concepts is beyond the scope of this document, the reader is referred to [1],
[13], [14] and [15] for indepth discussions of this topic.
Traditionally, the mathematical relationship between the CCRS and a CTRS (in
this case, the WGS 84 Coordinate System) is expressed as:
CTRS = [A] [B] [C] [D] CCRS (21)
where the matrices A, B, C and D represent the effects of polar motion, Earth rotation, nutation
and precession, respectively. The specific formulations for the generation of matrices A, B, C
and D can be found in the references cited above. Note that for nearrealtime orbit
determination applications, Earth Orientation Parameters (polar motion and Earth rotation
29
variations) that are needed to build the A and B matrices must be predicted values. Because
the driving forces that influence polar motion and Earth rotation variations are difficult to
characterize, these Earth orientation predictions are performed weekly. Within the DoD,
NIMA and the USNO supply these predictions on a routine basis. The NIMA Earth
orientation predictions adhere to a specific formulation documented in ICDGPS211 [16].
When this ICDGPS211 prediction model is evaluated at a specific time, these predictions
represent offsets from the IRP in the direction of 0° and 270° longitude, respectively. The
UT1UTC predictions represent the difference between the actual rotational time scale, UT1,
and the uniform time scale, UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). Further details on the
prediction algorithm can be found in [17], while recent assessments of the algorithm’s
performance can be found in [18] and [19].
2.3.1 Tidal Variations in the Earth’s Rotation
The actual Earth rotation rate (represented by UT1) undergoes periodic
variations due to tidal deformation of the polar moment of inertia. These highly predictable
periodic variations have a peaktopeak amplitude of 3 milliseconds and can be modeled by
using the formulation found in Chapter 8 of [1]. If an orbit determination application requires
extreme accuracy and uses tracking data from stations on the Earth, these UT1 variations
should be modeled in the orbit estimation process.
210
This page is intentionally blank
31
3. WGS 84 ELLIPSOID
3.1 General
Global geodetic applications require three different surfaces to be clearly defined.
The first of these is the Earth’s topographic surface. This surface includes the familiar landmass
topography as well as the ocean bottom topography. In addition to this highly irregular
topographic surface, a definition is needed for a geometric or mathematical reference surface,
the ellipsoid, and an equipotential surface called the geoid (Chapter 6).
While selecting the WGS 84 Ellipsoid and associated parameters, the original
WGS 84 Development Committee decided to closely adhere to the approach used by the
International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG), when the latter established and
adopted Geodetic Reference System 1980 (GRS 80) [20]. Accordingly, a geocentric ellipsoid
of revolution was taken as the form for the WGS 84 Ellipsoid. The parameters selected to
originally define the WGS 84 Ellipsoid were the semimajor axis (a), the Earth’s gravitational
constant (GM), the normalized second degree zonal gravitational coefficient (C
2,0
) and the
angular velocity (ω) of the Earth (Table 3.1). These parameters are identical to those of the
GRS 80 Ellipsoid with one minor exception. The form of the coefficient used for the second
degree zonal is that of the original WGS 84 Earth Gravitational Model rather than the notation
‘J
2
’ used with GRS 80.
In 1993, two efforts were initiated which resulted in significant refinements to
these original defining parameters. The first refinement occurred when DMA recommended,
based on a body of empirical evidence, a refined value for the GM parameter [21], [10]. In
1994, this improved GM parameter was recommended for use in all highaccuracy DoD orbit
determination applications. The second refinement occurred when the joint NIMA/NASA
Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96) project produced a new estimated dynamic value for
the second degree zonal coefficient.
A decision was made to retain the original WGS 84 Ellipsoid semimajor axis and
flattening values (a = 6378137.0 m and 1/f = 298.257223563). For this reason the four
defining parameters were chosen to be a, f, GM and ω. Further details regarding this decision
are provided below. The reader should also note that the refined GM value is within 1σ of the
original (1987) GM value. Additionally there are now two distinct values for the C
2,0
term.
One dynamically derived C
2,0
as part of the EGM96 and the other, geometric C
2,0
, implied by
the defining parameters. Table 3.1 contains the revised defining parameters.
32
3.2 Defining Parameters
3.2.1 Semimajor Axis (a)
The semimajor axis (a) is one of the defining parameters for WGS 84.
Its adopted value is:
a = 6378137.0 meters (31)
This value is the same as that of the GRS 80 Ellipsoid. As stated in [22],
the GRS 80, and thus the WGS 84 semimajor axis is based on estimates from the 19761979
time period determined using laser, Doppler and radar altimeter data and techniques. Although
more recent, improved estimates of this parameter have become available, these new estimates
differ from the above value by only a few decimeters. More importantly, the vast majority of
practical applications such as GPS receivers and mapping processes use the ellipsoid as a
convenient reference surface. In these applications, it is not necessary to define the ellipsoid that
best fits the geoid. Instead, common sense and the expense of numerous software modifications
to GPS receivers and mapping processes guided the decision to retain the original reference
ellipsoid. Moreover, this approach obviates the need to transform or recompute coordinates
for the large body of accurate geospatial data which has been collected and referenced to the
WGS 84 Ellipsoid in the last decade. Highly specialized applications and experiments which
require the ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid parameters can be handled separately, outside the mainstream
of DoD geospatial information generation.
3.2.2 Flattening (f)
The flattening (f) is now one of the defining parameters for WGS 84 and
remains the same as in previous editions of TR8350.2. Its adopted value is:
1/f = 298.257223563 (32)
As discussed in 3.2.1, there are numerous practical reasons for retaining this flattening value
along with the semimajor axis as part of the definition of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid.
The original WGS 84 development effort used the normalized second
degree zonal harmonic dynamic ( C
2,0
) value as a defining parameter. In this case, the ellipsoid
flattening value was derived from ( C
2,0
) through an accepted, rigorous expression. Incidentally,
this derived flattening turned out to be slightly different than the GRS 80 flattening because the
( C
2,0
) value was truncated in the normalization process. Although this slight difference has no
practical consequences, the flattening of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid is numerically distinct from the
GRS 80 flattening.
33
3.2.3 Earth’s Gravitational Constant (GM)
3.2.3.1 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Included (GM)
The central term in the Earth’s gravitational field (GM) is
known with much greater accuracy than either ‘G’, the universal gravitational constant, or ‘M’,
the mass of the Earth. Significant improvement in the knowledge of GM has occurred since the
original WGS 84 development effort. The refined value of the WGS 84 GM parameter, along
with its 1σ uncertainty is:
GM = (3986004.418 t 0.008) x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
(33)
This value includes the mass of the atmosphere and is based on several types of space
measurements. This value is recommended in the IERS Conventions (1996) [1] and is also
recommended by the International Association of Geodesy (IAG) Special Commission SC3,
Fundamental Constants, XXI IAG General Assembly [23]. The estimated accuracy of this
parameter is discussed in detail in [24].
3.2.3.2 Special Considerations for GPS
Based on a recommendation in a DMA letter to the Air Force
[21], the refined WGS 84 GM value (3986004.418 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
) was implemented in the GPS
Operational Control Segment (OCS) during the fall of 1994. This improvement removed a 1.3
meter radial bias from the OCS orbit estimates. The process that generates the predicted
broadcast navigation messages in the OCS also uses a GM value to create the quasiKeplerian
elements from the predicted Cartesian state vectors. The broadcast elements are then
interpolated by a GPS receiver to obtain the satellite position at a given epoch.
To avoid any loss of accuracy, the GPS receiver’s
interpolation process must use the same GM value that was used to generate the fitted
parameters of the broadcast message. Note that this fitting process is somewhat arbitrary but
must be commensurate with the algorithm in the receiver. Because there are many thousands of
GPS receivers in use around the world and because proposed, coordinated software
modifications to these receivers would be a costly, unmanageable endeavor, Aerospace
Corporation [25] suggested that the original WGS 84 GM value (3986005.0 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
) be
retained in GPS receivers and in the OCS process which fits a set of broadcast elements to the
Cartesian vectors. This approach takes advantage of the improved orbit accuracy for both the
estimated and predicted states facilitated by the refined GM value and avoids the expense of
software modifications to all GPS receivers.
For the above reasons, the GPS interface control document
(ICDGPS200) which defines the space segment to user segment interface should retain the
original WGS 84 GM value. The refined WGS 84 GM value should continue to be used in the
34
OCS orbit estimation process. Most importantly, this approach avoids the introduction of any
error to a GPS user.
3.2.3.3 GM of the Earth’s Atmosphere
For some applications, it is necessary to either have a GM
value for the Earth that does not include the mass of the atmosphere or have a GM value for the
atmosphere itself. To achieve this, it is necessary to know both the mass of the Earth’s
atmosphere, M
A
, and the universal gravitational constant, G.
Using the value recommended for G [26] by the IAG, and the
accepted value for M
A
[27], the product GM
A
to two significant digits yields the value
recommended by the IAG for this constant. This value, with an assigned accuracy estimate,
was adopted for use with WGS 84 and has not changed from the previous editions of this
report:
GM
A
= (3.5 t 0.1) x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
(34)
3.2.3.4 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Excluded (GM′)
The Earth’s gravitational constant with the mass of the Earth’s
atmosphere excluded (GM′), can be obtained by simply subtracting GM
A
, Equation (34), from
GM, Equation (33):
GM′ = (3986000.9 t 0.1) x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
(35)
Note that GM′ is known with much less accuracy than GM due to the uncertainty introduced by
GM
A
.
3.2.4 Angular Velocity of the Earth (ω)
The value of ω used as one of the defining parameters of the WGS 84
(and GRS 80) is:
ω = 7292115 x 10
11
radians/second (36)
This value represents a standard Earth rotating with a constant angular velocity. Note that the
actual angular velocity of the Earth fluctuates with time. Some geodetic applications that require
angular velocity do not need to consider these fluctuations.
Although ω is suitable for use with a standard Earth and the WGS 84
Ellipsoid, it is the International Astronomical Union (IAU), or the GRS 67, version of this value
(ω′):
35
ω′ = 7292115.1467 x 10
11
radians/second (37)
that was used with the new definition of time [28].
For consistent satellite applications, the value of the Earth’s angular
velocity (ω′) from equation (37), rather than ω, should be used in the formula:
ω* = ω′+ m (38)
to obtain the angular velocity of the Earth in a precessing reference frame (ω*). In the above
equation [28] [14], the precession rate in right ascension (m) is:
m = (7.086 x 10
12
+ 4.3 x 10
15
T
U
) radians/second (39)
where:
T
U
= Julian Centuries from Epoch J2000.0
T
U
= d
U
/36525
d
U
= Number of days of Universal Time (UT) from Julian Date
(JD) 2451545.0 UT1, taking on values of t 0.5, t 1.5, t 2.5...
d
U
= JD  2451545
Therefore, the angular velocity of the Earth in a precessing reference
frame, for satellite applications, is given by:
ω* = (7292115.8553 x 10
11
+ 4.3 x 10
15
T
U
) radians/second (310)
Note that values for ω, ω′ and ω* have remained unchanged from the previous edition.
Table 3.1
WGS 84 Four Defining Parameters
Parameter Notation Value
Semimajor Axis a 6378137.0 meters
Reciprocal of Flattening 1/f 298.257223563
Angular Velocity of the Earth ω 7292115.0 x 10
11
rad/s
Earth’s Gravitational Constant
(Mass of Earth’s Atmosphere
Included)
GM 3986004.418 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
36
Table 3.2
WGS 84 Parameter Values for Special Applications
Parameter Notation Value Accuracy (1σ )
Gravitational Constant
(Mass of Earth’s
Atmosphere Not Included)
GM′ 3986000.9 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
t0.1 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
GM of the Earth’s
Atmosphere
GM
A
3.5 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
t0.1 x 10
8
m
3
/s
2
Angular Velocity of the
Earth (In a Precessing
Reference frame)
ω∗ (7292115.8553 x 10
11
+
4.3 x 10
15
T
U
) rad/s
t0.15 x 10
11
rad/s
3.3 Derived Geometric and Physical Constants
Many constants associated with the WGS 84 Ellipsoid, other than the four
defining parameters (Table 3.1), are needed for geodetic applications. Using the four defining
parameters, it is possible to derive these associated constants. The more commonly used
geometric and physical constants associated with the WGS 84 Ellipsoid are listed in Tables 3.3
and 3.4. The formulas used in the calculation of these constants are primarily from [20] and
[29]. Derived constants should retain the listed significant digits if consistency among the
precision levels of the various parameters is to be maintained.
3.3.1 Derived Geometric Constants
The original WGS 84 definition, as represented in the two previous
editions of this document, designated the normalized second degree zonal gravitational
coefficient ( C
2,0
) as a defining parameter. Now that the ellipsoid flattening is used as a defining
parameter, the geometric C
2,0
is derived through the defining parameter set (a, f, GM and ω).
The new derived geometric C
2,0
equals 0.484166774985 x 10
3
which differs from the
original WGS 84 C
2,0
by 7.5015 x 10
11
. This difference is within the accuracy of the original
WGS 84 C
2,0
which was t1.30 x 10
9
.
The differences between the dynamic and geometric even degree zonal
harmonics to degree 10 are used in spherical harmonic expansions to calculate the geoid and
other geodetic quantities as described in Chapters 5 and 6 of this report. The dynamic C
2,0
value provided in Table 5.1 should be used in orbit determination applications. A complete
description of the EGM96 geopotential coefficients can be found in Chapter 5.
37
Table 3.3
WGS 84 Ellipsoid Derived Geometric Constants
Constant Notation Value
Second degree Zonal Harmonic C
2,0
0.484166774985 x 10
3
Semiminor Axis b 6356752.3142 m
First Eccentricity e 8.1819190842622 x 10
2
First Eccentricity Squared e
2
6.69437999014 x 10
3
Second Eccentricity e′ 8.2094437949696 x 10
2
Second Eccentricity Squared e′
2
6.73949674228 x 10
3
Linear Eccentricity E 5.2185400842339 x 10
5
Polar Radius of Curvature c 6399593.6258 m
Axis Ratio b/a 0.996647189335
Mean Radius of Semiaxes R
1
6371008.7714 m
Radius of Sphere of Equal Area R
2
6371007.1809 m
Radius of Sphere of Equal Volume R
3
6371000.7900 m
Table 3.4
Derived Physical Constants
Constant Notation Value
Theoretical (Normal) Gravity
Potential of the Ellipsoid
U
0
62636851.7146
m
2
/s
2
Theoretical (Normal) Gravity at the
Equator (on the Ellipsoid)
γ
e
9.7803253359 m/s
2
Theoretical (Normal) Gravity at the
pole (on the Ellipsoid)
γ
p
9.8321849378 m/s
2
Mean Value of Theoretical
(Normal) Gravity
γ
9.7976432222 m/s
2
Theoretical (Normal) Gravity
Formula Constant
k 0.00193185265241
Mass of the Earth (Includes
Atmosphere)
M 5.9733328 x 10
24
kg
m=ω
2
a
2
b/GM m 0.00344978650684
38
3.3.2 Physical Constants
In addition to the above constants, two other constants are an integral
part of the definition of WGS 84. These constants are the velocity of light (c) and the dynamical
ellipticity (H).
The currently accepted value for the velocity of light in a vacuum (c) is
[30], [1], [23]:
c = 299792458 m/s (311)
This value is officially recognized by both the IAG [26] and IAU [14] and has been adopted for
use with WGS 84.
The dynamical ellipticity (H) is necessary for determining the Earth’s
principal moments of inertia, A, B and C. In the literature, H is variously referred to as
dynamical ellipticity, mechanical ellipticity, or the precessional constant. It is a factor in the
theoretical value of the rate of precession of the equinoxes, which is well known from
observation. In a 1983 IAG report on fundamental geodetic constants [31], the following value
for the reciprocal of H was given in the discussion of moments of inertia:
1/H = 305.4413 t 0.0005 (312)
This value has been adopted for use with WGS 84.
Values of the velocity of light in a vacuum and the dynamical ellipticity
adopted for use with WGS 84 are listed in Table 3.5 along with other WGS 84 associated
constants used in special applications.
Table 3.5
Relevant Miscellaneous Constants
Constant Notation Value
Velocity of Light (in a Vacuum) c 299792458 m/s
Dynamical Ellipticity H 1/305.4413
Universal Constant of Gravitation G 6.673 x 10
11
m
3
/kg s
2
Earth’s Principal Moments of Inertia
(Dynamic Solution)
A
B
C
8.0091029 x 10
37
kg m
2
8.0092559 x 10
37
kg m
2
8.0354872 x 10
37
kg m
2
41
4. WGS 84 ELLIPSOIDAL GRAVITY FORMULA
4.1 General
The WGS 84 Ellipsoid is identified as being a geocentric equipotential ellipsoid of
revolution. An equipotential ellipsoid is simply an ellipsoid defined to be an equipotential
surface, i.e., a surface on which the value of the gravity potential is the same everywhere. The
WGS 84 ellipsoid of revolution is defined as an equipotential surface with a specific theoretical
gravity potential (U). This theoretical gravity potential can be uniquely determined, independent
of the density distribution within the ellipsoid, by using any system of four independent constants
as the defining parameters of the ellipsoid. As noted earlier in the case of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid
(Chapter 3), these are the semimajor axis (a), the inverse of the flattening (1/f), the Earth’s
angular velocity (ω) and the Earth’s gravitational constant (GM).
4.2 Normal Gravity on the Ellipsoidal Surface
Theoretical normal gravity (γ), the magnitude of the gradient of the normal
potential function U, is given on (at) the surface of the ellipsoid by the closed formula of
Somigliana [33]:
φ
φ
γ γ
2 2
2
e
sin e 1
sin k 1
−
+
·
(41)
where:
1
a
b
k
e
p
−
γ
γ
·
a, b = semimajor and semiminor axes of the ellipsoid, respectively
e
γ
,
p
γ = theoretical gravity at the equator and poles, respectively
e
2
= square of the first ellipsoidal eccentricity
φ = geodetic latitude
This form of the normal gravity equation is the WGS 84 Ellipsoidal Gravity
Formula. The equipotential ellipsoid not only serves as the reference for horizontal and vertical
surfaces, or geometric figure of the Earth, but also serves as the reference surface for the normal
gravity of the Earth.
42
If the MKS (MeterKilogramSecond) unit system is used to evaluate Equation
(41), or for that matter any gravity formula in this Chapter, the gravity unit will be m/s
2
which
can be converted to milligals (abbreviated mgal) by the conversion factor, 1 m/s
2
= 10
5
mgal.
4.3 Normal Gravity Above the Ellipsoid
When the geodetic height (h) is small, normal gravity above the ellipsoid can be
estimated by upward continuing γ at the ellipsoidal surface using a truncated Taylor series
expansion:
2
2
2
h
h
h 2
1
h
h ∂
γ ∂
+
∂
γ ∂
+ γ · γ (42)
A frequently used Taylor series expansion for normal gravity above the ellipsoid
with a positive direction downward along the geodetic normal to the reference ellipsoid is:
( )
1
]
1
¸
+ ⋅ φ − + + − γ · γ
2
2
2
h
h
a
3
h fsin 2 m f 1
a
2
1
(43)
where:
GM
b a
m
2 2
ω
·
f = ellipsoidal flattening
a = semimajor axis
φ = geodetic latitude
γ = normal gravity on the ellipsoid at geodetic latitude φ
The derivation of Equation (43) can be found in [33].
At moderate and high geodetic heights where Equation (43) may yield results
with less than desired accuracy, an alternate approach based on formulating normal gravity in
the ellipsoidal coordinate system (u,β,λ) is recommended over the Taylor series method. The
coordinate u is the semiminor axis of an ellipsoid of revolution whose surface passes through
the point P in Figure 4.1. This ellipsoid is confocal with the reference ellipsoid and therefore has
the same linear eccentricity
2 2
b a E − · . Its semimajor axis (a′) is given by the radical
expression
2 2
E u + which reduces to the semimajor axis (a) of the reference ellipsoid when
43
u · b. The β coordinate is known in geodesy as the “reduced latitude” (the definition is seen in
Figure 4.1) and λ is the usual geocentric longitude with a value in the open interval [0°E,
360°E).
The component ( h
γ
) of the total normal gravity vector ( total
γ
r
) that is colinear with
the geodetic normal line for point P in Figure 4.2 and directed positively downward can be
estimated with submicrogal precision to geodetic heights of at least 20,000 meters by using the
normal gravity components, u
γ
, β
γ
and λ
γ
in the ellipsoidal coordinate system:
2 2 2
u total h λ β
γ + γ + γ · γ ≅ γ
r
(44)
The normal gravity field from the ellipsoidal representation is symmetrical about
the rotation axis and therefore λ
γ
= 0. The radical expression in Equation (44) is the true
magnitude of the total normal gravity vector total
γ
r
that is perpendicular to the equipotential
surface passing through the point P at geodetic height h. The fact that the angular separation (ε)
in the Inset of Figure 4.2 between the component h
γ
and the total normal gravity vector total
γ
r
at the point P is small, even for large geodetic heights, is the basis for using Equation (44) to
approximate the component h
γ
. On the reference ellipsoidal surface where h = 0, 0 · γ
β
and
u = b, Equation (44) is equivalent to Somigliana’s Equation (41).
The two ellipsoidal components ( )
β
γ γ ,
u
of the normal gravity vector total
γ
r
that
are needed in Equation (44) are shown in [33] to be functions of the ellipsoidal coordinates
(u,β) shown in Figure 4.1. These two components can be computed with unlimited numerical
accuracy by the closed expressions:
( ) γ β
ω
β ω β
u 2 2
2
2 2
o
u
w
GM
u E
a E
u E
q
q
u , sin cos · −
+
+
+
⋅
′
⋅ −
¸
¸
_
,
¸
1
]
1
+ ⋅ ⋅
1 1
2
1
6
1
2
2 2 2
w
(45)
( ) γ β
ω
β β ω β β
β
u
w
a
u E
q
q
u E
2 2
o
2 2
, sin cos sin cos ·
+
⋅ − +
1 1
2 2
2
w
(46)
where:
2 2
b a E − · (47)
( )
( )
u x y z E
4E z
x y z E
2 2 2 2
2 2
2 2 2 2
2
· + + − ⋅ + +
+ + −
¹
'
¹
¹
¹
¹
)
¹
¹
¹
¸
1
]
1
1
1
2
1 1
1 2
(48)
44
,
_
¸
¸
+
+
· β
2 2
2 2
y x u
E u z
arctan
(49)
2 2
2 2 2
E u
sin E u
w
+
β +
· (410)
q
u
E
E
u
u
E
2
2
· +
¸
¸
_
,
¸
¸
_
,
−
¸
1
]
1
1
2
1 3 3 arctan (411)
q
b
E
E
b
b
E
o
2
2
· +
¸
¸
_
,
¸
¸
_
,
−
¸
1
]
1
1
2
1 3 3 arctan (412)
′ · +
¸
1
]
1
⋅ −
¸
¸
_
,
¸
1
]
1
− q
u
E
u
E
E
u
2
2
3 1 1 1 arctan (413)
The rectangular coordinates (x,y,z) required in Equations (48) and (49) can be
computed from known geodetic coordinates (
φ
, λ,h) through the equations:
( ) λ φ + · cos cos h N x
( ) λ φ + · sin cos h N y
(414)
( ) ( ) sin h N a b z
2 2
φ + ⋅ ·
where the radius of curvature in the prime vertical (N) is defined by the equation:
( )
2 1
2 2
sin e 1
a
N
φ −
· . (415)
The description of the coordinate system defined by Equations (414) is given in
Chapter 2.
To compute the component
h
γ at point P in Figure 4.2 exactly, (account for the
angle ε in Figure 4.2 that is being treated as negligible in Equation (44)), the ellipsoidal normal
gravity components
u
γ and
β
γ are rotated to a spherical coordinate system (r, ψ ,λ) resulting in
the spherical normal gravity components,
r
γ and
ψ
γ . Then, the spherical components are
projected onto the geodetic normal line through point P using the angular difference
45
(
ψ − φ · α
) between geodetic (φ) and geocentric (ψ ) latitudes. The equations to calculate the
exact value of h
γ
at point P follow:
( ) ( ) α γ − α γ − · γ
ψ
sin cos
r h
(416)
where from [33]:
E
γ
r
R
γ
r
S
γ
r
R R
E S
R 2 S E 1 R
1 2
System
Spherical
r
R =
System
r Rectangula
z
y
x
R
System
l Ellipsoida
u
γ · γ ⇒
¹
¹
¹
)
¹
¹
¹
¹
'
¹
γ
γ
γ
÷ ÷ ÷ → ÷
¹
¹
¹
)
¹
¹
¹
¹
'
¹
γ
γ
γ
÷ ÷ ÷ → ÷
¹
¹
¹
)
¹
¹
¹
¹
'
¹
γ
γ
γ
⋅
λ
ψ
γ ⋅ γ γ ⋅ · γ
λ
β
r r
r r r r
(417)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
]
1
¸
β
+
β
λ λ β − λ β
+
λ − λ β − λ β
+
·
0 cos
E u w
u
sin
w
1
cos sin sin
w
1
sin cos
E u w
u
sin cos sin
w
1
cos cos
E u w
u
R
2 2
2 2
2 2
1
(418)
1
1
1
]
1
¸
λ λ −
ψ λ ψ − λ ψ −
ψ λ ψ λ ψ
·
0 cos sin
cos sin sin cos sin
sin sin cos cos cos
R
2
(419)
ψ − φ · α
. (420)
The λ
γ
component in the two normal gravity vectors, E
γ
r
and S
γ
r
in Equation (4
17) is zero since the normal gravity potential is not a function of longitude λ. The definitions for
the other two relevant angles depicted in the Inset of Figure 4.2 are:
α − θ · ε (421)
,
_
¸
¸
γ
γ
· θ
ψ
r
arctan (422)
such that π/2 ≤ θ≤ π/2.
46
The equations listed here for the angles (
θ ε α , ,
) are applicable to both the
northern and southern hemispheres. For positive h, each of these angles is zero when point P is
directly above one of the poles or lies in the equatorial plane. Elsewhere for h > 0, they have
the same sign as the geodetic latitude for point P. For h = 0, the angles α and θ are equal and
ε = 0. Numerical results have indicated that the angular separation (ε) between the component
h
γ and the total normal gravity vector total
γ
r
satisfies the inequality ε < 4 arcseconds for
geodetic heights up to 20,000 meters. For completeness the component (
φ
γ
) of the total
normal gravity vector
total
γ
r
at point P in Figure 4.2 that is orthogonal to
h
γ and lies in the
meridian plane for point P is given by the expression:
( ) ( ) α γ + α γ − · γ
ψ φ
cos sin
r
(423)
The component
φ
γ has a positive sense northward. For geodetic height h = 0, the
φ
γ
component is zero. Numerical testing with whole degree latitudes showed that the magnitude of
φ
γ remains less than 0.002% of the value of
h
γ for geodetic heights up to 20,000 meters.
Equations (416) and (423) provide an alternative way to compute the magnitude
total
γ
r
of the
total normal gravity vector through the equation:
2 2
h otal t φ
γ + γ · γ
r
(424)
In summary then, for nearsurface geodetic heights when submicrogal precision
is not necessary, the Taylor series expansion Equation (43) for
h
γ should suffice. But, when
the intended application for
h
γ requires high accuracy, Equation (44) will be a close
approximation to the exact Equation (416) for geodetic heights up to 20,000 meters. Of
course,
h
γ
can be computed using the exact Equation (416) but this requires that the
computational procedure include the two transformations, R
1
and R
2
, that are shown in
Equation (417). Because the difference in results between Equations (44) and (416) is less
than one µgal (10
6
gal) for geodetic heights to 20,000 meters, the transformation approach
would probably be unnecessary in most situations. For applications requiring pure attraction
(attraction without centrifugal force) due to the normal gravitational potential V, the u and β
vector components of normal gravitation can be computed easily in the ellipsoidal coordinate
system by omitting the last term in Equations (45) and (46) respectively. These last attraction
terms account for the centrifugal force due to the angular velocity ω of the reference ellipsoid.
47
P(x,y,z)
.
β F
1
F
2
. .
z
xyplane
r
b
b'=u
Sphere of Radius r=a'
Confocal Ellipsoid
Through Point P
Reference Ellipsoidal
Surface S
o
b'=u=semiminor axis
a'=(u
2
+E
2
)
1/2
=semimajor axis
b=semiminor axis
a=semimajor axis
a
a'
Ε
Ε=Focal Length
=(a
2
b
2
)
1/2
Figure 4.1 Ellipsoidal Coordinates(u, β)
S
o
φ
G
e
o
d
e
t
i
c
N
o
r
m
a
l
h
P
O
48
Y(90
o
East)
φ
λ
P(φ,λ,h)
γh
X(0
o
East)
Equatorial
P
la
n
e
y
p
x
p
z
p
G
e
o
d
e
t
ic
N
o
r
m
a
l
h
R
o
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
x
i
s
Pole
Origin
M
e
rid
ia
n
P
la
n
e
Reference
E
llip
s
o
id
a
l
S
u
r
fa
c
e
Z
Figure 4.2 Normal Gravity Component
γh
P
o
γh
α
γ
total
γ
ψ
γr
P
ε
Inset
θ
ψ
G
e
o
c
e
n
t
r
ic
R
a
d
iu
s
γ
φ
51
5. WGS 84 EGM96 GRAVITATIONAL MODELING
5.1 Earth Gravitational Model (EGM96)
The form of the WGS 84 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model is a spherical
harmonic expansion (Table 5.1) of the gravitational potential (V). The WGS 84 EGM96,
complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,317 coefficients.
EGM96 was a joint effort that required NIMA gravity data, NASA/GSFC
satellite tracking data and DoD tracking data in its development. The NIMA effort consisted of
developing worldwide 30′ and 1° mean gravity anomaly databases from its Point Gravity
Anomaly file and 5′ x 5′ mean GEOSAT Geodetic Mission geoid height file using leastsquares
collocation with the Forsberg Covariance Model [32] to estimate the final 30′ x 30′ mean
gravity anomaly directly with an associated accuracy. The GSFC effort consisted of satellite
orbit modeling by tracking over 30 satellites including new satellites tracked by Satellite Laser
Ranging (SLR), Tracking and Data Relay Satellite System (TDRSS) and GPS techniques in the
development of EGM96S (the satellite only model of EGM96 to degree and order 70). The
development of the combination model to 70 x 70 incorporated direct satellite altimetry
(TOPEX/POSEIDON, ERS1 and GEOSAT) with EGM96S and surface gravity normal
equations. Major additions to the satellite tracking data used by GSFC included new
observations of Lageos, Lageos2, Ajisai, Starlette, Stella, TOPEX and GPSMET along with
GEOS1 and GEOSAT. Finally, GSFC developed the high degree EGM96 solution by
blending the combination solution to degree and order 70 with a block diagonal solution from
degree and order 71 to 359 and a quadrature solution at degree and order 360. A complete
description of EGM96 can be found in [41].
The EGM96 through degree and order 70 is recommended for high accuracy
satellite orbit determination and prediction purposes. An Earth orbiting satellite’s sensitivity to
the geopotential is strongly influenced by the satellite’s altitude range and other orbital
parameters. DoD programs performing satellite orbit determination are advised to determine
the maximum degree and order that is most appropriate for their particular mission and orbit
accuracy requirements.
The WGS 84 EGM96 coefficients through degree and order 18 are provided in
Table 5.1 in normalized form. An error covariance matrix is available for those coefficients
through degree and order 70 determined from the weighted least squares combination solution.
Coefficient sigmas are available to degree and order 360. Gravity anomaly degree variances
are given in Table 5.2 for the WGS 84 EGM96 (degree and order 360). Requesters having a
need for the full WGS 84 EGM96, its error data and associated software should forward their
correspondence to the address listed in the PREFACE.
52
5.2 Gravity Potential (W)
The Earth’s total gravity potential (W) is defined as:
W = V + Φ (51)
where Φ is the potential due to the Earth’s rotation. If ω is the angular velocity (Equation
(36)), then:
Φ =
1
2
ω
2
(x
2
+ y
2
) (52)
where x and y are the geocentric coordinates of a given point in the WGS 84 reference
frame (See Figure 2.1).
The gravitational potential function (V) is defined as:
( )( )
V
GM
r
a
r
P C m S m
n
nm
m
n
n
n
nm nm
= +

\

.
 ′ +
¸
(
¸
(
= =
∑ ∑
1
0 2
sin cos sin
max
φ λ λ (53)
where:
V = Gravitational potential function (m
2
/s
2
)
GM = Earth’s gravitational constant
r = Distance from the Earth’s center of mass
a = Semimajor axis of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid
n,m = Degree and order, respectively
φ′ = Geocentric latitude
λ = Geocentric longitude = geodetic longitude
C
nm
, S
nm
= Normalized gravitational coefficients
53
( ) P
nm
sin ′ φ = Normalized associated Legendre function
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ·
− +
+
¸
1
]
1
′
n m n k
n m
P
nm
!
!
sin
/
2 1
1 2
φ
P
nm
(sin φ′) = Associated Legendre function
= ( )
( )
( )
[ ]
cos
d
d sin
P
m
m n
′
′
′ φ
φ
φ
m
sin
( ) P
n
sin ′ φ = Legendre polynomial
=
( )
( )
1
2 n!
d
d sin
sin 1
n
n
n
2
n
′
′ −
φ
φ
Note:
( )
( ) ( )
C
S
n m
n m n k
C
S
nm
nm
nm
nm
·
+
− +
¸
1
]
1
!
!
/
2 1
1 2
where:
C , S
nm nm
= Conventional gravitational coefficients
For m = 0, k = 1;
m ≠ 0, k = 2
The series is theoretically valid for r ≥ a, though it can be used with probably negligible error
near or on the Earth’s surface, i.e., r ≥ Earth’s surface. But the series should not be used for r
< Earth’s surface.
Table 5.1
EGM96
Earth Gravitational Model
Truncated at n=m=18
E03=X10
3
; E05=X10
5
; etc.
54
Degree and Order Normalized Gravitational Coefficients
n m
m n
C
m n
S
2 0 .484165371736E 03
2 1 .186987635955E 09 .119528012031E08
2 2 .243914352398E 05 .140016683654E05
3 0 .957254173792E 06
3 1 .202998882184E 05 .248513158716E06
3 2 .904627768605E 06 .619025944205E06
3 3 .721072657057E 06 .141435626958E05
4 0 .539873863789E 06
4 1 .536321616971E 06 .473440265853E06
4 2 .350694105785E 06 .662671572540E06
4 3 .990771803829E 06 .200928369177E06
4 4 .188560802735E 06 .308853169333E06
5 0 .685323475630E 07
5 1 .621012128528E 07 .944226127525E07
5 2 .652438297612E 06 .323349612668E06
5 3 .451955406071E 06 .214847190624E06
5 4 .295301647654E 06 .496658876769E07
5 5 .174971983203E 06 .669384278219E06
6 0 .149957994714E 06
6 1 .760879384947E 07 .262890545501E07
6 2 .481732442832E 07 .373728201347E06
6 3 .571730990516E 07 .902694517163E08
6 4 .862142660109E 07 .471408154267E06
6 5 .267133325490E 06 .536488432483E06
6 6 .967616121092E 08 .237192006935E06
7 0 .909789371450E 07
7 1 .279872910488E 06 .954336911867E07
7 2 .329743816488E 06 .930667596042E07
7 3 .250398657706E 06 .217198608738E06
7 4 .275114355257E 06 .123800392323E06
7 5 .193765507243E 08 .177377719872E07
7 6 .358856860645E 06 .151789817739E06
Table 5.1
EGM96
Earth Gravitational Model
Truncated at n=m=18
E03=X10
3
; E05=X10
5
; etc.
55
Degree and Order Normalized Gravitational Coefficients
n m
m n
C
m n
S
7 7 .109185148045E 08 .244415707993E07
8 0 .496711667324E 07
8 1 .233422047893E 07 .590060493411E07
8 2 .802978722615E 07 .654175425859E07
8 3 .191877757009E 07 .863454445021E07
8 4 .244600105471E 06 .700233016934E07
8 5 .255352403037E 07 .891462164788E07
8 6 .657361610961E 07 .309238461807E06
8 7 .672811580072E 07 .747440473633E07
8 8 .124092493016E 06 .120533165603E06
9 0 .276714300853E 07
9 1 .143387502749E 06 .216834947618E07
9 2 .222288318564E 07 .322196647116E07
9 3 .160811502143E 06 .742287409462E07
9 4 .900179225336E 08 .194666779475E07
9 5 .166165092924E 07 .541113191483E07
9 6 .626941938248E 07 .222903525945E06
9 7 .118366323475E 06 .965152667886E07
9 8 .188436022794E 06 .308566220421E08
9 9 .477475386132E 07 .966412847714E07
10 0 .526222488569E 07
10 1 .835115775652E 07 .131314331796E06
10 2 .942413882081E 07 .515791657390E07
10 3 .689895048176E 08 .153768828694E06
10 4 .840764549716E 07 .792806255331E07
10 5 .493395938185E 07 .505370221897E07
10 6 .375885236598E 07 .795667053872E07
10 7 .811460540925E 08 .336629641314E08
10 8 .404927981694E 07 .918705975922E07
10 9 .125491334939E 06 .376516222392E07
10 10 .100538634409E 06 .240148449520E07
11 0 .509613707522E 07
Table 5.1
EGM96
Earth Gravitational Model
Truncated at n=m=18
E03=X10
3
; E05=X10
5
; etc.
56
Degree and Order Normalized Gravitational Coefficients
n m
m n
C
m n
S
11 1 .151687209933E 07 .268604146166E07
11 2 .186309749878E 07 .990693862047E07
11 3 .309871239854E 07 .148131804260E06
11 4 .389580205051E 07 .636666511980E07
11 5 .377848029452E 07 .494736238169E07
11 6 .118676592395E 08 .344769584593E07
11 7 .411565188074E –08 .898252808977E07
11 8 .598410841300E 08 .243989612237E07
11 9 .314231072723E 07 .417731829829E07
11 10 .521882681927E 07 .183364561788E07
11 11 .460344448746E 07 .696662308185E07
12 0 .377252636558E 07
12 1 .540654977836E 07 .435675748979E07
12 2 .142979642253E 07 .320975937619E07
12 3 .393995876403E 07 .244264863505E07
12 4 .686908127934E 07 .415081109011E08
12 5 .309411128730E 07 .782536279033E08
12 6 .341523275208E 08 .391765484449E07
12 7 .186909958587E 07 .356131849382E07
12 8 .253769398865E 07 .169361024629E07
12 9 .422880630662E 07 .252692598301E07
12 10 .617619654902E 08 .308375794212E07
12 11 .112502994122E 07 .637946501558E08
12 12 .249532607390E 08 .111780601900E07
13 0 .422982206413E 07
13 1 .513569699124E 07 .390510386685E07
13 2 .559217667099E 07 .627337565381E07
13 3 .219360927945E 07 .974829362237E07
13 4 .313762599666E 08 .119627874492E07
13 5 .590049394905E 07 .664975958036E07
13 6 .359038073075E 07 .657280613686E08
13 7 .253002147087E 08 .621470822331E08
Table 5.1
EGM96
Earth Gravitational Model
Truncated at n=m=18
E03=X10
3
; E05=X10
5
; etc.
57
Degree and Order Normalized Gravitational Coefficients
n m
m n
C
m n
S
13 8 .983150822695E 08 .104740222825E07
13 9 .247325771791E 07 .452870369936E07
13 10 .410324653930E 07 .368121029480E07
13 11 .443869677399E 07 .476507804288E08
13 12 .312622200222E 07 .878405809267E07
13 13 .612759553199E 07 .685261488594E07
14 0 .242786502921E 07
14 1 .186968616381E 07 .294747542249E07
14 2 .367789379502E 07 .516779392055E08
14 3 .358875097333E 07 .204618827833E07
14 4 .183865617792E 08 .226780613566E07
14 5 .287344273542E 07 .163882249728E07
14 6 .194810485574E 07 .247831272781E08
14 7 .375003839415E 07 .417291319429E08
14 8 .350946485865E 07 .153515265203E07
14 9 .320284939341E 07 .288804922064E07
14 10 .390329180008E 07 .144308452469E08
14 11 .153970516502E 07 .390548173245E07
14 12 .840829163869E 08 .311327189117E07
14 13 .322147043964E 07 .451897224960E07
14 14 .518980794309E 07 .481506636748E08
15 0 .147910068708E 08
15 1 .100817268177E 07 .109773066324E07
15 2 .213942673775E 07 .308914875777E07
15 3 .521392929041E 07 .172892926103E07
15 4 .408150084078E 07 .650174707794E08
15 5 .124935723108E 07 .808375563996E08
15 6 .331211643896E 07 .368246004304E07
15 7 .596210699259E 07 .531841171879E08
15 8 .322428691498E 07 .221523579587E07
15 9 .128788268085E 07 .375629820829E07
15 10 .104688722521E 07 .147222147015E07
Table 5.1
EGM96
Earth Gravitational Model
Truncated at n=m=18
E03=X10
3
; E05=X10
5
; etc.
58
Degree and Order Normalized Gravitational Coefficients
n m
m n
C
m n
S
15 11 .111675061934E 08 .180996198432E07
15 12 .323962134415E 07 .155243104746E07
15 13 .283933019117E 07 .422066791103E08
15 14 .519168859330E 08 .243752739666E07
15 15 .190930538322E 07 .471139421558E08
16 0 .315322986722E 08
16 1 .258360856231E 07 .325447560859E07
16 2 .233671404512E 07 .288799363439E07
16 3 .336019429391E 07 .220418988010E07
16 4 .402316284314E 07 .483837716909E07
16 5 .129501939245E 07 .319458578129E08
16 6 .140239252323E 07 .350760208303E07
16 7 .708412635136E 08 .881581561131E08
16 8 .209018868094E 07 .500527390530E08
16 9 .218588720643E 07 .395012419994E07
16 10 .117529900814E 07 .114211582961E07
16 11 .187574042592E 07 .303161919925E08
16 12 .195400194038E 07 .666983574071E08
16 13 .138196369576E 07 .102778499508E08
16 14 .193182168856E 07 .386174893776E07
16 15 .145149060142E 07 .327443078739E07
16 16 .379671710746E 07 .302155372655E08
17 0 .197605066395E 07
17 1 .254177575118E 07 .306630529689E07
17 2 .195988656721E 07 .649265893410E08
17 3 .564123066224E 08 .678327095529E08
17 4 .707457075637E 08 .249437600834E07
17 5 .154987006052E 07 .660021551851E08
17 6 .118194012847E 07 .289770975177E07
17 7 .242149702381E 07 .422222973697E08
17 8 .388442097559E 07 .358904095943E08
17 9 .381356493231E 08 .281466943714E07
Table 5.1
EGM96
Earth Gravitational Model
Truncated at n=m=18
E03=X10
3
; E05=X10
5
; etc.
59
Degree and Order Normalized Gravitational Coefficients
n m
m n
C
m n
S
17 10 .388216085542E 08 .181328176508E07
17 11 .157356600363E 07 .106560649404E07
17 12 .288013010655E 07 .203450136084E07
17 13 .165503425731E 07 .204667531435E07
17 14 .141983872649E 07 .114948025244E07
17 15 .542100361657E 08 .532610369811E08
17 16 .301992205043E 07 .365331918531E08
17 17 .343086856041E 07 .198523455381E07
18 0 .508691038332E 08
18 1 .721098449649E 08 .388714473013E07
18 2 .140631771205E 07 .100093396253E07
18 3 .507232520873E 08 .490865931335E08
18 4 .548759308217E 07 .135267117720E08
18 5 .548710485555E 08 .264338629459E07
18 6 .146570755271E 07 .136438019951E07
18 7 .675812328417E 08 .688577494235E08
18 8 .307619845144E 07 .417827734107E08
18 9 .188470601880E 07 .368302736953E07
18 10 .527535358934E 08 .466091535881E08
18 11 .729628518960E 08 .195215208020E08
18 12 .297449412422E 07 .164497878395E07
18 13 .627919717152E 08 .348383939938E07
18 14 .815605336410E 08 .128636585027E07
18 15 .405003412879E 07 .202684998021E07
18 16 .104141042028E 07 .661468817624E08
18 17 .358771586841E 08 .448065587564E08
18 18 .312351953717E 08 .109906032543E07
Table 5.2
EGM96 Gravity Anomaly Degree Variances
Units = (1 x 10
5
m/second
2
)
2
or mgal
2
510
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
2 7.6 36 3.3 70 2.5 104 2.8
3 33.9 37 3.5 71 2.6 105 2.4
4 19.8 38 3.0 72 3.4 106 2.8
5 21.0 39 3.3 73 2.8 107 2.7
6 19.7 40 2.8 74 3.7 108 2.9
7 19.6 41 3.1 75 2.9 109 2.8
8 11.2 42 3.4 76 2.7 110 3.3
9 11.2 43 3.0 77 2.9 111 2.9
10 9.8 44 3.0 78 2.9 112 2.5
11 6.6 45 3.4 79 3.0 113 2.7
12 2.7 46 3.8 80 2.8 114 3.0
13 7.9 47 3.7 81 3.5 115 3.1
14 3.5 48 3.2 82 4.0 116 2.6
15 3.7 49 2.7 83 3.7 117 2.7
16 4.1 50 3.6 84 3.0 118 2.8
17 3.2 51 3.0 85 2.9 119 2.8
18 3.9 52 3.1 86 3.4 120 2.7
19 3.2 53 4.0 87 3.0 121 2.5
20 3.1 54 3.6 88 2.9 122 2.2
21 3.7 55 3.2 89 2.8 123 2.7
22 3.5 56 3.8 90 2.4 124 2.4
23 3.1 57 3.8 91 3.1 125 2.8
24 2.4 58 3.0 92 3.0 126 2.8
25 3.1 59 3.6 93 3.0 127 3.0
26 2.4 60 3.2 94 3.1 128 2.2
27 1.7 61 3.1 95 3.0 129 2.4
28 3.0 62 3.3 96 2.4 130 2.2
29 2.6 63 3.2 97 2.9 131 2.3
30 2.9 64 2.8 98 3.2 132 2.2
31 2.7 65 2.7 99 2.7 133 2.5
32 2.7 66 3.2 100 2.8 134 2.3
33 3.0 67 3.2 101 2.1 135 2.3
34 4.0 68 3.2 102 2.9 136 2.4
35 3.9 69 3.4 103 3.5 137 2.3
Table 5.2
EGM96 Gravity Anomaly Degree Variances
Units = (1 x 10
5
m/second
2
)
2
or mgal
2
511
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
138 2.6 172 1.6 206 1.2 240 .9
139 2.1 173 1.7 207 1.2 241 .9
140 2.4 174 2.0 208 1.2 242 .9
141 2.2 175 1.7 209 1.2 243 .8
142 1.8 176 1.5 210 1.4 244 .8
143 2.1 177 1.6 211 1.2 245 .9
144 2.3 178 1.5 212 1.2 246 .9
145 2.0 179 1.8 213 1.1 247 .8
146 2.0 180 1.7 214 1.3 248 .7
147 2.1 181 1.5 215 1.1 249 .8
148 2.0 182 1.6 216 1.1 250 .9
149 2.0 183 1.5 217 1.1 251 .8
150 1.9 184 1.6 218 1.1 252 .9
151 2.3 185 1.4 219 1.3 253 .8
152 1.9 186 1.5 220 1.1 254 .7
153 2.0 187 1.5 221 1.1 255 .8
154 1.7 188 1.5 222 1.1 256 .7
155 2.1 189 1.3 223 1.0 257 .7
156 1.9 190 1.3 224 1.1 258 .7
157 1.9 191 1.4 225 1.0 259 .7
158 1.7 192 1.6 226 1.1 260 .7
159 2.0 193 1.5 227 .9 261 .7
160 1.7 194 1.3 228 1.0 262 .6
161 1.8 195 1.4 229 1.1 263 .7
162 2.0 196 1.3 230 1.0 264 .6
163 2.0 197 1.3 231 1.1 265 .6
164 1.9 198 1.4 232 1.1 266 .7
165 2.1 199 1.3 233 1.0 267 .7
166 1.9 200 1.3 234 1.0 268 .6
167 2.0 201 1.3 235 1.0 269 .6
168 2.1 202 1.2 236 1.0 270 .6
169 1.8 203 1.2 237 .9 271 .7
170 1.9 204 1.3 238 .9 272 .6
171 1.9 205 1.1 239 .9 273 .5
Table 5.2
EGM96 Gravity Anomaly Degree Variances
Units = (1 x 10
5
m/second
2
)
2
or mgal
2
512
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
Degree Degree
Variance
274 .6 296 .5 318 .5 340 .3
275 .6 297 .5 319 .4 341 .4
276 .6 298 .4 320 .4 342 .3
277 .5 299 .4 321 .4 343 .3
278 .6 300 .5 322 .4 344 .3
279 .6 301 .5 323 .4 345 .3
280 .6 302 .4 324 .4 346 .3
281 .6 303 .5 325 .4 347 .3
282 .6 304 .4 326 .4 348 .3
283 .6 305 .4 327 .3 349 .3
284 .5 306 .4 328 .4 350 .3
285 .5 307 .4 329 .3 351 .3
286 .5 308 .4 330 .3 352 .3
287 .5 309 .5 331 .3 353 .3
288 .5 310 .4 332 .3 354 .3
289 .5 311 .4 333 .3 355 .3
290 .5 312 .4 334 .3 356 .3
291 .5 313 .4 335 .3 357 .3
292 .5 314 .4 336 .3 358 .3
293 .5 315 .4 337 .3 359 .3
294 .5 316 .4 338 .3 360 .3
295 .5 317 .4 339 .3
The formula for computing gravity anomaly degree variances (c
n
) is:
( ) ( )
∑
·
+ − γ ·
n
0 m
2
m n
2
m n
2
2
n
S C 1 n c
γ = Mean value of theoretical gravity (979764.32222 mgal).
C S
nm nm
, = normalized gravitational coefficients of degree (n) and order (m).
Units = (1 x 10
5
m/second
2
)
2
or mgal
2
514
This page is intentionally blank
61
6. WGS 84 EGM96 GEOID
6.1 General
In geodetic applications three primary reference surfaces for the Earth are used:
1) the Earth’s topographic surface, 2) the geometric surface taken to be an ellipsoid of
revolution and 3) the geoid.
When the gravity potential (W) is a constant, Equation (61) defines a family of
equipotential surfaces (geops) [33] of the Earth’s gravity field. The geoid is that particular geop
that is closely associated with the mean ocean surface.
W(X,Y,Z) = constant (61)
Traditionally, when a geoid is developed, the constant (W), representing the
potential anywhere on this surface, is constrained or assumed to be equal to the normal potential
(U
0
) of a ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid. Throughout this refinement effort, however, the authors
recognize that the WGS 84 Ellipsoid no longer represents a true ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid. The
difference between the WGS 84 semimajor axis and the current ‘bestfitting’ value is 0.54 m.
In terms of the geoid, this effect is handled through application of a ‘zeroorder’ undulation (N
0
)
of the geoid. With this approach, the WGS 84 Ellipsoid can be retained with no introduction of
any additional errors by not using the ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid.
In common practice the geoid is expressed at a given point in terms of the
distance above (+N) or below (N) the ellipsoid. For practical reasons, the geoid has been
used to serve as a vertical reference surface for mean sea level (MSL) heights. In areas where
elevation data are not available from conventional leveling, an approximation of mean sea level
heights, using orthometric heights, can be obtained from the following equation [33]:
h = H + N (62)
H = h  N (63)
where:
h = geodetic height (height relative to the ellipsoid)
N = geoid undulation
H = orthometric height (height relative to the geoid)
Alternatively, some countries replace orthometric heights with normal heights and
geoid undulations with height anomalies. This use of height anomalies eliminates assumptions
62
about the density of masses between the geoid and the ground. Therefore, Equation (62) can
be reformulated as:
h = H + N = H* + ζ (64)
where:
H* = normal height
ζ = height anomaly
The telluroid is a surface defined where the normal potential U at every point Q is
equal to the actual potential W at its corresponding point P on the Earth’s surface [33]. The
height anomaly is the distance between point Q on the telluroid and point P on the Earth’s
surface.
Equation (63) illustrates the use of geoid undulations in the determination of
orthometric heights (H) from geodetic heights (h) derived using satellite positions (e.g., Global
Positioning System) located on the Earth’s physical surface or aboard a vehicle operating near
the Earth’s surface.
6.2 Formulas, Representations and Analysis
A significant departure from past practices has been implemented in the
determination of geoid undulations. The WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations are based on
height anomalies calculated from the WGS 84 EGM96 spherical harmonic coefficients complete
to degree and order 360. To transform from height anomalies to geoid undulations, the zero
degree undulation term of 0.53 meters and the WGS 84 EGM96 correction coefficients
through degree and order 360 are applied [34]. The value of 0.53 meters is based on the
difference between an ‘ideal’ Earth ellipsoid in a tidefree system and the WGS 84 Ellipsoid.
The ‘ideal’ ellipsoid was defined from the report of the International Association of Geodesy
(IAG) Special Commission on Fundamental Constants [23]. The ‘ideal’ Earth ellipsoid, in a
tidefree system, is defined by a = 6378136.46 meters and 1/f = 298.25765.
6.2.1 Formulas
The formula for calculating the WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations
starts with the calculation of the height anomaly ζ [34]:
( )
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
1
]
1
¸
∑
·
∑
·
φ λ + λ
φ γ
· λ φ ζ
m
2 n
n
0 m
sin
nm
P m sin
nm
S m cos
nm
C
n
r
a
r
GM
r , , (65)
63
where
nm
C and
nm
S are the fully normalized potential coefficients of degree n and order m from
EGM96. Equation (65) is evaluated at a point P(φ,λ,r) on or above the surface of the earth:
GM = The Earth’s gravitational constant
r = Geocentric distance to the point P
a = Semimajor axis of the reference ellipsoid
φ = Geocentric latitude
All quantities in Equation (65) are defined for the WGS 84 EGM96 with
one exception. In Equation (65), the even zonal coefficients of subscripts 2 through 10 are
coefficient differences between the dynamic WGS84 EGM96 and geometrically implied
coefficients.
ric) n,0(geomet c) n,0(dynami n,0
C C C − ·
Table 6.1
Geometric Coefficients
ric) 2,0(geomet
C
0.484166774985E03
ric) 4,0(geomet
C
0.790303733511E06
ric) 6,0(geomet
C
0.168724961151E08
ric) 8,0(geomet
C
0.346052468394E11
tric) 10,0(geome
C
0.265002225747E14
To calculate the geoid undulation N (in meters) we use the formula [41]:
( ) λ φ, N =
0
N + ( ) r , , λ φ ζ +
( )
( ) λ φ
γ
λ φ ∆
, H
, g
BA
(66)
where:
N
0
= 0.53 meters (zero degree term)
and the parameters to compute the correction term discussed in Section 6.2 above are:
( ) λ φ,
BA
g ∆ = Bouguer gravity anomaly from EGM96
64
γ = Average value of normal gravity
( ) H φ λ , = defined from harmonic analysis of JGP95E (Joint
Gravity Project 95) elevation database
The Bouguer anomaly can be computed from the EGM96 spherical
harmonic set and the harmonic analysis of the JGP95E elevation database. JGP95E is the
worldwide 5′ digital elevation file developed by NIMA and NASA/GSFC from best available
sources for the EGM96 project.
( ) ( ) ( ) ∆ ∆ g g H
BA FA
φ λ φ λ φ λ , , . , · − × 01119 (67)
where:
( ) ∆g
FA
φ λ , = Freeair gravity anomaly from EGM96
6.2.2 Permanent Tide Systems
In the calculation of geoid undulations from the EGM96 Geopotential
Model, the second degree zonal coefficient is given in the tidefree system. The tidefree
definition means that any geoid undulations calculated from EGM96 exist for a tidefree Earth
with all (direct and indirect) effects of the sun and moon removed. Other geoids to consider are
the mean geoid (geoid which would exist in the presence of the sun and moon) and the zero
geoid (geoid which exists if the permanent direct effects of the sun and moon are removed but
the indirect effect related to the Earth’s elastic deformation is retained). A complete set of
equations to convert from one tide system to another can be found in [35].
To calculate the geoid in the zerotide system use the formula:
N N
Z n
· + − 2 97 888
2
. . sin φ cm (68)
where:
N
Z
· zerotide geoid
N
n
= tidefree geoid
6.2.3 Representations and Analysis
The geoid undulations can be depicted as a contour chart which shows
the deviations of the geoid from the ellipsoid selected as the mathematical figure of the Earth.
Figure 6.1 is a worldwide WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulation Contour Chart developed from
66
a worldwide 15′ x 15′ grid of geoid undulations calculated by using WGS 84 parameters and
the WGS 84 EGM96 coefficients through n=m=360 in Equation (66). The WGS 84 EGM96
Geoid Undulations, taken worldwide on the basis of a 15′ x 15′ grid, exhibit the following
statistics:
Mean = 0.57 meters
Standard Deviation = 30.56 meters
Minimum = 106.99 meters
Maximum = 85.39 meters
The locations of the minimum and maximum undulations are:
Minimum: φ = 4.75° N, λ = 78.75° E
Maximum: φ = 8.25° S, λ = 147.25° E
This standard deviation indicates the typical difference between the geoid and the reference
ellipsoid.
The WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations have an error range of t0.5 to
t1.0 meters (one sigma) worldwide.
6.3 Availability of WGS 84 EGM96 Data Products
The WGS 84 EGM96 standard products are:
• A 15′ x 15′ WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulation file calculated from
Equation (66)
• The EGM96 spherical harmonic coefficients complete to degree and order
360
Additional information on the WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations, associated
software and data files can be obtained from the location and addresses in the PREFACE.
71
7. WGS 84 RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER GEODETIC SYSTEMS
7.1 General
One of the principal purposes of a world geodetic system is to eliminate the use
of local horizontal geodetic datums. Although the number of local horizontal geodetic datums,
counting island and astronomicbased datums, exceeds several hundred, the number of local
horizontal datums in current use is significantly less and continues to decrease. Until a global
geodetic datum is accepted, used and implemented worldwide, a means to convert between
geodetic datums is required. To accomplish the conversion, local geodetic datum and WGS
coordinates are both required at one or more sites within the local datum area so that a local
geodetic datum to WGS datum shift can be computed. Satellite stations positioned within
WGS 84, with known local geodetic datum coordinates, were the basic ingredients in the
development of local geodetic datum to WGS 84 datum shifts.
Local horizontal datums were developed in the past to satisfy mapping and
navigation requirements for specific regions of the Earth. A geocentric datum of large
geographic extent is the North American Datum 1983 (NAD 83). In the past couple of
decades, development of global geocentric datums has become possible. WGS 84 and the
ITRF are examples of such datums.
The most accurate approach for obtaining WGS 84 coordinates is to acquire
satellite tracking data at the site of interest and position it directly in WGS 84 using GPS
positioning techniques. Direct occupation of the site is not always possible or warranted. In
these cases, a datum transformation can be used to convert coordinates from the local system
to WGS 84.
7.2 Relationship of WGS 84 to the ITRF
As discussed in Chapter 2, the WGS 84 is consistent with the ITRF. The
differences between WGS 84 and ITRF are in the centimeter range worldwide. Therefore, for
all mapping and charting purposes, they can be considered the same.
In recent years, some countries and regions have been converting to datums
based on the ITRF. Such national or regional datums that are rigorously based on the ITRF
can also be considered as identical to WGS 84. An example of such a datum is the European
Terrestrial Reference Frame 1989 (EUREF89).
7.3 Relationship of WGS 84 to the NAD 83
The North American Datum 1983 (NAD 83) is a geocentric datum that was
established in 1986 for the United States, Canada, Mexico, Central America and the
Caribbean Islands. Hawaii and Greenland were also connected to this datum. It is based on
72
a horizontal adjustment of conventional survey data and the inclusion of Transit Satellite
Doppler data and Very Long Baseline Interferometry (VLBI) data. The global Doppler and
VLBI observations were used to orient the NAD 83 reference frame to the BIH Terrestrial
System of 1984. The orientation of the ECEF coordinate axes of the NAD 83 reference
frame is identical to that of the original WGS 84 reference frame.
NAD 83 uses the Geodetic Reference System 1980 (GRS 80) ellipsoid as its
reference ellipsoid with the geometric center of the ellipsoid coincident with the center of mass
of the Earth and the origin of the coordinate system. The semimajor axis and flattening
parameters are adopted directly as
a = 6378137 m
1/f = 298.257222101
The WGS 84 Ellipsoid is for all practical purposes identical to the GRS 80
ellipsoid. They use the same value for the semimajor axis and have the same orientation with
respect to the center of mass and the coordinate system origin. However, WGS 84 uses a
derived value for the flattening that is computed from the normalized second degree zonal
harmonic gravitational coefficient C
2 0 ,
. C
2 0 ,
was derived from the GRS 80 value for J
2
and
truncated to 8 significant digits as:
C
2 0 ,
= J
2
/(5)
1/2
(71)
The resulting WGS 84 value for 1/f is 298.257223563. The difference
between the GRS 80 and WGS 84 values for f creates a difference of 0.1 mm in the derived
semiminor axes of the two ellipsoids.
Based on these definitions, geodetic positions determined with respect to NAD
83 or WGS 84 have uncertainties of about one meter in each component. For mapping,
charting and navigation, the two systems are indistinguishable at scales of 1:5,000 or smaller
and with accuracies of about 2 m. Note that the National Map Accuracy Standard requires
test points to be horizontally accurate to 0.85 mm (1/30 in.) for scales of 1:20,000 or larger
and 0.51 mm (1/50 in.) for scales less than 1:20,000. For example, this corresponds to 4.2 m
at 1:5,000 and 25 m at 1:50,000. For geodetic applications, one can expect to see a
difference of a meter or more between the WGS 84 and NAD 83 positions of the same point.
This is due to the uncertainty associated with each independent determination and the fact that
the errors are additive when comparing the difference in the coordinates.
WGS 84 has undergone several enhancements since its original definition. The
practical realization of the reference frame is determined by a network of permanent GPS
tracking stations which are aligned with the ITRF, the successor to the BIH Terrestrial
73
System, through a globally distributed set of stations with very high accuracy ITRF
coordinates. The improved WGS 84 reference frame is coincident with the ITRF at the 5 cm
level. WGS 84 geodetic positions can be determined with uncertainties at the 2550 cm level
or better in a component depending upon the technique. These enhancements have had no
effect on mapping, charting and navigation applications since they are at the meter level or
smaller.
Meanwhile, the NOAA’s National Geodetic Survey has established High
Accuracy Reference Networks (HARNs) in many states in the U.S. using GPS techniques.
HARNs in effect represent an upgrading of the original NAD 83 geodetic control networks.
The new networks have relative accuracies 12 orders of magnitude better than the original
networks that define NAD 83. Each state’s HARN is adjusted separately but is tied to a
national network of the highest accuracy points. There can be differences of 0.3 to 0.8 m
between the original NAD 83 coordinates and the new ones. Thus, although both NAD 83
and WGS 84 have undergone improvements in accuracy and precision, coordinates
determined in one system will differ from coordinates determined in the other system for a
specific point. These differences may be on the order of one meter or less and are due to
systematic differences of the reference frames combined with random errors associated with
the GPS observations.
7.4 Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformations
For most applications and DoD operations involving maps, charts, navigation
and geospatial information, WGS 84 coordinates will be obtained from a Local Geodetic
Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation. This transformation can be performed in
curvilinear (geodetic) coordinates:
φ
WGS 84
= φ
Local
+ ∆φ
λ
WGS 84
= λ
Local
+ ∆λ (72)
h
WGS 84
= h
Local
+ ∆h
where ∆φ, ∆λ, ∆h are provided by the Standard Molodensky transformation formulas [36],
[37]:
∆φ″ = { ∆X sin φ cos λ  ∆Y sin φ sin λ + ∆Z cos φ + ∆a (R
N
e
2
sin φ
cos φ)/a + ∆f [R
M
(a/b)+ R
N
(b/a)] sin φ cos φ} • [(R
M
+ h) sin 1″]
1
∆λ″ = [ ∆X sin λ + ∆Y cos λ] • [(R
N
+ h) cos φ sin 1″]
1
and
74
∆h = ∆X cos φ cos λ + ∆Y cos φ sin λ + ∆Z sin φ  ∆a (a/R
N
) + ∆f (b/a)
R
N
sin
2
φ
where:
φ, λ, h = geodetic coordinates (old ellipsoid)
φ = geodetic latitude. The angle between the plane of the geodetic equator
and the ellipsoidal normal at a point (measured positive north from the
geodetic equator, negative south)
λ = geodetic longitude. The angle between the plane of the Zero Meridian
and the plane of the geodetic meridian of the point (measured in the
plane of the geodetic equator, positive from 0° to 180° E and negative
from 0° to 180° W)
h = N + H
where:
h = geodetic height (height relative to the ellipsoid)
N = geoid height
H = orthometric height (height relative to the geoid)
∆φ, ∆λ, ∆h = corrections to transform local geodetic datum coordinates to
WGS 84 φ, λ, h values. The units of ∆φ and ∆λ are arc
seconds (″); the units of ∆h are meters (m)
‘
NOTE: AS “h’s” ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS, THE
∆h CORRECTION WILL NOT BE APPLICABLE WHEN TRANSFORMING TO WGS
84.
∆X, ∆Y, ∆Z = shifts between centers of the local geodetic datum and
WGS 84 Ellipsoid; corrections to transform local geodetic
systemrelated rectangular coordinates (X, Y, Z) to WGS
84related X, Y, Z values
a = semimajor axis of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid
b = semiminor axis of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid
b/a = 1  f
75
f = flattening of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid
∆a, ∆f = differences between the semimajor axis and flattening of the
local geodetic datum ellipsoid and the WGS 84 Ellipsoid,
respectively (WGS 84 minus Local)
e = first eccentricity
e
2
= 2f – f
2
R
N
= radius of curvature in the prime vertical
R
N
= a/(l e
2
sin
2
φ)
1/2
R
M
= radius of curvature in the meridian
R
M
= a(l e
2
)/(l e
2
sin
2
φ)
3/2
NOTE: All ∆quantities are formed by subtracting local geodetic datum ellipsoid values from
WGS 84 Ellipsoid values.
Appendix A lists the reference ellipsoid names and parameters (semimajor axis
and flattening) for local datums currently tied to WGS 84 and used for generating datum
transformations.
Appendix B contains horizontal transformation parameters for the geodetic
datums/systems which have been generated from satellite ties to the local geodetic control.
Due to the errors and distortion that affect most local geodetic datums, use of mean datum
shifts (∆X, ∆Y, ∆Z) in the Standard Molodensky datum transformation formulas may produce
results with poor quality of “fit”. Improved fit between the local datum and WGS 84 may
result only with better and more dense ties with local or regional control points.
Updates to the datum transformation parameters are identified through the use
of cycle numbers and issue dates. Cycle numbers have been set to the numerical value of zero
for all datum transformations appearing in the August 1993 Insert 1 and the WGS 84
TR8350.2 Second Edition. All new datum transformations will carry a cycle number of zero.
As updates are made the cycle number will increment by one.
Datum transformation shifts derived from nonsatellite information are listed in
Appendix C.
76
7.5 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations (MRE)
The development of Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation
Multiple Regression Equations [38] was initiated to obtain better fits over continental size land
areas than could be achieved using the Standard Molodensky formula with datum shifts (∆X,
∆Y, ∆Z).
For ∆φ, the general form of the Multiple Regression Equation is (also see [38]):
∆φ = A
0
+ A
1
U + A
2
V + A
3
U
2
+ A
4
UV + A
5
V
2
+...+ A
99
U
9
V
9
(73)
where:
A
0
= constant
A
0
, A
1
,..., A
n n
= coefficients determined in the development
U = k (φ − φ
m
) = normalized geodetic latitude of the computation point
V = k (λ − λ
m
) = normalized geodetic longitude of the computation point
k = scale factor and degreetoradian conversion
φ, λ = local geodetic latitude and local geodetic longitude (in degrees),
respectively, of the computation point
φ
m
, λ
m
= midlatitude and midlongitude values, respectively, of the local
geodetic datum area (in degrees)
Similar equations are obtained for ∆λ and ∆h by replacing ∆φ in the left portion
of Equation (73) by ∆λ and ∆h, respectively.
Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression
Equations for seven major continental size datums, covering contiguous continental size land
areas with large distortion, are provided in Appendix D. The main advantage of MREs lies in
modeling of distortion for better fit in geodetic applications. However, caution must be used
to ensure that MREs are not extrapolated outside of the area of intended use. Large
distortions can be realized in very short distances outside of the area where the stations that
were used in the development of the MREs exist.
7.6 WGS 72 to WGS 84
See Appendix E.
81
8. ACCURACY OF WGS 84 COORDINATES
8.1 Discussion
Numerous techniques now exist to establish WGS 84 coordinates for a given site.
The accuracy and precision achieved by these various techniques vary significantly. The most
common, currently available techniques are listed below:
• General geodetic solution for station coordinates, orbits and other
parameters of interest
• Direct geodetic point positioning at a stationary, solitary station using a
‘geodeticquality’, dual frequency GPS receiver and NIMA Precise
Ephemerides and Satellite Clock States (note that the effects of Selective
Availability (SA) must be removed)
• Same as above but using the Broadcast GPS Ephemerides and Clock
States
• GPS differential (baseline) processing from known WGS 84 sites
• GPS Precise Positioning Service (PPS) navigation solutions
• Instantaneous
• Mean over some averaging interval
• GPS Standard Positioning Service (SPS) navigation solutions
• Instantaneous
• Mean over some averaging interval
• Photogrammetricallyderived coordinates from NIMA products
• Mapderived coordinates from digital or paper NIMA products
Clearly, the above positioning techniques do not provide WGS 84 coordinates
with uniform accuracy and statistical properties. Even within a given technique, accuracy
variations can occur due, for example, to the treatment of certain error sources such as the
troposphere. Because of these variations and periodic algorithm improvements, full
characterization of the accuracy achieved by all the above techniques would be quite challenging
and beyond the scope of this document.
In the terminology of Chapter 2, a network of stations obtained from one of these
techniques yields a unique realization of the WGS 84 reference frame. Currently, within the
DoD, almost all operational geodetic survey requirements can be met with direct geodetic point
82
positioning with GPS. The NIMAdeveloped technique [39] which performs this function has
been demonstrated to achieve an accuracy at a single station of:
1994present: 30 cm (1σ), in each of the 3 position components (φ,λ,h)
19891994: 100 cm (1σ), in each of the 3 position components (φ,λ,h)
Under special circumstances, such as the refinement of the permanent DoD GPS
tracking network coordinates, a general geodetic solution is performed where the positions of
the entire permanent global DoD network are estimated simultaneously with many other
parameters. This type of special technique, which was used to develop the WGS 84 (G873)
reference frame, has demonstrated an accuracy of:
5cm (1σ), in each of the 3 position components (φ,λ,h)
Other techniques which are based on older, previously established survey
coordinates can also yield ‘WGS 84’ coordinates with limited accuracy. These techniques may
be suitable for certain mapping applications but must be treated very cautiously if a high level of
accuracy is required. Some of these alternate techniques to obtain WGS 84 coordinates are
listed below:
• TRANSIT Point Positioning directly in WGS 84 (1σ = 12 m)
• TRANSIT Point Positions transformed from NSWC9Z2
• GPS differential (baseline) processing from a known (TRANSITdetermined)
WGS 84 geodetic point position
• By a WGS 72 to WGS 84 Coordinate Transformation
• By a Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation
Because geospatial information within the DoD often originates from multiple
sources and processes, the absolute accuracy of a given WGS 84 position becomes very
important when information from these various sources is combined in ‘Geographic Information
Systems’ or ‘geospatial databases’. Because of their high fidelity, surveyed WGS 84 geodetic
control points can often serve to improve or validate the accuracy of maps, image products or
other geospatial information. Even GPS navigation solutions can serve a similar role, as long as
the accuracy of these solutions is well understood.
83
8.2 Summary
In summary, while WGS 84 provides a common global framework for all
geospatial information within the DoD, the accuracy of each ‘layer’ of information depends
largely on the metric fidelity of the process used to collect that information. WGS 84 surveyed
control points provide an accuracy level which meets or exceeds all current operational DoD
requirements.
84
This page is intentionally blank
91
9. IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES
9.1 Introduction
WGS 84 represents the current stateoftheart DoD operational reference
system which has been derived from the best available satellite tracking, satellite altimeter and
surface gravity data. It supports the most stringent accuracy requirements for geodetic
positioning, navigation and mapping within DoD. It is the policy of NIMA to continually
improve components of the WGS 84 system to maintain it as a stateoftheart DoD
operational World Geodetic System. This will lead to improvements in the definition and
realization of the system as:
• The basic tracking stations which are used are updated, repositioned or
their number is increased
• Additional data makes it possible to improve the accuracy of individual local
datum relationships to WGS 84
• Additional surface gravity data become available in various areas of the
world to improve the gravity and geoid models
The current definition of WGS 84 recognizes the continually changing physical
Earth, shifting of internal masses and continental plate motions and accommodates this time
dependency in its definition through a plate motion model. For the high accuracy geodetic
positioning requirements, this requires a time epoch to be defined for all station coordinates
since they are in continual motion. As mentioned previously in this report, the coordinates of the
fixed GPS tracking stations (WGS 84 (G873)) were implemented into the production of the
NIMA precise orbits starting at GPS week 873 (September 29, 1996) with an epoch of
1997.0.
As a consequence of the inherent high accuracy and continual refinement of the
definition and realization of WGS 84, considerable care should be taken in the implementation
of this system into existing and future weapons systems and geospatial information systems.
This Chapter will address some of the considerations that should be made prior to the
implementation of WGS 84 to ensure that the full benefits of WGS 84 are realized and are
consistent with the operational product accuracy and interoperability requirements of the users.
Careful consideration by the user of the products and accuracy supported by the
implementation can lead to reduced costs and reduced effort in the implementation of WGS 84
with no loss of accuracy of the product. The guidelines presented in this Chapter are organized
around basic classes of users: precise high accuracy geodetic users, cartographic users,
navigation users and geospatial information users. The absolute accuracy requirements vary
significantly between these applications ranging from centimeter requirements for precise
geodetic positioning to hundreds of meters for small scale maps. These recommendations are
92
provided to stimulate users to analyze their specific implementation to determine how best to
implement WGS 84 data and information, rather than a complete implementation which may not
be necessary.
9.1.1 General Recommendations
Before satellite geodetic techniques became available, the local horizontal
datum was defined independently of the local vertical datum. NIMA has developed datum
transformations to convert over 120 local horizontal datums to WGS 84. This generally entails
making survey ties between a number of local geodetic control points and their corresponding
geodetic positions derived from satellite observations. NIMA did this for many years with
Doppler observations from TRANSIT satellites and continues to do it now with GPS. Aside
from the countless maps and charts which are still based on these classical local datums,
numerous land records, property boundaries and other geographic information in many
countries are referenced to local datums. There is currently no world vertical system defined to
unify and tie together local vertical systems. Generally the vertical datum is defined by a series
of tide gauges in the area or by approximating mean sea level by the geoid leading to numerous
realizations of mean sea level. Unfortunately, the local geodetic coordinates on these datums
are of limited use for modern survey, navigation and mapping operations. Modern maps,
navigation systems and geodetic applications require a single accessible, global, 3dimensional
reference frame. It is important for global operations and interoperability that DoD systems
implement and operate as much as possible on WGS 84. It is equally important that systems
implement the WGS 84 information relative to the gravity field, geoid and datum transformations
in a manner that will allow future update of specific portions of the data.
These data will change with future refinements of WGS 84, as improved
information becomes available to NIMA, and this may necessitate updates to existing
implementations as future operational accuracy requirements become known. For example,
implementations of the geoid undulation values as a grid in a lookup table would facilitate easier
future updates than implementation as spherical harmonic coefficients.
9.1.2 Precise Geodetic Applications
For precise surveying applications, full implementation is recommended.
This will provide the user with the ultimate positioning accuracy in WGS 84. It is further
recommended that in these applications coordinates be maintained with an epoch assigned to
each coordinate determination along with an indication of the fixed station GPS coordinate set
used for the realization, such as WGS 84 (G873). The EGM96 through degree and order 70 is
recommended for high accuracy satellite orbit determination and prediction purposes. An Earth
orbiting satellite’s sensitivity to the geopotential is strongly influenced by the satellite’s altitude
range and other orbital parameters. DoD programs performing satellite orbit determination are
advised to determine the maximum degree and order most appropriate for their particular
mission and orbit accuracy requirements.
93
9.1.3 Cartographic Applications
The original definition and realization of WGS 84 still satisfies the DoD’s
mapping and charting requirements. The 12 meter accuracy (lσ) of the WGS 84 reference
frame, as defined in TR8350.2, Second Edition, is more than adequate for large scale mapping.
The current national horizontal map accuracy standard indicates that well defined points should
be located with an accuracy better than 1/30 of an inch (0.85 mm) at a 90 percent confidence
level on maps with scales greater than 1:20,000. This translates to 8.5 m on a 1:10,000 scale
map which is easily met by WGS 84, TR8350.2, Second Edition, assuming, of course, that the
mapping products are on WGS 84 and not a local datum. If the maps or charts are on local
datums, then the application of appropriate datum transformations is necessary to preserve
interoperability with other geospatial information. Depending on the local datum, the accuracy
of the datum transformations can vary from 1 meter to over 25 meters in each component.
The vertical accuracy of geospatial information and resulting map
products depends on how the elevations were compiled. If the elevations are based on first
order geodetic leveling, the control heights are very accurate, probably good to centimeters with
respect to ‘local mean sea level’. A height bias in the local mean sea level would be the major
potential error source. If no leveling data are available for vertical control, elevations are
estimated from height above the WGS 84 Ellipsoid and a geoid height derived from the WGS
84 Geoid model. For mapping processes which use imagery, the orthometric heights (height
above the geoid) are substituted for elevations above mean sea level. For these products the
Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96), which provides a geoid with an accuracy of t0.5 
t1.0 m worldwide, should be implemented, especially for scales 1:10,000 or larger.
Consequently, for mapping implementation, it is very important to have
the product accuracy in mind when implementing the refinements as defined in this document.
Specifically, all datum transformations listed in this report may not be necessary, especially the
regional values. The full resolution of the geoid may also not be necessary based on the changes
of this geoid from the geoid documented in WGS 84, TR8350.2, Second Edition.
Implementation on a 30 minute or 1 degree grid may be more than adequate. Neither does
there appear to be a reason to implement the geoid as spherical harmonics.
9.1.4 Navigation Applications
The navigator represents a user with applications distinct from those
discussed above. The navigator is moving and positioning in realtime or after the fact on land,
air and sea platforms. Accuracy requirements may vary from the centimeter level for precise
geodetic applications, such as aerial photogrammetry, to meters for combined integrated
GPS/Inertial Navigation Systems, to tens of meters for the SPS GPS user. Navigation
applications are also characterized by large numbers of systems in the field, e.g. more than
100,000 GPS military receivers, with legacy systems having different implementations of WGS
84 than the newer systems. Implementation and update of WGS 84 in these platforms are
94
costly and almost impossible to accomplish simultaneously. Therefore, a careful analysis must
be done for each implementation to determine the essential elements of the refined definition of
WGS 84 that need to be implemented. A few suggestions are offered.
The implementation of the geoid in these applications should be as a
lookup table with an appropriate interpolation scheme. To help in deciding the grid interval, a
comparison should be made of the errors introduced in the geoid heights utilizing various grid
sizes. All applications may not require the maximum resolution.
Cycle numbers have been provided to document the datum
transformation changes. This makes it possible for the user to tell if an update has been made to
a specific transformation.
In some cases, the mean datum transformations may be sufficient for the
user’s requirements. Implementation of regional datum transformations may not be required.
Use of the regional transformations versus the mean datum transformations should be analyzed
with respect to the system accuracy capabilities.
9.1.5 Geospatial Information Applications
Geospatial databases contain information from various sources as
thematic layers from which imagery, imagery intelligence and geospatial information can be
derived or extracted. Since the information represented in the various layers has multiple uses
and supports applications of different accuracies, it is important that the accuracy of the basic
information be retained. Therefore, the refined WGS 84 should be implemented in geospatial
systems to maintain the inherent accuracy of the basic data sources.
9.2 Summary
Users need to implement the refinements of the WGS 84 (TR8350.2,
Third Edition) into application systems in a planned and well thought out manner. An analysis
into what aspects of these refinements are required for specific applications should be
performed. This will ensure that the applications have indeed implemented WGS 84
(TR8350.2, Third Edition) in the most effective manner.
101
10. CONCLUSIONS/SUMMARY
The refined World Geodetic System 1984 is based on the use of data, techniques and
technology available in early 1997. As a result, the refined WGS 84 is more accurate than its
predecessor and replaces it as the three dimensional geodetic system officially authorized for
DoD use.
Major changes in this report are as follows:
• Refined Earth Gravitational Model complete to degree and order 360
• New geoid undulations accurate from t0.5 meter to t1.0 meter
• Additional and improved datum transformation parameters from local to WGS 84
• Modifications to the ellipsoidal (normal) gravity model
• New Earth Gravitational Constant (GM)
• New realization of the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame through a more accurate
determination of NIMA and Air Force GPS monitor stations
• Inclusion of a new chapter on implementation guidance
The value of WGS 84 will become increasingly evident with the expansion of geospatial
databases and information systems. Accurate coordinates will ensure consistency,
interoperability and accuracy between thematic data layers. Since the reference system for
NAVSTAR GPS is WGS 84, high quality geodetic coordinates are provided automatically by
NAVSTAR GPS User Equipment. For those using NAVSTAR GPS but still utilizing local
geodetic datums and products, the availability of the more accurate WGS 84 to Local Geodetic
Datum Transformations leads to an improved recovery of local coordinates.
NIMA will continually review DoD requirements and assure that WGS 84 will remain a
dynamic, viable system which meets or exceeds these requirements.
102
This page is intentionally blank
R1
REFERENCES
1. IERS Technical Note 21, IERS Conventions (1996), D. McCarthy, editor, Observatoire
de Paris; l July 1996.
2. Mueller, I.; “Reference Coordinate Systems and Frames: Concepts and Realizations”;
Bulletin Geodesique; Vol. 59; 1985.
3. Cunningham, J.P.; “Determination of TRANET and SMTP Tracking Station Coordinates
for Use in the WGS 84”; NSWC TR 8761; Naval Surface Warfare Center, Dahlgren,
Va.; June 1987.
4. Fell, P., Swift, E.R., Cunningham, J. and Malys, S.; “Bridging the Gap Between
TRANSIT and GPS Point Positioning  The Implications of Higher Order Ionospheric
Refraction on the Realization of the WGS 84 Reference Frame”; NSWCDD TR 92557;
October 1992.
5. Malys, S.; Dispersion and Correlation Among Transformation Parameters Relating Two
Satellite Reference Frames; Ohio State Univ. Dept. of Geodetic Science and Surveying
Report No. 392; July 1988.
6. Malys, S.; “Similarity Transformation Between NAVSAT and GPS Reference Frames”;
American Geophysical Union Chapman Conference on GPS Measurements for
Geodynamics; Ft. Lauderdale, Fl.; September 1988.
7. Swift, E.R.; “Preliminary Comparison of the WGS 84 and SV5 Reference Frames Using
GPS Pseudorange Data”; Proceedings of the Sixth International Geodetic Symposium on
Satellite Positioning; Columbus, Ohio; March 1992.
8. Swift, E.R.; “Improved WGS 84 Coordinates for the DMA and Air Force GPS Tracking
Sites”; Proceedings of ION GPS94; Salt Lake City, Utah; September 1994.
9. Cunningham, J. and Curtis, V. L.; “WGS 84 Coordinate Validation and Improvement for
the NIMA and Air Force GPS Tracking Stations”; NSWCDD/TR96/201; November
1996.
10. Malys, S. and Slater, J.A.; “Maintenance and Enhancement of the World Geodetic
System 1984”; Proceedings of ION GPS94; Salt Lake City, Utah; September 1994.
11. Cunningham, J.P. and Curtis, V.L.; “Estimating GPS Orbits, Clocks and Covariances in
Support of SATRACK II”; NAVSWC TR 91539; Dahlgren, Va.; August 1991.
R2
12. DeMets, C.; Personal Communication; April 1997.
13. Moritz, H. and Mueller, I.I.; Earth RotationTheory and Observation; Ungar Publishing
Company; New York, New York; 1987.
14. Kaplan, G.H.; The IAU Resolutions on Astronomical Constants, Time Scales, and the
Fundamental Reference Frame; Circular No. 163; United States Naval Observatory;
Washington, DC; 10 December 1981.
15. IERS Technical Note 13, IERS Conventions (1992), D. McCarthy, editor, Observatoire
de Paris; July 1992.
16. ICDGPS211; Interface Control Document; “GPS Control Segment/ DMA Interfaces”;
REV A; October 1991.
17. Bangert, J.A.; “The DMA / GPS Earth Orientation Prediction Service”; Proceedings of
the Fourth International Geodetic Symposium on Satellite Positioning; Austin, Texas;
April 1986.
18. Farrar, R., and Laing, P.A.; “Earth Orientation Prediction Accuracy”; Aerospace
Corporation Report; TOR96(1567)1; 1996.
19. Kopcha, P.D., and van Gelder, B.H.W.; “A study of DMA’s Prediction Accuracy on
Earth Orientation Parameters”; Proceedings of IONGPS96; Kansas City, Missouri;
September 1996.
20. Moritz, H.; “Geodetic Reference System 1980”; Bulletin Geodesique; Vol. 54, No. 3;
Paris, France; 1980.
21. DMA Letter; “Improved WGS 84 Coordinates and GM Value for Air Force and
Defense Mapping Agency Global Positioning System Monitor Stations for High Accuracy
Satellite Orbit Determination”; Office Code OPG; 15 May 1994.
22. Moritz H.; “Fundamental Geodetic Constants”; Report of Special Study Group No. 5.39
of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG); XVII General Assembly of the
International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG); Canberra, Australia; December
1979.
23. Bursa, M.; “Report of Special Commission SC3, Fundamental Constants”; Trevaux de l’
Association International de Geodesie Rapports Generaux et Rapports Techniques; (from
IUGG meeting, Boulder, CO); IAG; 140; Paris, France; 1995.
R3
24. Ries, J.C., Eanes, R.J., Shum, C.K., and Watkins, M.M.; “Progress in the Determination
of the Gravitational Coefficient of the Earth”; Geophysical Research Letters; Vol. 19, No.
6; March 20, 1992.
25. Feess, W.; Personal Communication; July 1993.
26. International Association of Geodesy; “The Geodesist’s Handbook 1984”; Bulletin
Geodesique; Vol. 58, No. 3; Paris, France; 1984.
27. Moritz, H.; “Fundamental Geodetic Constants”; Report of Special Study Group No. 5.39
of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG); XVI General Assembly of the
International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG); Grenoble, France; August
September 1975.
28. Aoki, S., Guinot, B., Kaplan, G.H., Kinoshita, H., McCarthy, D.D, and Seidelmann, P.
K.; “The New Definition of Universal Time”; Astronomy and Astrophysics; Vol. 105;
1982.
29. Geodetic Reference System 1967; Special Publication No. 3; International Association of
Geodesy; Paris, France; 1971.
30. Price, W.F.; “The New Definition of the Metre”; Survey Review; Vol. 28, No. 219;
January 1986.
31. Rapp, R.H.; “Fundamental Geodetic Constants”; Report of Special Study Group No.
5.39 of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG); XVIII General Assembly of the
International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG); Hamburg, Federal Republic of
Germany; August 1983.
32. Forsberg, R.; “A New Covariance Model for Inertia, Gravimetry and Gradiometry”;
Journal of Geophysical. Research; Vol. 92, No. B2; pp. 13051310; 1987.
33. Heiskanen, W. A. and Moritz, H.; Physical Geodesy; W. H. Freeman and Company;
San Francisco, California and London, UK; 1967.
34. Rapp, R. H.; “Use of Potential Coefficient Models for Geoid Undulation Determinations
Using a Spherical Harmonic Representation of the Height Anomaly/Geoid Undulation
Difference”; The Journal of Geodesy; Vol. 71, No. 5; April 1997.
35. Ekman, M.; “Impacts of Geodynamic Phenomena on Systems for Height and Gravity”;
Bulletin Geodesique; Vol. 63, No. 3; pp. 281296; 1989.
R4
36. Seppelin, T. O.; The Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1972; Technical
Paper; Headquarters, Defense Mapping Agency; Washington, DC; May 1974.
37. Molodensky, M.S., Eremeev, V.F., and Yurkina, M.I.; Methods for Study of the
External Gravitational Field and Figure of the Earth; Israel Program for Scientific
Translations; Jerusalem, Israel; 1962. (Available from the National Technical Information
Service; United States Department of Commerce; Washington, DC).
38. Appelbaum, L.T.; “Geodetic Datum Transformation By Multiple Regression Equations”;
Proceedings of the Third International Geodetic Symposium on Satellite Doppler
Positioning; New Mexico State University; Physical Science Laboratory; Las Cruces,
New Mexico; 812 February 1982.
39. Malys, S., Bredthauer, D., and Deweese, S.; “Error Budget for the DMA GPS Geodetic
Point Positioning Algorithm Through Monte Carlo Simulation”; Proceedings of ION
GPS93; Salt Lake City, Utah; September, 1993.
40. Malys, S., Slater, J., Smith, R., Kunz, L., Kenyon, S.; “Refinements to The World
Geodetic System 1984”; Proceedings of GPS ION97; Kansas City, MO; September
1997.
41. Lemoine, F.G., Kenyon, S.C., Trimmer, R., Factor, J., Pavlis, N.K., Klosko, S.M.,
Chinn, D.S., Torrence, M.H., Pavilis, E.C., Rapp. R.H., and Olson, T.R.; “EGM96 The
NASA GSFC and NIMA Joint Geopotential Model”; NASA Technical Memorandum;
1997.
A1
APPENDIX A
LIST OF REFERENCE ELLIPSOID NAMES AND PARAMETERS
(USED FOR GENERATING DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS)
A2
This page is intentionally blank
A3
REFERENCE ELLIPSOIDS
FOR
LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS
1. GENERAL
This appendix lists the reference ellipsoids and their constants (a,f) associated with the
local geodetic datums which are tied to WGS 84 through datum transformation constants and/or
MREs (Appendices B, C and D).
2. CONSTANT CHARACTERSTICS
In Appendix A.1, the list of ellipsoids includes a new feature. Some of the reference
ellipsoids have more than one semimajor axis (a) associated with them. These different values
of axis (a) vary from one region or country to another or from one year to another within the
same region or country.
A typical example of such an ellipsoid is Everest whose semimajor axis (a) was
originally defined in yards. Here, changes in the yard to meter conversion ratio over the years
have resulted in five different values for the constant (a), as identified in Appendix A.1.
To facilitate correct referencing, a standardized two letter code is also included to
identify the different ellipsoids and/or their “versions” pertaining to the different values of the
semimajor axis (a).
A4
This page is intentionally blank
Appendix A.1
Reference Ellipsoid Names and Constants
Used for Datum Transformations*
A.11
Reference Ellipsoid Name ID Code a (Meters) f
1
Airy 1830 AA 6377563.396 299.3249646
Australian National AN 6378160 298.25
Bessel 1841
Ethiopia, Indonesia, Japan and Korea BR 6377397.155 299.1528128
Namibia BN 6377483.865 299.1528128
Clarke 1866 CC 6378206.4 294.9786982
Clarke 1880** CD 6378249.145 293.465
Everest
Brunei and E. Malaysia (Sabah and Sarawak) EB 6377298.556 300.8017
India 1830 EA 6377276.345 300.8017
India 1956*** EC 6377301.243 300.8017
Pakistan*** EF 6377309.613 300.8017
W. Malaysia and Singapore 1948 EE 6377304.063 300.8017
W. Malaysia 1969*** ED 6377295.664 300.8017
Geodetic Reference System 1980 RF 6378137 298.257222101
Helmert 1906 HE 6378200 298.3
* Refer to Appendices B, C and D.
** As accepted by NIMA.
*** Through adoption of a new yard to meter conversion factor in the referenced country.
Appendix A.1
Reference Ellipsoid Names and Constants
Used for Datum Transformations*
A.12
Reference Ellipsoid Name ID Code a (Meters) f
1
Hough 1960 HO 6378270 297
Indonesian 1974 ID 6378160 298.247
International 1924 IN 6378388 297
Krassovsky 1940 KA 6378245 298.3
Modified Airy AM 6377340.189 299.3249646
Modified Fischer 1960 FA 6378155 298.3
South American 1969 SA 6378160 298.25
WGS 1972 WD 6378135 298.26
WGS 1984 WE 6378137 298.257223563
* Refer to Appendices B, C and D.
B1
APPENDIX B
DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED
USING SATELLITE TIES TO GEODETIC DATUMS/SYSTEMS
B2
This page is intentionally blank
B3
DATUM TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS
GEODETIC DATUMS/SYSTEMS TO WGS 84
(THROUGH SATELLITE TIES)
1. GENERAL
This appendix provides the details about the reference ellipsoids (Appendix A) which
are used as defining parameters for the geodetic datums and systems.
There are 112 local geodetic datums which are currently related to WGS 84 through
satellite ties.
2. LOCAL DATUM ELLIPSOIDS
Appendix B.1 lists, alphabetically, the local geodetic datums with their associated
ellipsoids. Two letter ellipsoidal codes (Appendix A) have also been included against each
datum to indicate which specific “version” of the ellipsoid was used in determining the
transformation constants.
3. TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS
Appendices B.2 through B.7 list the constants for local datums for continental areas.
The continents and the local geodetic datums are arranged alphabetically.
Appendices B.8 through B.10 list the constants for local datums which fall within the
ocean areas. The ocean areas and the geodetic datums are also arranged alphabetically.
The year of initial publication and cycle numbers have been provided as a new feature in
this edition. This makes it possible for a user to determine when a particular set of
transformation parameters first became available and if the current set has replaced an outdated
set.
A cycle number of zero indicates that the set of parameters is as it was published in
DMA TR 8350.2, Second Edition, 1 September 1991 including Insert 1, 30 August 1993 or
that the parameters are new to this edition (1997 Publication Date). A cycle number of one
indicates that the current parameters have replaced outdated parameters that were in the
previous edition.
If transformation parameter sets are updated in future editions of this publication, the
cycle numbers for each parameter set that is updated will increment by one.
B4
4. ERROR ESTIMATES
The 1σ error estimates for the datum transformation constants (∆X,∆Y,∆Z), obtained
from the computed solutions, are also tabulated. These estimates do not include the errors of
the common control station coordinates which were used to compute the shift constants.
For datums having four or less common control stations, the 1σ errors for shift
constants are noncomputed estimates.
The current set of error estimates has been reevaluated and revised after careful
consideration of the datum transformation solutions and the related geodetic information; the
intent has been to assign the most realistic estimates as possible.
Appendix B.1
Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems
Related to World Geodetic System 1984
(Through Satellite Ties)
B.11
Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference
Ellipsoid
Code
Adindan Clarke 1880 CD
Afgooye Krassovsky 1940 KA
Ain el Abd 1970 International 1924 IN
American Samoa 1962 Clarke 1866 CC
Anna 1 Astro 1965 Australian National AN
Antigua Island Astro 1943 Clarke 1880 CD
Arc 1950 Clarke 1880 CD
Arc 1960 Clarke 1880 CD
Ascension Island 1958 International 1924 IN
Astro Beacon “E” 1945 International 1924 IN
Astro DOS 71/4 International 1924 IN
Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961 International 1924 IN
Astronomical Station 1952 International 1924 IN
Australian Geodetic 1966 Australian National AN
Australian Geodetic 1984 Australian National AN
Ayabelle Lighthouse Clarke 1880 CD
Bellevue (IGN) International 1924 IN
Bermuda 1957 Clarke 1866 CC
Bissau International 1924 IN
Bogota Observatory International 1924 IN
Campo Inchauspe International 1924 IN
Canton Astro 1966 International 1924 IN
Cape Clarke 1880 CD
Cape Canaveral Clarke 1866 CC
Carthage Clarke 1880 CD
Chatham Island Astro 1971 International 1924 IN
Chua Astro International 1924 IN
CoOrdinate System 1937 of
Estonia
Bessel 1841 BR
Corrego Alegre International 1924 IN
Dabola Clarke 1880 CD
Deception Island Clarke 1880 CD
Djakarta (Batavia) Bessel 1841 BR
DOS 1968 International 1924 IN
Easter Island 1967 International 1924 IN
* See Appendix A.1 for associated constants a,f.
Appendix B.1
Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems
Related to World Geodetic System 1984
(Through Satellite Ties)
B.12
Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference
Ellipsoid
Code
European 1950 International 1924 IN
European 1979 International 1924 IN
Fort Thomas 1955 Clarke 1880 CD
Gan 1970 International 1924 IN
Geodetic Datum 1949 International 1924 IN
Graciosa Base SW 1948 International 1924 IN
Guam 1963 Clarke 1866 CC
GUX 1 Astro International 1924 IN
Hjorsey 1955 International 1924 IN
Hong Kong 1963 International 1924 IN
HuTzuShan International 1924 IN
Indian Everest EA/EC**
Indian 1954 Everest EA
Indian 1960 Everest EA
Indian 1975 Everest EA
Indonesian 1974 Indonesian 1974 ID
Ireland 1965 Modified Airy AM
ISTS 061 Astro 1968 International 1924 IN
ISTS 073 Astro 1969 International 1924 IN
Johnston Island 1961 International 1924 IN
Kandawala Everest EA
Kerguelen Island 1949 International 1924 IN
Kertau 1948 Everest EE
Korean Geodetic System 1995 WGS 84 WE
Kusaie Astro 1951 International 1924 IN
L. C. 5 Astro 1961 Clarke 1866 CC
Leigon Clarke 1880 CD
Liberia 1964 Clarke 1880 CD
Luzon Clarke 1866 CC
Mahe 1971 Clarke 1880 CD
Massawa Bessel 1841 BR
Merchich Clarke 1880 CD
Midway Astro 1961 International 1924 IN
Minna Clarke 1880 CD
* See Appendix A.1 for associated constants a,f.
** Due to different semimajor axes. See Appendix A.1.
Appendix B.1
Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems
Related to World Geodetic System 1984
(Through Satellite Ties)
B.13
Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference
Ellipsoid
Code
Montserrat Island Astro 1958 Clarke 1880 CD
M'Poraloko Clarke 1880 CD
Nahrwan Clarke 1880 CD
Naparima, BWI International 1924 IN
North American 1927 Clarke 1866 CC
North American 1983 GRS 80** RF
North Sahara 1959 Clarke 1880 CD
Observatorio Meteorologico
1939
International 1924 IN
Old Egyptian 1907 Helmert 1906 HE
Old Hawaiian Clarke 1866 CC
Old Hawaiian International 1924 IN
Oman Clarke 1880 CD
Ordnance Survey of Great
Britain 1936
Airy 1830 AA
Pico de las Nieves International 1924 IN
Pitcairn Astro 1967 International 1924 IN
Point 58 Clarke 1880 CD
Pointe Noire 1948 Clarke 1880 CD
Porto Santo 1936 International 1924 IN
Provisional South American
1956
International 1924 IN
Provisional South Chilean
1963***
International 1924 IN
Puerto Rico Clarke 1866 CC
Qatar National International 1924 IN
Qornoq International 1924 IN
Reunion International 1924 IN
Rome 1940 International 1924 IN
S42 (Pulkovo 1942) Krassovsky 1940 KA
Santo (DOS) 1965 International 1924 IN
Sao Braz International 1924 IN
Sapper Hill 1943 International 1924 IN
* See Appendix A.1 for associated constants a,f.
** Geodetic Reference System 1980
*** Also known as Hito XVIII 1963
Appendix B.1
Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems
Related to World Geodetic System 1984
(Through Satellite Ties)
B.14
Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference
Ellipsoid
Code
Schwarzeck Bessel 1841 BN
Selvagem Grande 1938 International 1924 IN
Sierra Leone 1960 Clark 1880 CD
SJTSK Bessel 1841 BR
South American 1969 South American 1969 SA
South American Geocentric
Reference System (SIRGAS)
GRS 80** RF
South Asia Modified Fischer 1960 FA
Timbalai 1948 Everest EB
Tokyo Bessel 1841 BR
Tristan Astro 1968 International 1924 IN
Viti Levu 1916 Clarke 1880 CD
Voirol 1960 Clarke 1880 CD
WakeEniwetok 1960 Hough 1960 HO
Wake Island Astro 1952 International 1924 IN
Zanderij International 1924 IN
* See Appendix A.1 for associated constants a,f.
** Geodetic Reference System 1980
Appendix B.2
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.21
Continent: AFRICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
ADINDAN ADI Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Mean Solution
(Ethiopia and Sudan)
ADIM 22 0 1991 166 +5 15 +5 204 +3
Burkina Faso ADIE 1 0 1991 118 +25 14 +25 218 +25
Cameroon ADIF 1 0 1991 134 +25 2 +25 210 +25
Ethiopia ADIA 8 0 1991 165 +3 11 +3 206 +3
Mali ADIC 1 0 1991 123 +25 20 +25 220 +25
Senegal ADID 2 0 1991 128 +25 18 +25 224 +25
Sudan ADIB 14 0 1991 161 +3 14 +5 205 +3
AFGOOYE AFG Krassovsky
1940
108 0.00480795
Somalia 1 0 1987 43 +25 163 +25 45 +25
Appendix B.2
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.22
Continent: AFRICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
ARC 1950 ARF Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Mean Solution
(Botswana, Lesotho,
Malawi, Swaziland,
Zaire, Zambia and
Zimbabwe)
ARFM 41 0 1987 143 +20 90 +33 294 +20
Botswana ARFA 9 0 1991 138 +3 105 +5 289 +3
Burundi ARFH 3 0 1991 153 +20 5 +20 292 +20
Lesotho ARFB 5 0 1991 125 +3 108 +3 295 +8
Malawi ARFC 6 0 1991 161 +9 73 +24 317 +8
Swaziland ARFD 4 0 1991 134 +15 105 +15 295 +15
Zaire ARFE 2 0 1991 169 +25 19 +25 278 +25
Zambia ARFF 5 0 1991 147 +21 74 +21 283 +27
Zimbabwe ARFG 10 0 1991 142 +5 96 +8 293 +11
Appendix B.2
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.23
Continent: AFRICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
ARC 1960 ARS Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Mean Solution
(Kenya and Tanzania)
ARSM 25 0 1991 160 +20 6 +20 302 +20
Kenya ARSA 24 0 1997 157 +4 2 +3 299 +3
Tanzania ARSB 12 0 1997 175 +6 23 +9 303 +10
AYABELLE PHA Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
LIGHTHOUSE
Djibouti 1 0 1991 79 +25 129 +25 145 +25
BISSAU BID International
1924
251 0.14192702
GuineaBissau 2 0 1991 173 +25 253 +25 27 +25
CAPE CAP Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
South Africa 5 0 1987 136 +3 108 +6 292 +6
Appendix B.2
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.24
Continent: AFRICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
CARTHAGE CGE Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Tunisia 5 0 1987 263 +6 6 +9 431 +8
DABOLA DAL Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Guinea 4 0 1991 83 +15 37 +15 124 +15
EUROPEAN 1950 EUR International
1924
251 0.14192702
Egypt EURF 14 0 1991 130 +6 117 +8 151 +8
Tunisia EURT 4 0 1993 112 +25 77 +25 145 +25
LEIGON LEH Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Ghana 8 0 1991 130 +2 29 +3 364 +2
LIBERIA 1964 LIB Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Liberia 4 0 1987 90 +15 40 +15 88 +15
Appendix B.2
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.25
Continent: AFRICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
MASSAWA MAS Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Eritrea (Ethiopia) 1 0 1987 639 +25 405 +25 60 +25
MERCHICH MER Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Morocco 9 0 1987 31 +5 146 +3 47 +3
MINNA MIN Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Cameroon MINA 2 0 1991 81 +25 84 +25 115 +25
Nigeria MINB 6 0 1987 92 +3 93 +6 122 +5
M'PORALOKO MPO Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Gabon 1 0 1991 74 +25 130 +25 42 +25
NORTH SAHARA 1959 NSD Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Algeria 3 0 1993 186 +25 93 +25 310 +25
Appendix B.2
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.26
Continent: AFRICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
OLD EGYPTIAN 1907 OEG Helmert 1906 63 0.00480795
Egypt 14 0 1987 130 +3 110 +6 13 +8
POINT 58 PTB Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Mean Solution (Burkina
Faso and Niger)
2 0 1991 106 +25 129 +25 165 +25
POINTE NOIRE 1948 PTN Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Congo 1 0 1991 148 +25 51 +25 291 +25
SCHWARZECK SCK Bessel 1841 653.135* 0.10037483
Namibia 3 0 1991 616 +20 97 +20 251 +20
SIERRA LEONE 1960 SRL Clark 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Sierra Leone 8 0 1997 88 +15 4 +15 101 +15
VOIROL 1960 VOR Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Algeria 2 0 1993 123 +25 206 +25 219 +25
* This ∆a value reflects an avalue of 6377483.865 meters for the Bessel 1841 Ellipsoid in Namibia.
Appendix B.3
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.31
Continent: ASIA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
AIN EL ABD 1970 AIN International
1924
251 0.14192702
Bahrain Island AINA 2 0 1991 150 +25 250 +25 1 +25
Saudi Arabia AINB 9 0 1991 143 +10 236 +10 7 +10
DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) BAT Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Sumatra (Indonesia) 5 0 1987 377 +3 681 +3 50 +3
EUROPEAN 1950 EUR International
1924
251 0.14192702
Iran EURH 27 0 1991 117 +9 132 +12 164 +11
HONG KONG 1963 HKD International
1924
251 0.14192702
Hong Kong 2 0 1987 156 +25 271 +25 189 +25
HUTZUSHAN HTN International
1924
251 0.14192702
Taiwan 4 0 1991 637 +15 549 +15 203 +15
Appendix B.3
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.32
Continent: ASIA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
INDIAN IND Everest
Bangladesh INDB Everest (1830) 860.655* 0.28361368 6 0 1991 282 +10 726 +8 254 +12
India and Nepal INDI Everest (1956) 835.757* 0.28361368 7 0 1991 295 +12 736 +10 257 +15
INDIAN 1954 INF Everest (1830) 860.655* 0.28361368
Thailand INFA 11 0 1993 217 +15 823 +6 299 +12
INDIAN 1960 ING Everest (1830) 860.655* 0.28361368
Vietnam
(near 16°N)
INGA 2 0 1993 198 +25 881 +25 317 +25
Con Son Island
(Vietnam)
INGB 1 0 1993 182 +25 915 +25 344 +25
INDIAN 1975 INH Everest (1830) 860.655* 0.28361368
Thailand INHA 6 0 1991 209 +12 818 +10 290 +12
Thailand INHA1 62 1 1997 210 +3 814 +2 289 +3
* See Appendix A
Appendix B.3
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.33
Continent: ASIA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
INDONESIAN 1974 IDN Indonesian
1974
23 0.00114930
Indonesia 1 0 1993 24 +25 15 +25 5 +25
KANDAWALA KAN Everest (1830) 860.655* 0.28361368
Sri Lanka 3 0 1987 97 +20 787 +20 86 +20
KERTAU 1948 KEA Everest (1948) 832.937* 0.28361368
West Malaysia and
Singapore
6 0 1987 11 +10 851 +8 5 +6
KOREAN GEODETIC
SYSTEM 1995
KGS WGS 84 0 0
South Korea 29 0 2000 0 +1 0 +1 0 +1
* See Appendix A
Appendix B.3
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.34
Continent: ASIA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
NAHRWAN NAH Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Masirah Island (Oman) NAHA 2 0 1987 247 +25 148 +25 369 +25
United Arab Emirates NAHB 2 0 1987 249 +25 156 +25 381 +25
Saudi Arabia NAHC 3 0 1991 243 +20 192 +20 477 +20
OMAN FAH Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Oman 7 0 1987 346 +3 1 +3 224 +9
QATAR NATIONAL QAT International
1924
251 0.14192702
Qatar 3 0 1987 128 +20 283 +20 22 +20
SOUTH ASIA SOA Modified
Fischer 1960
18 0.00480795
Singapore 1 0 1987 7 +25 10 +25 26 +25
* See Appendix A
Appendix B.3
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.35
Continent: ASIA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
TIMBALAI 1948 TIL Everest 838.444* 0.28361368
Brunei and East
Malaysia
(Sarawak and
Sabah)
8 0 1987 679 +10 669 +10 48 +12
TOKYO TOY Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Mean Solution (Japan,
Okinawa and South
Korea)
TOYM 31 0 1991 148 +20 507 +5 685 +20
Japan TOYA 16 0 1991 148 +8 507 +5 685 +8
Okinawa TOYC 3 0 1991 158 +20 507 +5 676 +20
South Korea TOYB 12 0 1991 146 +8 507 +5 687 +8
South Korea TOYB1 29 1 1997 147 +2 506 +2 687 +2
Appendix B.4
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.41
Continent: AUSTRALIA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
AUSTRALIAN
GEODETIC 1966
AUA Australian
National
23 0.00081204
Australia and Tasmania 105 0 1987 133 +3 48 +3 148 +3
AUSTRALIAN
GEODETIC 1984
AUG Australian
National
23 0.00081204
Australia and Tasmania 90 0 1987 134 +2 48 +2 149 +2
Appendix B.5
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.51
Continent: EUROPE
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
COORDINATE
SYSTEM 1937 OF
ESTONIA
EST Bessel 1841 739.85 0.10037483
Estonia 19 0 1997 374 +2 150 +3 588 +3
EUROPEAN 1950 EUR International
1924
251 0.14192702
Mean Solution
{Austria, Belgium,
Denmark, Finland,
France, FRG (Federal
Republic of Germany)*,
Gibraltar, Greece, Italy,
Luxembourg,
Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
and Switzerland}
EURM 85 0 1987 87 +3 98 +8 121 +5
* Prior to 1 January 1993
Appendix B.5
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.52
Continent: EUROPE
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
EUROPEAN 1950
(cont’d)
EUR International
1924
251 0.14192702
Western Europe
{Limited to Austria,
Denmark, France, FRG
(Federal Republic of
Germany)*, Netherlands
and Switzerland}
EURA 52 0 1991 87 +3 96 +3 120 +3
Cyprus EURE 4 0 1991 104 +15 101 +15 140 +15
Egypt EURF 14 0 1991 130 +6 117 +8 151 +8
England, Channel
Islands, Scotland and
Shetland Islands**
EURG 40 0 1991 86 +3 96 +3 120 +3
England, Ireland,
Scotland and Shetland
Islands**
EURK 47 0 1991 86 +3 96 +3 120 +3
* Prior to 1 January 1993
** European Datum 1950 coordinates developed from Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (OSGB) Scientific Network 1980 (SN 80) coordinates.
Appendix B.5
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.53
Continent: EUROPE
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
EUROPEAN 1950
(cont’d)
EUR International
1924
251 0.14192702
Greece EURB 2 0 1991 84 +25 95 +25 130 +25
Iran EURH 27 0 1991 117 +9 132 +12 164 +11
Italy
Sardinia EURI 2 0 1991 97 +25 103 +25 120 +25
Sicily EURJ 3 0 1991 97 +20 88 +20 135 +20
Malta EURL 1 0 1991 107 +25 88 +25 149 +25
Norway and Finland EURC 20 0 1991 87 +3 95 +5 120 +3
Portugal and Spain EURD 18 0 1991 84 +5 107 +6 120 +3
Tunisia EURT 4 0 1993 112 +25 77 +25 145 +25
Appendix B.5
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.54
Continent: EUROPE
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
EUROPEAN 1979 EUS International
1924
251 0.14192702
Mean Solution (Austria,
Finland, Netherlands,
Norway, Spain, Sweden
and Switzerland)
22 0 1987 86 +3 98 +3 119 +3
HJORSEY 1955 HJO International
1924
251 0.14192702
Iceland 6 0 1987 73 +3 46 +3 86 +6
IRELAND 1965 IRL Modified
Airy
796.811 0.11960023
Ireland 7 0 1987 506 +3 122 +3 611 +3
ORDNANCE SURVEY
OF GREAT BRITAIN
1936
OGB Airy 573.604 0.11960023
Mean Solution
(England, Isle of Man,
Scotland, Shetland
Islands and Wales)
OGBM 38 0 1987 375 +10 111 +10 431 +15
Appendix B.5
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.55
Continent: EUROPE
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
ORDNANCE SURVEY
OF GREAT BRITAIN
1936 (cont’d)
OGB Airy 573.604 0.11960023
England OGBA 21 0 1991 371 +5 112 +5 434 +6
England, Isle of Man
and Wales
OGBB 25 0 1991 371 +10 111 +10 434 +15
Scotland and Shetland
Islands
OGBC 13 0 1991 384 +10 111 +10 425 +10
Wales OGBD 3 0 1991 370 +20 108 +20 434 +20
ROME 1940 MOD International
1924
251 0.14192702
Sardinia 1 0 1987 225 +25 65 +25 9 +25
S42 (PULKOVO 1942) SPK Krassovsky
1940
108 0.00480795
Hungary SPKA 5 0 1993 28 +2 121 +2 77 +2
Poland SPKB 11 0 1997 23 t4 124 +2 82 t4
Appendix B.5
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.56
Continent: EUROPE
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
S42 (PULKOVO 1942)
(cont’d)
SPK Krassovsky
1940
108 0.00480795
Czechoslovakia* SPKC 6 0 1997 26 +3 121 +3 78 +2
Latvia SPKD 5 0 1997 24 +2 124 +2 82 +2
Kazakhstan SPKE 2 0 1997 15 +25 130 +25 84 +25
Albania SPKF 7 0 1997 24 +3 130 +3 92 +3
Romania SPKG 4 0 1997 28 +3 121 +5 77 +3
SJTSK CCD Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Czechoslovakia * 6 0 1993 589 +4 76 +2 480 +3
* Prior to 1 January 1993
Appendix B.6
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.61
Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
CAPE CANAVERAL CAC Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Mean Solution (Florida
and Bahamas)
19 0 1991 2 +3 151 +3 181 +3
NORTH AMERICAN
1927
NAS Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Mean Solution
(CONUS)
NASC 405 0 1987 8 +5 160 +5 176 +6
Western United States
(Arizona, Arkansas,
California, Colorado,
Idaho, Iowa, Kansas,
Montana, Nebraska,
Nevada,New Mexico,
North Dakota,
Oklahoma, Oregon,
South Dakota, Texas,
Utah, Washington and
Wyoming)
NASB 276 0 1991 8 +5 159 +3 175 +3
Appendix B.6
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.62
Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
NORTH AMERICAN
1927 (cont’d)
NAS Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Eastern United States
(Alabama, Connecticut,
Delaware, District of
Columbia, Florida,
Georgia, Illinois,
Indiana, Kentucky,
Louisiana, Maine,
Maryland,
Massachusetts,
Michigan, Minnesota,
Mississippi, Missouri,
New Hampshire, New
Jersey, New York,
North Carolina, Ohio,
Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island, South Carolina,
Tennessee, Vermont,
Virginia, West Virginia
and Wisconsin)
NASA 129 0 1991 9 +5 161 +5 179 +8
Appendix B.6
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.63
Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
NORTH AMERICAN
1927 (cont’d)
NAS Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Alaska (Excluding
Aleutian Islands)
NASD 47 0 1987 5 +5 135 +9 172 +5
Aleutian Islands
East of 180°W NASV 6 0 1993 2 +6 152 +8 149 +10
West of 180°W NASW 5 0 1993 2 +10 204 +10 105 +10
Bahamas (Excluding
San Salvador Island)
NASQ 11 0 1987 4 +5 154 +3 178 +5
San Salvador Island NASR 1 0 1987 1 +25 140 +25 165 +25
Canada Mean Solution
(Including
Newfoundland)
NASE 112 0 1987 10 +15 158 +11 187 +6
Alberta and British
Columbia
NASF 25 0 1991 7 +8 162 +8 188 +6
Appendix B.6
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.64
Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
NORTH AMERICAN
1927 (cont’d)
NAS Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Eastern Canada
(Newfoundland, New
Brunswick, Nova Scotia
and Quebec)
NASG 37 0 1991 22 +6 160 +6 190 +3
Manitoba and Ontario NASH 25 0 1991 9 +9 157 +5 184 +5
Northwest Territories
and Saskatchewan
NASI 17 0 1991 4 +5 159 +5 188 +3
Yukon NASJ 8 0 1991 7 +5 139 +8 181 +3
Canal Zone NASO 3 0 1987 0 +20 125 +20 201 +20
Caribbean (Antigua
Island, Barbados,
Barbuda, Caicos
Islands, Cuba,
Dominican Republic,
Grand Cayman, Jamaica
and Turks Islands)
NASP 15 0 1991 3 +3 142 +9 183 +12
Appendix B.6
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.65
Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
NORTH AMERICAN
1927 (cont’d)
NAS Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Central America (Belize,
Costa Rica, El Salvador,
Guatemala, Honduras
and Nicaragua)
NASN 19 0 1987 0 +8 125 +3 194 +5
Cuba NAST 1 0 1987 9 +25 152 +25 178 +25
Greenland (Hayes
Peninsula)
NASU 2 0 1987 11 +25 114 +25 195 +25
Mexico NASL 22 0 1987 12 +8 130 +6 190 +6
NORTH AMERICAN
1983
NAR GRS 80 0 0.00000016
Alaska (Excluding
Aleutian Islands)
NARA 42 0 1987 0 +2 0 +2 0 +2
Aleutian Islands NARE 4 0 1993 2 +5 0 +2 4 +5
Canada NARB 96 0 1987 0 +2 0 +2 0 +2
Appendix B.6
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.66
Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
NORTH AMERICAN
1983 (cont’d)
NAR GRS 80 0 0.00000016
CONUS NARC 216 0 1987 0 +2 0 +2 0 +2
Hawaii NARH 6 0 1993 1 +2 1 +2 1 +2
Mexico and Central
America
NARD 25 0 1987 0 +2 0 +2 0 +2
Appendix B.7
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.71
Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
BOGOTA
OBSERVATORY
BOO International
1924
251 0.14192702
Colombia 7 0 1987 307 +6 304 +5 318 +6
CAMPO INCHAUSPE
1969
CAI International
1924
251 0.14192702
Argentina 20 0 1987 148 +5 136 +5 90 +5
CHUA ASTRO CHU International
1924
251 0.14192702
Paraguay 6 0 1987 134 +6 229 +9 29 +5
CORREGO ALEGRE COA International
1924
251 0.14192702
Brazil 17 0 1987 206 +5 172 +3 6 +5
Appendix B.7
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.72
Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
PROVISIONAL SOUTH
AMERICAN 1956
PRP International
1924
251 0.14192702
Mean Solution (Bolivia,
Chile, Colombia,
Ecuador, Guyana, Peru
and Venezuela)
PRPM 63 0 1987 288 +17 175 +27 376 t27
Bolivia PRPA 5 0 1991 270 +5 188 +11 388 +14
Chile
Northern Chile (near
19°S)
PRPB 1 0 1991 270 +25 183 +25 390 +25
Southern Chile (near
43°S)
PRPC 3 0 1991 305 +20 243 +20 442 +20
Colombia PRPD 4 0 1991 282 +15 169 +15 371 +15
Ecuador PRPE 11 0 1991 278 +3 171 +5 367 +3
Appendix B.7
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.73
Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
PROVISIONAL SOUTH
AMERICAN 1956
(cont’d)
PRP International
1924
251 0.14192702
Guyana PRPF 9 0 1991 298 +6 159 +14 369 +5
Peru PRPG 6 0 1991 279 +6 175 +8 379 +12
Venezuela PRPH 24 0 1991 295 +9 173 +14 371 +15
PROVISIONAL SOUTH
CHILEAN 1963*
HIT International
1924
251 0.14192702
Southern Chile (near
53°S)
2 0 1987 16 +25 196 +25 93 +25
* Also known as Hito XVIII 1963
Appendix B.7
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.74
Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
SAN South
American
1969
23 0.00081204
Mean Solution
(Argentina, Bolivia,
Brazil, Chile, Colombia,
Ecuador, Guyana,
Paraguay, Peru,
Trinidad and Tobago
and Venezuela)
SANM 84 0 1987 57 +15 1 +6 41 +9
Argentina SANA 10 0 1991 62 +5 1 +5 37 +5
Bolivia SANB 4 0 1991 61 +15 2 +15 48 +15
Brazil SANC 22 0 1991 60 +3 2 +5 41 +5
Chile SAND 9 0 1991 75 +15 1 +8 44 +11
Colombia SANE 7 0 1991 44 +6 6 +6 36 +5
Appendix B.7
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.75
Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
SOUTH AMERICAN
1969 (cont’d)
SAN South
American
1969
23 0.00081204
Ecuador (Excluding
Galapagos Islands)
SANF 11 0 1991 48 +3 3 +3 44 +3
Baltra and Galapagos
Islands
SANJ 1 0 1991 47 +25 26 +25 42 +25
Guyana SANG 5 0 1991 53 +9 3 +5 47 +5
Paraguay SANH 4 0 1991 61 +15 2 +15 33 +15
Peru SANI 6 0 1991 58 +5 0 +5 44 +5
Trinidad and Tobago SANK 1 0 1991 45 +25 12 +25 33 +25
Venezuela SANL 5 0 1991 45 +3 8 +6 33 +3
Appendix B.7
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.76
Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
SOUTH AMERICAN
GEOCENTRIC
REFERENCE SYSTEM
(SIRGAS)
SIR GRS 80 0 0.00000016
South America 66 0 2000 0 +1 0 +1 0 +1
ZANDERIJ ZAN International
1924
251 0.14192702
Suriname 5 0 1987 265 +5 120 +5 358 +8
Appendix B.8
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.81
Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
ANTIGUA ISLAND
ASTRO 1943
AIA Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Antigua and Leeward
Islands
1 0 1991 270 +25 13 +25 62 +25
ASCENSION ISLAND
1958
ASC International
1924
251 0.14192702
Ascension Island 2 0 1991 205 +25 107 +25 53 +25
ASTRO DOS 71/4 SHB International
1924
251 0.14192702
St. Helena Island 1 0 1987 320 +25 550 +25 494 +25
BERMUDA 1957 BER Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Bermuda Islands 3 0 1987 73 +20 213 +20 296 +20
CAPE CANAVERAL CAC Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Mean Solution
(Bahamas and Florida)
19 0 1991 2 +3 151 +3 181 +3
Appendix B.8
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.82
Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
DECEPTION ISLAND DID Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Deception Island and
Antarctica
3 0 1993 260 +20 12 +20 147 +20
FORT THOMAS 1955 FOT Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Nevis, St. Kitts and
Leeward Islands
2 0 1991 7 +25 215 +25 225 +25
GRACIOSA BASE SW
1948
GRA International
1924
251 0.14192702
Faial, Graciosa, Pico,
Sao Jorge and Terceira
Islands (Azores)
5 0 1991 104 +3 167 +3 38 +3
HJORSEY 1955 HJO International
1924
251 0.14192702
Iceland 6 0 1987 73 +3 46 +3 86 +6
ISTS 061 ASTRO 1968 ISG International
1924
251 0.14192702
South Georgia Island 1 0 1991 794 +25 119 +25 298 +25
Appendix B.8
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.83
Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
L. C. 5 ASTRO 1961 LCF Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Cayman Brac Island 1 0 1987 42 +25 124 +25 147 +25
MONTSERRAT ISLAND
ASTRO 1958
ASM Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Montserrat and Leeward
Islands
1 0 1991 174 +25 359 +25 365 +25
NAPARIMA, BWI NAP International
1924
251 0.14192702
Trinidad and Tobago 4 0 1991 10 +15 375 +15 165 +15
OBSERVATORIO
METEOROLOGICO
1939
FLO International
1924
251 0.14192702
Corvo and Flores
Islands (Azores)
3 0 1991 425 +20 169 +20 81 +20
PICO DE LAS NIEVES PLN International
1924
251 0.14192702
Canary Islands 1 0 1987 307 +25 92 +25 127 +25
Appendix B.8
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.84
Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
PORTO SANTO 1936 POS International
1924
251 0.14192702
Porto Santo and
Madeira Islands
2 0 1991 499 +25 249 +25 314 +25
PUERTO RICO PUR Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Puerto Rico and Virgin
Islands
11 0 1987 11 +3 72 +3 101 +3
QORNOQ QUO International
1924
251 0.14192702
South Greenland 2 0 1987 164 +25 138 +25 189 +32
SAO BRAZ SAO International
1924
251 0.14192702
Sao Miguel and Santa
Maria Islands (Azores)
2 0 1987 203 +25 141 +25 53 +25
SAPPER HILL 1943 SAP International
1924
251 0.14192702
East Falkland Island 5 0 1991 355 +1 21 +1 72 +1
Appendix B.8
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.85
Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
SELVAGEM GRANDE
1938
SGM International
1924
251 0.14192702
Salvage Islands 1 0 1991 289 +25 124 +25 60 +25
TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 TDC International
1924
251 0.14192702
Tristan da Cunha 1 0 1987 632 +25 438 +25 609 +25
Appendix B.9
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.91
Continent: INDIAN OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 ANO Australian
National
23 0.00081204
Cocos Islands 1 0 1987 491 +25 22 +25 435 +25
GAN 1970 GAA International
1924
251 0.14192702
Republic of Maldives 1 0 1987 133 +25 321 +25 50 +25
ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 IST International
1924
251 0.14192702
Diego Garcia 2 0 1987 208 +25 435 +25 229 +25
KERGUELEN ISLAND
1949
KEG International
1924
251 0.14192702
Kerguelen Island 1 0 1987 145 +25 187 +25 103 +25
MAHE 1971 MIK Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Mahe Island 1 0 1987 41 +25 220 +25 134 +25
REUNION REU International
1924
251 0.14192702
Mascarene Islands 1 0 1987 94 +25 948 +25 1262 +25
Appendix B.10
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
AMERICAN SAMOA
1962
AMA Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
American Samoa
Islands
2 0 1993 115 +25 118 +25 426 +25
ASTRO BEACON “E”
1945
ATF International
1924
251 0.14192702
Iwo Jima
1 0 1987 145 +25 75 +25 272 +25
ASTRO TERN
ISLAND (FRIG) 1961
TRN International
1924
251 0.14192702
Tern Island
1 0 1991 114 +25 116 +25 333 +25
ASTRONOMICAL
STATION 1952
ASQ International
1924
251 0.14192702
Marcus Island
1 0 1987 124 +25 234 +25 25 +25
BELLEVUE (IGN)
IBE International
1924
251 0.14192702
Efate and Erromango
Islands
3 0 1987 127 +20 769 +20 472 +20
B.101
Appendix B.10
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
CANTON ASTRO 1966
CAO International
1924
251 0.14192702
Phoenix Islands
4 0 1987 298 +15 304 +15 375 +15
CHATHAM ISLAND
ASTRO 1971
CHI International
1924
251 0.14192702
Chatham Island (New
Zealand)
4 0 1987 175 +15 38 +15 113 +15
DOS 1968 GIZ International
1924
251 0.14192702
Gizo Island (New
Georgia Islands)
1 0 1987 230 +25 199 +25 752 +25
EASTER ISLAND 1967
EAS International
1924
251 0.14192702
Easter Island
1 0 1987 211 +25 147 +25 111 +25
GEODETIC DATUM
1949
GEO International
1924
251 0.14192702
New Zealand
14 0 1987 84 +5 22 +3 209 +5
GUAM 1963
GUA Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
B.102
Appendix B.10
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
Guam
5 0 1987 100 +3 248 +3 259 +3
GUX l ASTRO
DOB International
1924
251 0.14192702
Guadalcanal Island
1 0 1987 252 +25 209 +25 751 +25
INDONESIAN 1974
IDN Indonesian
1974
23 0.00114930
Indonesia
1 0 1993 24 +25 15 +25 5 +25
JOHNSTON ISLAND
1961
JOH International
1924
251 0.14192702
Johnston Island
2 0 1991 189 +25 79 +25 202 +25
KUSAIE ASTRO 1951
KUS International
1924
251 0.14192702
Caroline Islands, Fed.
States of Micronesia
1 0 1991 647 +25 1777 +25 1124 +25
LUZON
LUZ Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Philippines (Excluding
Mindanao Island)
LUZA 6 0 1987 133 +8 77 +11 51 +9
B.103
Appendix B.10
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
Mindanao Island
LUZB 1 0 1987 133 +25 79 +25 72 +25
MIDWAY ASTRO 1961
MID International
1924
251 0.14192702
Midway Islands
1 1 2003 403 ±25 81 ±25 277 ±25
Midway Islands
1 0 1987 912 +25 58 +25 1227 +25
OLD HAWAIIAN
OHA Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639
Mean Solution
OHAM 15 0 1987 61 +25 285 +20 181 +20
Hawaii
OHAA 2 0 1991 89 +25 279 +25 183 +25
Kauai
OHAB 3 0 1991 45 +20 290 +20 172 +20
Maui
OHAC 2 0 1991 65 +25 290 +25 190 +25
Oahu
OHAD 8 0 1991 58 +10 283 +6 182 +6
OLD HAWAIIAN
OHI International
1924
251 0.14192702
Mean Solution
OHIM 15 0 2000 201 +25 228 +20 346 +20
Hawaii
OHIA 2 0 2000 229 +25 222 +25 348 +25
B.104
Appendix B.10
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
Kauai
OHIB 3 0 2000 185 +20 233 +20 337 +20
Maui
OHIC 2 0 2000 205 +25 233 +25 355 +25
Oahu
OHID 8 0 2000 198 +10 226 +6 347 +6
PITCAIRN ASTRO
1967
PIT International
1924
251 0.14192702
Pitcairn Island
1 0 1987 185 +25 165 +25 42 +25
SANTO (DOS) 1965
SAE International
1924
251 0.14192702
Espirito Santo Island
1 0 1987 170 +25 42 +25 84 +25
VITI LEVU 1916
MVS Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Viti Levu Island (Fiji
Islands)
1 0 1987 51 +25 391 +25 36 +25
WAKEENIWETOK
1960
ENW Hough 133 0.14192702
Marshall Islands
10 0 1991 102 +3 52 +3 38 +3
B.105
Appendix B.10
Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
B.106
Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
No. of
Satellite
Stations
Used
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub.
Date
∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
WAKE ISLAND
ASTRO 1952
WAK International
1924
251 0.14192702
Wake Atoll
2 0 1991 276 +25 57 +25 149 +25
C1
APPENDIX C
DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED
USING NONSATELLITE INFORMATION
C2
This page is intentionally blank
C3
DATUM TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS
LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS TO WGS 84
(THROUGH NONSATELLITE TIES)
1. GENERAL
This appendix provides the details about the reference ellipsoids (Appendix A) used as
defining parameters for the local geodetic datums which are related to WGS 84 through non
satellite ties to the local control.
There are ten such local/regional geodetic datums, and one special area under the
European Datum 1950 (ED 50).
2. LOCAL DATUM ELLIPSOIDS
Appendix C.1 lists alphabetically the local geodetic datums and their associated
ellipsoids. Two letter ellipsoidal codes (Appendix A) have also been included to clearly indicate
which “version” of the ellipsoid has been used to determine the transformation constants.
3. TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS
Appendix C.2 alphabetically lists the local geodetic datums and the special area under ED
50 with the associated shift constants.
The year of initial publication and cycle numbers have been provided as a new feature in
this edition. This makes it possible for a user to determine when a particular set of
transformation parameters first became available and if the current set has replaced an outdated
set.
A cycle number of zero indicates that the set of parameters are as they were published
in DMA TR 8350.2, Second Edition, 1 September 1991 including Insert 1, 30 August 1993 or
that the parameters are new to this edition (1997 Publication Date). A cycle number of one
indicates that the current parameters have replaced outdated parameters that were in the
previous edition.
If transformation parameter sets are updated in future editions of this publication, the
cycle numbers for each parameter set that is updated will increment by one.
4. ERROR ESTIMATES
The error estimates are not available for the datum transformation constants listed in the
Appendix C.2.
C4
This page is intentionally blank
C.11
Appendix C.1
Local Geodetic Datums
Related to World Geodetic System 1984
(Through nonSatellite Ties)
Local Geodetic Datum
Associated*
Reference Ellipsoid Code
Bukit Rimpah Bessel 1841 BR
Camp Area Astro International 1924 IN
European 1950 International 1924 IN
Gunung Segara Bessel 1841 BR
Herat North International 1924 IN
Hermannskogel Bessel 1841 BR
Indian Everest EF
Pulkovo 1942 Krassovsky 1940 KA
Tananarive Observatory 1925 International 1924 IN
Voirol 1874 Clarke 1880 CD
Yacare International 1924 IN
* See Appendix A.1 for associated constants a,f.
C.12
This page is intentionally blank
Appendix C.2
NonSatellite Derived Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
C.21
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
BUKIT RIMPAH BUR Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Bangka and Belitung
Islands (Indonesia)
0 1987 384 664 48
CAMP AREA ASTRO CAZ International 1924 251 0.14192702
Camp McMurdo Area,
Antarctica
0 1987 104 129 239
EUROPEAN 1950 EURS International 1924 251 0.14192702
Iraq, Israel, Jordan
Kuwait, Lebanon, Saudi
Arabia and Syria
0 1991 103 106 141
GUNUNG SEGARA GSE Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Kalimantan (Indonesia) 0 1987 403 684 41
HERAT NORTH HEN International 1924 251 0.14192702
Afghanistan 0 1987 333 222 114
Appendix C.2
NonSatellite Derived Transformation Parameters
Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84
C.22
Local Geodetic Datums
Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter
Differences
Transformation Parameters
Name Code Name ∆a(m)
∆f x 10
4
Cycle
Number
Pub. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m)
HERMANNSKOGEL HER Bessel 1841 739.845 0.10037483
Yugoslavia (Prior to
1990) Slovenia, Croatia,
Bosnia and Herzegovina
and Serbia
0 1997 682 203 480
INDIAN INDP Everest 827.387* 0.28361368
Pakistan 0 1993 283 682 231
PULKOVO 1942 PUK Krassovsky 1940 108 0.00480795
Russia 0 1993 28 130 95
TANANARIVE
OBSERVATORY 1925
TAN International 1924 251 0.14192702
Madagascar 0 1987 189 242 91
VOIROL 1874 VOI Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714
Tunisia and Algeria 0 1997 73 247 227
YACARE YAC International 1924 251 0.14192702
Uruguay 0 1987 155 171 37
* See Appendix A.1
D1
APPENDIX D
MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS FOR
SPECIAL CONTINENTAL SIZE
LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS
D2
This page is intentionally blank.
D3
MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS
1. GENERAL
This appendix provides the Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) parameters for
continental size datums and for contiguous large land areas (Table D1).
Table D.1
DATUMS WITH MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS
DATUM NAME AREA COVERED
Australian Geodetic 1966 Australian Mainland
Australian Geodetic 1984 Australian Mainland
Campo Inchauspe Argentina
Corrego Alegre Brazil
European 1950 Western Europe (Austria, Denmark, France, W.
Germany*, The Netherlands and Switzerland.)
North American 1927 CONUS and Canadian Mainland
South American 1969 South American Mainland (Argentina, Bolivia,
Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Peru,
Paraguay, Uruguay and Venezuela.
* Prior to October 1990.
2. APPLICATIONS
The coverage areas for MREs application are defined in detail for each datum. MREs
coverage area should never be extrapolated and are not to be used over islands and/or isolated
land areas.
The main advantage of MREs lies in their modeling of distortions for datums, which
cover continental size land areas, to obtain better transformation fit in geodetic applications.
D4
This page is intentionally blank.
D5
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
Australian Geodetic Datum 1966 (AUA) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : Australian Mainland (excluding Tasmania)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ = 5.19238 + 0.12666 U + 0.52309 V  0.42069 U
2
 0.39326 UV + 0.93484 U
2
V
+ 0.44249 UV
2
 0.30074 UV
3
+ 1.00092 U
5
 0.07565 V
6
 1.42988 U
9
 16.06639 U
4
V
5
+ 0.07428 V
9
+ 0.24256 UV
9
+ 38.27946 U
6
V
7
 62.06403 U
7
V
8
+ 89.19184 U
9
V
8
∆λ″ = 4.69250  0.87138 U  0.50104 V + 0.12678 UV  0.23076 V
2
 0.61098 U
2
V
 0.38064 V
3
+ 2.89189 U
6
+ 5.26013 U
2
V
5
 2.97897 U
8
+ 5.43221 U
3
V
5
 3.40748 U
2
V
6
+ 0.07772 V
8
+ 1.08514 U
8
V + 0.71516 UV
8
+ 0.20185 V
9
+ 5.18012 U
2
V
8
 1.72907 U
3
V
8
 1.24329 U
2
V
9
Where : U = K (φ + 27°); V = K (λ  134°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
AUA Shift WGS 84
φ = ()17° 00′ 32.78″S ∆φ = 5.48″ φ = ()17° 00′ 27.30″S
λ = 144° 11′ 37.25″E ∆λ = 3.92″ λ = 144° 11′ 41.17″E
D6
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
Australian Geodetic Datum 1984 (AUG) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : Australian Mainland (excluding Tasmania)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ = 5.20604 + 0.25225 U + 0.58528 V  0.41584 U
2
 0.38620 UV  0.06820 V
2
+ 0.38699 U
2
V + 0.07934 UV
2
+ 0.37714 U
4
 0.52913 U
4
V + 0.38095 V
7
+ 0.68776 U
2
V
6
 0.03785 V
8
 0.17891 U
9
 4.84581 U
2
V
7
 0.35777 V
9
+ 4.23859 U
2
V
9
∆λ″ = 4.67877  0.73036 U  0.57942 V + 0.28840 U
2
+ 0.10194 U
3
 0.27814 UV
2
 0.13598 V
3
+ 0.34670 UV
3
 0.46107 V
4
+ 1.29432 U
2
V
3
+ 0.17996 UV
4
 1.13008 U
2
V
5
 0.46832 U
8
+ 0.30676 V
8
+ 0.31948 U
9
+ 0.16735 V
9
 1.19443 U
3
V
9
Where : U = K (φ + 27°); V = K (λ  134°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
AUG Shift WGS 84
φ = ()20° 38′ 00.67″S ∆φ = 5.50″ φ = ()20° 37′ 55.17″S
λ = 144° 24′ 29.29″E ∆λ = 4.11″ λ = 144° 24′ 33.40″E
D7
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
Campo Inchauspe Datum (CAI) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : Argentina (Continental land areas only)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆ φ″ = 1.67470 + 0.52924 U  0.17100 V + 0.18962 U
2
+ 0.04216 UV + 0.19709 UV
2
 0.22037 U
4
 0.15483 U
2
V
2
 0.24506 UV
4
 0.05675 V
5
+ 0.06674 U
6
+ 0.01701 UV
5
 0.00202 U
7
+ 0.08625 V
7
 0.00628 U
8
+ 0.00172 U
8
V
4
+ 0.00036 U
9
V
6
∆λ″ =  2.93117 + 0.18225 U + 0.69396 V  0.04403 U
2
+ 0.07955 V
2
+ 1.48605 V
3
 0.00499 U
4
 0.02180 U
4
V  0.29575 U
2
V
3
+ 0.20377 UV
4
 2.47151 V
5
+ 0.09073 U
3
V
4
+ 1.33556 V
7
+ 0.01575 U
3
V
5
 0.26842 V
9
Where : U = K (φ + 35°); V = K (λ + 64°); K = 0.15707963
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
CAI Shift WGS 84
φ = ()29° 47′ 45.68″S ∆φ = 1.95″ φ = ()29° 47′ 43.73″S
λ = ()58° 07′ 38.20″W ∆λ = 1.96″ λ = ()58° 07′ 40.16″W
D8
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
Corrego Alegre Datum (COA) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : Brazil (Continental land areas only)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ =  0.84315 + 0.74089 U  0.21968 V  0.98875 U
2
+ 0.89883 UV + 0.42853 U
3
+ 2.73442 U
4
 0.34750 U
3
V + 4.69235 U
2
V
3
 1.87277 U
6
+ 11.06672 U
5
V
 46.24841 U
3
V
3
 0.92268 U
7
 14.26289 U
7
V + 334.33740 U
5
V
5
 15.68277 U
9
V
2
 2428.8586 U
8
V
8
∆λ″ =  1.46053 + 0.63715 U + 2.24996 V  5.66052 UV + 2.22589 V
2
 0.34504 U
3
 8.54151 U
2
V + 0.87138 U
4
+ 43.40004 U
3
V + 4.35977 UV
3
+ 8.17101 U
4
V
+ 16.24298 U
2
V
3
+ 19.96900 UV
4
 8.75655 V
5
 125.35753 U
5
V
 127.41019 U
3
V
4
 0.61047 U
8
+ 138.76072 U
7
V + 122.04261 U
5
V
4
 51.86666 U
9
V + 45.67574 U
9
V
3
Where : U = K (φ + 15°); V = K (λ + 50°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
COA Shift WGS 84
φ = ()20° 29′ 01.02″S ∆φ = 1.03″ φ = ()20° 29′ 02.05″S
λ = ()54° 47′ 13.17″W ∆λ = 2.10″ λ = ()54° 47′ 15.27″W
D9
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
European Datum 1950 (EUR) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : Western Europe* (Continental contiguous land areas only)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ =  2.65261 + 2.06392 U + 0.77921 V + 0.26743 U
2
+ 0.10706 UV + 0.76407 U
3
 0.95430 U
2
V + 0.17197 U
4
+ 1.04974 U
4
V  0.22899 U
5
V
2
 0.05401 V
8
 0.78909 U
9
 0.10572 U
2
V
7
+ 0.05283 UV
9
+ 0.02445 U
3
V
9
∆λ″ =  4.13447  1.50572 U + 1.94075 V  1.37600 U
2
+ 1.98425 UV + 0.30068 V
2
 2.31939 U
3
 1.70401 U
4
 5.48711 UV
3
+ 7.41956 U
5
 1.61351 U
2
V
3
+ 5.92923 UV
4
 1.97974 V
5
+ 1.57701 U
6
 6.52522 U
3
V
3
+ 16.85976 U
2
V
4
 1.79701 UV
5
 3.08344 U
7
 14.32516 U
6
V + 4.49096 U
4
V
4
+ 9.98750 U
8
V
+ 7.80215 U
7
V
2
 2.26917 U
2
V
7
+ 0.16438 V
9
 17.45428 U
4
V
6
 8.25844 U
9
V
2
+ 5.28734 U
8
V
3
+ 8.87141 U
5
V
7
 3.48015 U
9
V
4
+ 0.71041 U
4
V
9
Where : U = K (φ  52°); V = K (λ  10°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
EUR Shift WGS 84
φ = 46° 41′ 42.89″N ∆φ = 3.08″ φ = 46° 41′ 39.81″N
λ = 13° 54′ 54.09″E ∆λ = 3.49″ λ = 13° 54′ 50.60″E
* See Table D.1 (Page D3) for the list of countries covered by the above set of MREs.
D10
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
North American Datum 1927 (NAS) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : Canada (Continental contiguous land areas only)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ = 0.79395 + 2.29199 U + 0.27589 V  1.76644 U
2
+ 0.47743 UV + 0.08421 V
2
 6.03894 U
3
 3.55747 U
2
V  1.81118 UV
2
 0.20307 V
3
+ 7.75815 U
4
 3.1017 U
3
V + 3.58363 U
2
V
2
 1.31086 UV
3
 0.45916 V
4
+ 14.27239 U
5
+ 3.28815 U
4
V + 1.35742 U
2
V
3
+ 1.75323 UV
4
+ 0.44999 V
5
 19.02041 U
4
V
2
 1.01631 U
2
V
4
+ 1.47331 UV
5
+ 0.15181 V
6
+ 0.41614 U
2
V
5
 0.80920 UV
6
 0.18177 V
7
+ 5.19854 U
4
V
4
 0.48837 UV
7
 0.01473 V
8
 2.26448 U
9
 0.46457 U
2
V
7
+ 0.11259 UV
8
+ 0.02067 V
9
+ 47.64961 U
8
V
2
+ 0.04828 UV
9
+ 36.38963 U
9
V
2
+ 0.06991 U
4
V
7
+ 0.08456 U
3
V
8
+ 0.09113 U
2
V
9
+ 5.93797 U
7
V
5
 2.36261 U
7
V
6
+ 0.09575 U
5
V
8
∆λ″ =  1.36099 + 3.61796 V  3.97703 U
2
+ 3.09705 UV  1.15866 V
2
 13.28954 U
3
 3.15795 U
2
V + 0.68405 UV
2
 0.50303 V
3
 8.81200 U
3
V  2.17587 U
2
V
2
 1.49513 UV
3
+ 0.84700 V
4
+ 31.42448 U
5
 14.67474 U
3
V
2
+ 0.65640 UV
4
+ 17.55842 U
6
+ 6.87058 U
4
V
2
 0.21565 V
6
+ 62.18139 U
5
V
2
+ 1.78687 U
3
V
4
+ 2.74517 U
2
V
5
 0.30085 UV
6
+ 0.04600 V
7
+ 63.52702 U
6
V
2
+ 7.83682 U
5
V
3
+ 9.59444 U
3
V
5
+ 0.01480 V
8
+ 10.51228 U
4
V
5
 1.42398 U
2
V
7
 0.00834 V
9
+ 5.23485 U
7
V
3
 3.18129 U
3
V
7
+ 8.45704 U
9
V
2
 2.29333 U
4
V
7
+ 0.14465 U
2
V
9
+ 0.29701 U
3
V
9
+ 0.17655 U
4
V
9
Where : U = K (φ  60°); V = K (λ + 100°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
NAS Shift WGS 84
φ = 54° 26′ 08.67″N ∆φ = 0.29″ φ = 54° 26′ 08.96″N
λ = ()110° 17′ 02.41″W ∆λ = 3.16″ λ = ()110° 17′ 05.57″W
D11
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
North American Datum 1927 (NAS) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : USA (Continental contiguous land areas only; excluding Alaska
and Islands)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ = 0.16984  0.76173 U + 0.09585 V + 1.09919 U
2
 4.57801 U
3
 1.13239 U
2
V
+ 0.49831 V
3
 0.98399 U
3
V + 0.12415 UV
3
+ 0.11450 V
4
+ 27.05396 U
5
+ 2.03449 U
4
V + 0.73357 U
2
V
3
 0.37548 V
5
 0.14197 V
6
 59.96555 U
7
+ 0.07439 V
7
 4.76082 U
8
+ 0.03385 V
8
+ 49.04320 U
9
 1.30575 U
6
V
3
 0.07653 U
3
V
9
+ 0.08646 U
4
V
9
∆λ″ =  0.88437 + 2.05061 V + 0.26361 U
2
 0.76804 UV + 0.13374 V
2
 1.31974 U
3
 0.52162 U
2
V  1.05853 UV
2
 0.49211 U
2
V
2
+ 2.17204 UV
3
 0.06004 V
4
+ 0.30139 U
4
V + 1.88585 UV
4
 0.81162 UV
5
 0.05183 V
6
 0.96723 UV
6
 0.12948 U
3
V
5
+ 3.41827 U
9
 0.44507 U
8
V + 0.18882 UV
8
 0.01444 V
9
+ 0.04794 UV
9
 0.59013 U
9
V
3
Where : U = K (φ  37°); V = K (λ + 95°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case :
NAS Shift WGS 84
φ = 34° 47′ 08.83″N ∆φ = 0.36″ φ = 34° 47′ 09.19″N
λ = ()86° 34′ 52.18″W ∆λ = 0.08″ λ = ()86° 34′ 52.10″W
D12
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs)
for Transforming
South American Datum 1969 (SAN) to WGS 84
Area of Applicability : South America (Continental contiguous land areas only)
MRE coefficients for φ and λ are :
∆φ″ =  1.67504  0.05209 U + 0.25158 V + 1.10149 U
2
+ 0.24913 UV  1.00937 U
2
V
 0.74977 V
3
 1.54090 U
4
+ 0.14474 V
4
+ 0.47866 U
5
+ 0.36278 U
3
V
2
 1.29942 UV
4
+ 0.30410 V
5
+ 0.87669 U
6
 0.27950 U
5
V  0.46367 U
7
+ 4.31466 U
4
V
3
+ 2.09523 U
2
V
5
+ 0.85556 UV
6
 0.17897 U
8
 0.57205 UV
7
+ 0.12327 U
9
 0.85033 U
6
V
3
 4.86117 U
4
V
5
+ 0.06085 U
9
V  0.21518 U
3
V
8
+ 0.31053 U
5
V
7
 0.09228 U
8
V
5
 0.22996 U
9
V
5
+ 0.58774 U
6
V
9
+ 0.87562 U
9
V
7
+ 0.39001 U
8
V
9
 0.81697 U
9
V
9
∆λ″ =  1.77967 + 0.40405 U + 0.50268 V  0.05387 U
2
 0.12837 UV  0.54687 U
2
V
 0.17056 V
3
 0.14400 U
3
V + 0.11351 U
5
V  0.62692 U
3
V
3
 0.01750 U
8
+ 1.18616 U
3
V
5
+ 0.01305 U
9
+ 1.01360 U
7
V
3
 0.29059 U
8
V
3
+ 5.12370 U
6
V
5
 5.09561 U
7
V
5
 5.27168 U
6
V
7
+ 4.04265 U
7
V
7
 1.62710 U
8
V
7
+ 1.68899 U
9
V
7
+ 2.07213 U
8
V
9
 1.76074 U
9
V
9
Where : U = K (φ + 20°); V = K (λ + 60°); K = 0.05235988
NOTE : Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.
Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.
Quality of fit = ± 2.0 m
Test Case
SAN Shift WGS 84
φ = ()31° 56′ 33.95″S ∆φ = 1.36″ φ = ()31° 56′ 35.31″S
λ = ()65° 06′ 18.66″W ∆λ = 2.16″ λ = ()65° 06′ 20.82″W
E1
APPENDIX E
WGS 72 TO WGS 84 TRANSFORMATION
E2
This page is intentionally blank
E3
WGS 72 to WGS 84 TRANSFORMATION
1. Situations arise where only WGS 72 coordinates are available for a site. In such
instances, the WGS 72 to WGS 84 transformation listed in Table E.1 can be used with the
following equations to obtain WGS 84 coordinates for the sites:
φ
WGS
84
= φ
WGS
72
+ ∆φ
λ
WGS
84
= λ
WGS
72
+ ∆λ
h
WGS
84
= h
WGS
72
+ ∆h
2. As indicated in Table E.1, when proceeding directly from WGS 72 coordinates to
obtain WGS 84 values, the WGS 84 coordinates will differ from the WGS 72 coordinates due
to a shift in the coordinate system origin, a change in the longitude reference, a scale change
(treated through ∆r) and changes in the size and shape of the ellipsoid. In addition, it is
important to be aware that ∆φ, ∆λ, ∆h values calculated using Table E.1 do not reflect the
effect of differences between the WGS 72 and WGS 84 EGMs and geoids. The following
cases are important to note:
a. Table E.1 equations are to be used for direct transformation of Dopplerderived
WGS 72 coordinates. These transformed coordinates should agree to within approximately +2
meters with the directly surveyed WGS 84 coordinates using TRANSIT or GPS point
positioning.
b. Table E.1 should not be used for satellite local geodetic stations whose WGS
72 coordinates were determined using datum shifts from [36]. The preferred approach is to
transform such WGS 72 coordinates, using datum shifts from [36], back to their respective
local datums, and then transform the local datum coordinates to WGS 84 using Appendices B
or C.
c. Table E.1 should be used only when no other approach is applicable.
E 4
Table E.1
Formulas and Parameters
to Transform WGS 72 Coordinates
to WGS 84 Coordinates
FORMULAS
∆φ″ = (4.5 cos φ) / (a sin 1″) + (∆f sin 2φ) / (sin 1″)
∆λ″ = 0.554
∆h = 4.5 sin φ + a ∆f sin
2
φ  ∆a + ∆r (Units = Meters)
PARAMETERS
∆f = 0.3121057 x 10
7
a = 6378135 m
∆a = 2.0 m
∆r = 1.4 m
INSTRUCTIONS
To obtain WGS 84 coordinates, add the ∆φ, ∆λ, ∆h changes
calculated using WGS 72 coordinates to the WGS 72 coordinates
(φ, λ, h, respectively).
Latitude is positive north and longitude is positive east
(0° to 180°).
F1
APPENDIX F
ACRONYMS
F2
This page is intentionally blank
F3
APPENDIX F
ACRONYMS
AGD 66 = Australian Geodetic Datum 1966
AGD 84 = Australian Geodetic Datum 1984
BIH = Bureau International de l’Heure
BTS = BIH Terrestrial System
CCRS = Conventional Celestial Reference System
CEP = Celestial Ephemeris Pole
CIS = Conventional Inertial System
CONUS = Contiguous United States
CTP = Conventional Terrestrial Pole
CTRS = Conventional Terrestrial Reference System
CTS = Conventional Terrestrial System
DMA = Defense Mapping Agency
DoD = Department of Defense
DoT = Department of Transportation
ECEF = EarthCentered EarthFixed
ECI = EarthCentered Inertial
ECM = Earth’s Center of Mass
ED 50 = European Datum 1950
ED 79 = European Datum 1979
EGM = Earth Gravitational Model
EGM96 = Earth Gravitational Model 1996
EUREF89 = European Terrestrial Reference Frame 1989
FRG = Federal Republic of Germany
GEOPS = Geopotential Surfaces
GSFC = Goddard Space Flight Center
GLONASS = Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS = Global Positioning System
GRS 80 = Geodetic Reference System 1980
HARNs = High Accuracy Reference Networks
IAG = International Association of Geodesy
IAU = International Astronomical Union
IERS = International Earth Rotation Service
F4
IGeS = International Geoid Service
IGS = International GPS Service for Geodynamics
IRM = IERS Reference Meridian
IRP = IERS Reference Pole
ITRF = IERS Terrestrial Reference Frame
ITS = Instantaneous Terrestrial System
IUGG = International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics
JGP95E = Joint Gravity Project 1995 Elevation
MC&G = Mapping, Charting and Geodesy
MREs = Multiple Regression Equations
MSL = Mean Sea Level
NAD 27 = North American Datum 1927
NAD 83 = North American Datum 1983
NASA = National Aeronautics and Space Administration
NAVSTAR GPS = Navigation Satellite Timing and Ranging GPS
NGS = National Geodetic Survey
NIMA = National Imagery and Mapping Agency
NNSS = Navy Navigation Satellite System
NSWC = Naval Surface Warfare Center (formerly Naval Surface Weapons
Center)
NSWCDD = Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division
OCS = Operational Control Segment
OSGB 36 = Ordnance Survey of Great Britain 1936
OSGB SN 80 = Ordnance Survey of Great Britain Scientific Network 1980
PPS = Precise Positioning Service
PSAD 56 = Provisional South American Datum 1956
RMS = RootMeanSquare
SAD 69 = South American Datum 1969
SLR = Satellite Laser Ranging
SPS = Standard Positioning Service
TD = Tokyo Datum
TDRSS = Tracking and Data Relay Satellite System
TR = Technical Report
TRF = Terrestrial Reference Frame
UK = United Kingdom
F5
US = United States
USNO = United States Naval Observatory
UT = Universal Time
UTC = Universal Time Coordinated
VLBI = Very Long Baseline Interferometry
WGS = World Geodetic System
WGS 60 = World Geodetic System 1960
WGS 66 = World Geodetic System 1966
WGS 72 = World Geodetic System 1972
WGS 84 = World Geodetic System 1984
F6
This page is intentionally blank
AMENDMENT 1 3 January 2000 DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE WORLD GEODETIC SYSTEM 1984 Its Definition and Relationships with Local Geodetic Systems These pages document the changes made to this document as of the date above and form a part of NIMA TR8350.2 dated 4 July 1997. These changes are approved for use by all Departments and Agencies of the Department of Defense. PAGE xi In the 5th paragraph, the sentence “The model, complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,676 coefficients.” was changed to read “The model, complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,317 coefficients.”. PAGE 37 In Table 3.4, the value of U0 was changed from 62636860.8497 m2 /s2 to 62636851.7146 m2 /s2 . PAGE 44
Equation
(49)
was
changed
from
z u 2 + E2 β = arctan “ u x2 + y
”
to
read
z u 2 + E2 “ β = arctan u x2 + y2
PAGE 51
”.
In the first paragraph, the sentence “The WGS 84 EGM96, complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,321 coefficients.” was changed to read “The WGS 84 EGM96, complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360, is comprised of 130,317 coefficients.”. PAGE 53 At the end of the definition of terms for Equation (53), the definition of the “k” term was changed from “For m=0, k=1; m>1, k=2” to read “For m=0, k=1; m≠0, k=2”. PAGE 72 In the next to the last paragraph, the sentences “Note that the National Map Accuracy Standard requires points to be horizontally accurate to 0.51 mm (1/50 in.) for scales of
Page 1 of 3
1:20,000 or larger and 0.84 mm (1/30 in.) for scales less than 1:20,000. For example, this corresponds to 2.5 m at 1:5,000 and 42 m at 1:50,000.” was changed to read “Note that the National Map Accuracy Standard requires test points to be horizontally accurate to 0.85 mm (1/30 in.) for scales of 1:20,000 or larger and 0.51 mm (1/50 in.) for scales less than 1:20,000. For example, this corresponds to 4.2 m at 1:5,000 and 25 m at 1:50,000.”. PAGE R4 The title of the paper in reference number 40. was changed from “Status of the World Geodetic System 1984” to read “Refinements to The World Geodetic System 1984”. PAGE B3 In the second paragraph of Section 1 the sentence “There are 109 local geodetic datums ….” Was changed to read “There are 112 local geodetic datums ….” PAGE B.12 The Korean Geodetic System 1995 was added. PAGE B.13 The Old Hawaiian datum using the International 1924 ellipsoid was added. PAGE B.14 The South American Geocentric Reference System (SIRGAS) was added. PAGE B.32 The old Cycle 0 transformation parameters for the INDIAN 1975 datum in Thailand were added and the code for the Cycle 1 parameters was changed from “INHA” to “INHA1”. PAGE B.33 The Korean Geodetic System 1995 for South Korea was added. PAGE B.35 The old Cycle 0 transformation parameters for the TOKYO datum in South Korea were added and the code for the Cycle 1 parameters was changed from “TOYB” to “TOYB1”.
Page 2 of 3
AMENDMENT 2 23 June 2004 PAGE 52 Equation 52 has been changed to the following. PAGE B.PAGE B.105 The Old Hawaiian datum for the Hawaiian Islands using the International 1924 ellipsoid was added. 1 Φ = 2 ω2(x2 + y2) (52) NIMA/Geodesy and Geophysics Department Page 3 of 3 .76 The South American Geocentric Reference System (SIRGAS) for South America was added.
Defense Mapping Agency. Datum Transformations. Geodesy. Gravity Potential. Ellipsoidal Gravity Formula. Geoid Undulations. Geodetic Systems. EGM96. Geoid Heights. Local Geodetic Datums. Gravity Formula. Molodensky Datum Transformation Formulas. DMA. Earth Gravitational Model. Geodetic Heights.14. ii . Regional Datums. Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations. Earth Gravitational Constant. Reference Frames. Gravitation. Geodetic. Orthometric Heights. World Geodetic System 1984. World Geodetic System. SUBJECT TERMS Datums. Geoids. Gravity. Local Datums. National Imagery and Mapping Agency. Datum Shifts. WGS 84. Gravitational Coefficients. Gravitational Model. Reference Systems. Gravitational Potential. NIMA.
NIMA DEFINITION On 1 October 1996 the Defense Mapping Agency (DMA) was incorporated into a new agency. the National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA). iii . NATIONAL IMAGERY AND MAPPING AGENCY The National Imagery and Mapping Agency provides timely. relevant and accurate imagery. imagery intelligence and geospatial information in support of national security objectives.
This page is intentionally blank iv .
These groups provided vital resources.ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) expresses its appreciation to the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) Headquarters. the United States Naval Observatory. the Global Positioning System Joint Program Office. In addition. Office of the Naval Oceanographer. The Ohio State University. the Chief of Naval Operations. v . Hughes/STX. NIMA would like to express appreciation to the predecessor organizations that contributed to the development of WGS 84. NASA’s Goddard Space Flight Center (NASA/GSFC). the Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division. the International GPS Service for Geodynamics (IGS) and the International Geoid Service (IGeS) Special Working Group (SWG) on the NIMA/GSFC Model Evaluation. technical expertise and support on the refinements documented in this report.
This page is intentionally blank vi .
DC 205050001 .2 Third Edition Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1984 Its Definition and Relationships with Local Geodetic Systems FOREWORD 1. nor is a copyright pending.2 Third Edition contains no copyrighted material. SECOND STREET ST. Distribution is unlimited. BUILDING 213 WASHINGTON. MISSOURI 631183399 vii 12310 SUNRISE VALLEY DRIVE RESTON. Copies may be requested from NIMA as indicated in the PREFACE. VIRGINIA 201913449 WASHINGTON NAVY YARD. This third edition reflects improvements which have been made to the WGS 84 since the second edition. NIMA TR 8350. MARYLAND 208165003 Reply to the Following: 3200 S. 2. techniques and technology available through 1996. LOUIS.National Imagery and Mapping Agency NATIONAL IMAGERY AND MAPPING AGENCY TECHNICAL REPORT 8350. Deputy Director Directorate of Systems and Technology 4600 SANGAMORE ROAD BETHESDA. The present WGS represents the National Imagery and Mapping Agency’s (NIMA) latest geodetic and geophysical modeling of the Earth based on data. This technical report defines the Department of Defense (DoD) World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 84).
This page is intentionally blank viii .
Such a substitution may lead to degraded WGS 84 products. Mail Stop L41 Geodesy and Geophysics Department National Imagery and Mapping Agency 3200 South Second Street St.mil Since WGS 84 is comprised of a coherent set of parameters. interoperability problems and may have other adverse effects. Copies of this technical report may be requested from: Director National Imagery and Mapping Agency ATTN: ISDFR. Significant changes incorporated in the third edition include: • • • Refined realization of the reference frame Development of a refined Earth Gravitational Model and geoid Updated list of datum transformations Users requiring additional information. Louis.mil http://www. MD 208165003 (USA) Commercial Voice Phone: (301) 2272495 Commercial FAX: (301) 2272498 DSN: 2872495. DoD organizations should not make a substitution for any of the WGS 84 related parameters or equations.PREFACE This technical report defines the Department of Defense (DoD) World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 84). or an electronic version of this document should contact: NIMA(GIMG). Mail Stop D17 4600 Sangamore Road Bethesda. FAX: 2872498 Toll Free: 18008260342 ix .nima. MO 631183399 EMail address: GandG@nima. clarification.
This page is intentionally blank x .
accessible 3dimensional coordinate system for geospatial data collected from a broad spectrum of sources. as well as the previous set of enhancements. implemented in 1994. Within the last three years. The two sets of selfconsistent GPSrealized coordinates (Terrestrial Reference Frames) derived to date have been designated ‘WGS 84 (G730)’ and ‘WGS 84 (G873)’. NIMA recommends use of an appropriately truncated (less than or equal to n=m=70) copy of this geopotential model for high accuracy orbit determination. These reference frame enhancements. users should consider the WGS 84 reference frame unchanged for applications involving mapping. The station coordinates which compose the operational WGS 84 reference frame are those of the permanent DoD GPS monitor stations. A consistent global set of 3dimensional station coordinates infers the location of an origin. a set of station coordinates infers a particular realization of a reference frame. For this reason. the NASA Goddard Space Flight Center (GSFC) and The Ohio State University. an intensive joint effort has been conducted during the last three years involving analysts and resources of NIMA. xi . The model. The WGS 84 continues to provide a single. The form of the EGM96 model is a spherical harmonic expansion of the gravitational potential. The dates when these refined station coordinate sets were implemented in the GPS Operational Control Segment (OCS) were 29 June 1994 and 29 January 1997. Some of this geospatial data exhibits a high degree of ‘metric’ fidelity and requires a global reference frame which is free of any significant distortions or biases. complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360.EXECUTIVE SUMMARY The global geocentric reference frame and collection of models known as the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 84) has evolved significantly since its creation in the mid1980s. Therefore. The result of this joint effort is a new global model of the Earth’s gravitational field: Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96). where the ‘G’ indicates these coordinates were obtained through GPS techniques and the number following the ‘G’ indicates the GPS week number when these coordinates were implemented in the NIMA precise GPS ephemeris estimation process. common. the orientation of an orthogonal set of Cartesian axes and a scale. a series of improvements to WGS 84 were developed in the past several years which served to refine the original version. In the case of DoD applications. once in 1994 and again in 1996.317 coefficients. is comprised of 130. In addition to these reference frame enhancements. are negligible (less than 30 centimeters) in the context of mapping. respectively. charting and enroute navigation. the coordinates for these DoD GPS stations have been refined two times. this model replaces the nowoutdated original WGS 84 gravitational model developed more than ten years ago. charting and enroute navigation. In essence.
Vertical Datum For Land Areas WGS 84 Geoid or Local Mean Sea Level (MSL) xii From 1 Jan 1987 From 1 Jan 1987 From 1 Jan 1987 From 1 Jan 1987 From 1 Jan 1987 From 1 Jan 1987 . This refined geoid is referred to as the WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid. The following names and the associated implementation dates have been officially designated for use in all NIMA products: 1. FOR TOPOGRAPHIC MAPPING: A. Horizontal Datum WGS 84 B.A refined WGS 84 geoid has been determined from the new gravitational model and is available as a 15 minute grid of geoid undulations which exhibit an absolute accuracy of 1. Vertical Datum WGS 84 Geoid or Local Mean Sea Level (MSL) 2. Horizontal Datum WGS 84 B. FOR AERONAUTICAL CHARTS: A. Vertical Datum WGS 84 Geoid or Local Mean Sea Level (MSL) 3. Horizontal Datum WGS 84 B.0 meters or better. FOR NAUTICAL CHARTS: A. anywhere on the Earth.
Thus. GIS DATA AND OTHER HIGHACCURACY Reference Frame WGS 84 WGS 84 (G730) WGS 84 (G873) 1 Jan 87 . The Earth Gravitational Model 1996 xiii . FOR GEODETIC. WGS 84 Geoid WGS 84 WGS 84 EGM96 1 Jan 1987 1 Oct 1996 1 Jan 1987 1 Oct 1996 In summary. For mapping. They are most relevant for the geodetic user and other high accuracy applications. Earth Gravitational Model WGS 84 WGS 84 EGM96 D. They have not changed WGS 84. C. Coordinates As of 2 Jan 94. APPLICATIONS: A. As a result.For Ocean Areas Local Sounding Datums 4. the refinements are most important to the users requiring increased accuracies over capabilities provided by the previous editions of WGS 84.1 Jan 94 2 Jan 94 . modern geodetic positioning within the DoD is now carried out in the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame. the refinements which have been made to WGS 84 have reduced the uncertainty in the coordinates of the reference frame. a set of geodetic coordinates shall include a designation of the reference frame and epoch of the observations. B. these improvements are generally negligible. charting and navigational users.28 Sept 96 From 29 Sept 96 These dates represent implementation dates in the NIMA GPS precise ephemeris estimation process. the uncertainty of the gravitational model and the uncertainty of the geoid undulations.
to update and develop new datum transformations as additional data become available to support mapping. available from NIMA on a 15 minute grid.(EGM96) replaces the original WGS 84 geopotential model and serves as the basis for the WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid. As additional data become available. charting and navigational users. as in the past. NIMA may develop further refinements to the geopotential model and the geocentric reference frame. xiv . NIMA continues.
..............................................2.....................26 2.....................ii NIMA DEFINITION................................................................................................................................................................................28 2............................................................28 2........................................1 General .............................................. WGS 84 COORDINATE SYSTEM ...........ix EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................... WGS 84 ELLIPSOID ......xv 1.......................2....................................3 Mathematical Relationship Between the Conventional Celestial Reference System (CCRS) and the WGS 84 Coordinate System ......................21 2................................................................................................22 2.....11 2.............2....................31 3.......................................................................................................................................................................v FOREWORD............................................................1 Tidal Variations in the Earth’s Rotation...31 xv .....26 2......................................vii PREFACE..........2 Realization............................ INTRODUCTION...........29 3....................................1 Agreement with the ITRF.........................21 2................................................1 Definition.................................................TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE AMENDMENT 1 SUBJECT TERMS...........2 Tidal Effects............................25 2..................................................................................................xi TABLE OF CONTENTS........................................................................................................................................................2..................................................1 Plate Tectonic Motion ....3.........2...............2 Temporal Effects...................2......iii ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ..............................................
1 General . WGS 84 EGM96 GEOID .....2....33 3........2................2..41 4..51 5................2 Special Considerations for GPS...............................… ............................2 Normal Gravity on the Ellipsoidal Surface..4 Angular Velocity of the Earth (ω) ...................................................................2.........................................2..3 Earth’s Gravitational Constant (GM) .1 Derived Geometric Constants....3 Derived Geometric and Physical Constants..................................32 3...............................................................4 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Excluded (GM′) ..36 3.......................3..................................................32 3.32 3........34 3.......................................................................................2. WGS 84 EGM96 GRAVITATIONAL MODELING.................38 4...................................................................................................................34 3........................................ WGS 84 ELLIPSOIDAL GRAVITY FORMULA .......33 3.......3...........62 xvi ....3...........................3 GM of the Earth’s Atmosphere.......3.1 General..3 Normal Gravity Above the Ellipsoid ....................................................2 Defining Parameters...........2..........36 3............................................2 Formulas......................3.... .2 Gravity Potential (W).....................42 5.....34 3.................2 Flattening (f) ..51 5.....2 Physical Constants ...61 6.............. Representations and Analysis ....................52 6.................................................................................................1 Semimajor Axis (a)...........................1 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Included (GM) ..33 3.........3.41 4................3............................................61 6........41 4........2.......................................................................................................................................................................1 Earth Gravitational Model (EGM96)...............................
...........................93 9............................................................................................................................................................1.............................................91 9............76 8.........73 7.... IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES ..........5 Geospatial Information Applications ........3 Cartographic Applications........66 7......................................................... ........................... ACCURACY OF WGS 84 COORDINATES ..............................................71 7..94 xvii ................................................1 Introduction....................................2..........................83 9................2 Permanent Tide Systems .............................6..................1..........................3 Availability of WGS 84 EGM96 Data Products.......................2 Precise Geodetic Applications ..........76 7...............1..2............93 9.........1 Discussion.................1 General ...................................62 6...............................4 Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformations............2 Relationship of WGS 84 to the ITRF .....................5 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations (MRE)...................................................3 Representations and Analysis ...............71 7.........................................................................................2...................6 WGS 72 to WGS 84.......1 General Recommendations................................................1.................................................................................. WGS 84 RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER GEODETIC SYSTEMS ...........71 7..92 9..............64 6......91 9.................................................71 7........1 Formulas .........1.........................................81 8.......................................................2 Summary................3 Relationship of WGS 84 to the NAD 83 ...92 9..........64 6.........4 Navigation Applications .................81 8........
..................9.......................101 REFERENCES ....................................F1 xviii .......................................................................................C1 APPENDIX D: MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS FOR SPECIAL CONTINENTAL SIZE LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS ......................D1 APPENDIX E: WGS 72 TO WGS 84 TRANSFORMATION ..................................................................... ............94 10.................................................................A1 APPENDIX B: DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED USING SATELLITE TIES TO GEODETIC DATUMS/SYSTEMS .....B1 APPENDIX C: DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED USING NONSATELLITE INFORMATION ........................................................................................................................................2 Summary....... CONCLUSIONS/SUMMARY ...................E1 APPENDIX F: ACRONYMS.....R1 APPENDIX A: LIST OF REFERENCE ELLIPSOID NAMES AND PARAMETERS (USED FOR GENERATING DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS)..........................................
INTRODUCTION The National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) supports a large number and variety of products and users. the ellipsoidal (normal) gravity model and a current list of local datum transformations. which makes it imperative that these products all be related to a common worldwide geodetic reference system. NIMA recommendations regarding the practical implementation of WGS 84 are given in Chapter Nine of this report. supports increasingly stringent accuracy requirements and supports military and humanitarian activities worldwide. techniques and technology available through 1996. the EGM96. WGS 72 and WGS 84. geopositioning and navigation. new observations of land gravity data. The definition of the World Geodetic System has evolved within NIMA and its predecessor agencies from the initial WGS 60 through subsequent improvements embodied in WGS 66. 11 . The refinement described in this technical report has been possible due to additional global data from precise and accurate geodetic positioning. fundamental and derived constants. This report includes the definition of the coordinate system. WGS 84 is realized by the coordinates assigned to the GPS tracking stations used in the calculation of precise GPS orbits at NIMA. the availability of extensive altimetry data from the GEOSAT. charting. The refined World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 84) represents NIMA’s best geodetic model of the Earth using data. Commensurate with these modeling enhancements. significant improvements in the realization of the WGS 84 reference frame have been achieved through the use of the NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS). This ensures interoperability in relating information from one product to another. The WGS 84 represents the best global geodetic reference system for the Earth available at this time for practical applications of mapping. the National Aeronautics and Space Administration’s Goddard Space Flight Center (NASA/GSFC). The Ohio State University and the Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division (NSWCDD). The improved Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96). its associated geoid and additional datum transformations have been made possible by the inclusion of these new data. EGM96 was developed jointly by NIMA. ERS1 and TOPEX/POSEIDON satellites and additional satellite tracking data from geodetic satellites at various inclinations.1. The coordinates of these tracking stations have been determined to an absolute accuracy of ±5 cm (1σ). NIMA currently utilizes the five globally dispersed Air Force operational GPS tracking stations augmented by seven tracking stations operated by NIMA.
This page is intentionally blank 12 .
2.
WGS 84 COORDINATE SYSTEM 2.1 Definition
The WGS 84 Coordinate System is a Conventional Terrestrial Reference System (CTRS). The definition of this coordinate system follows the criteria outlined in the International Earth Rotation Service (IERS) Technical Note 21 [1]. These criteria are repeated below: • • • • It is geocentric, the center of mass being defined for the whole Earth including oceans and atmosphere Its scale is that of the local Earth frame, in the meaning of a relativistic theory of gravitation Its orientation was initially given by the Bureau International de l’Heure (BIH) orientation of 1984.0 Its time evolution in orientation will create no residual global rotation with regards to the crust
The WGS 84 Coordinate System is a righthanded, Earthfixed orthogonal coordinate system and is graphically depicted in Figure 2.1.
IERS Reference Pole (IRP) Z
WGS 84
Earth's Center of Mass
IERS Reference Meridian (IRM)
X WGS 84
Y WGS 84
Figure 2.1 The WGS 84 Coordinate System Definition
2 1
In Figure 2.1, the origin and axes are defined as follows: Origin = Earth’s center of mass ZAxis = The direction of the IERS Reference Pole (IRP). This direction corresponds to the direction of the BIH Conventional Terrestrial Pole (CTP) (epoch 1984.0) with an uncertainty of 0.005″ [1] XAxis = Intersection of the IERS Reference Meridian (IRM) and the plane passing through the origin and normal to the Zaxis. The IRM is coincident with the BIH Zero Meridian (epoch 1984.0) with an uncertainty of 0.005″ [1] YAxis = Completes a righthanded, EarthCentered EarthFixed (ECEF) orthogonal coordinate system The WGS 84 Coordinate System origin also serves as the geometric center of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid and the Zaxis serves as the rotational axis of this ellipsoid of revolution. Readers should note that the definition of the WGS 84 CTRS has not changed in any fundamental way. This CTRS continues to be defined as a righthanded, orthogonal and Earthfixed coordinate system which is intended to be as closely coincident as possible with the CTRS defined by the International Earth Rotation Service (IERS) or, prior to 1988, its predecessor, the Bureau International de l’Heure (BIH). 2.2 Realization
Following terminology proposed in [2], an important distinction is needed between the definition of a coordinate system and the practical realization of a reference frame. Section 2.1 contains a definition of the WGS 84 Coordinate System. To achieve a practical realization of a global geodetic reference frame, a set of station coordinates must be established. A consistent set of station coordinates infers the location of an origin, the orientation of an orthogonal set of Cartesian axes and a scale. In modern terms, a globally distributed set of consistent station coordinates represents a realization of an ECEF Terrestrial Reference Frame (TRF). The original WGS 84 reference frame established in 1987 was realized through a set of Navy Navigation Satellite System (NNSS) or TRANSIT (Doppler) station coordinates which were described in [3]. Moreover, this original WGS 84 TRF was developed by exploiting results from the best available comparisons of the DoD reference frame in existence during the early 1980s, known as NSWC 9Z2, and the BIH Terrestrial System (BTS). The main objective in the original effort was to align, as closely as possible, the origin, scale and orientation of the WGS 84 frame with the BTS frame at an epoch of 1984.0. The establishment of accurate transformation parameters (given in DMA TR 8350.2, First 2 2
Edition and Second Edition) between NSWC 9Z2 and the BTS achieved this objective with remarkable precision. The scale of the transformed NSWC 9Z2 frame, for example, is coincident with the BTS at the 10centimeter level [4]. The set of estimated station coordinates put into practical use and described in [3], however, had an uncertainty of 12 meters with respect to the BTS. The TRANSITrealized WGS 84 reference frame was used beginning in January 1987 in the Defense Mapping Agency’s (DMA) TRANSIT precise ephemeris generation process. These TRANSIT ephemerides were then used in an absolute point positioning process with Doppler tracking data to determine the WGS 84 positions of the permanent DoD Global Positioning System (GPS) monitor stations. These TRANSITrealized WGS 84 coordinates remained in use by DoD groups until 1994. Specifically, they remained in use until 2 January 1994 by DMA and until 29 June 1994 by the GPS Operational Control Segment (OCS). Several independent studies, [4], [5], [6], [7] and [8], have demonstrated that a systematic ellipsoid height bias (scale bias) exists between GPSderived coordinates and Dopplerrealized WGS 84 coordinates for the same site. This scale bias is most likely attributable to limitations in the techniques used to estimate the Dopplerderived positions [4]. To remove this bias and obtain a selfconsistent GPSrealization of the WGS 84 reference frame, DMA, with assistance from the Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division (NSWCDD), developed a revised set of station coordinates for the DoD GPS tracking network. These revised station coordinates provided an improved realization of the WGS 84 reference frame. To date, this process has been carried out twice, once in 1994 and again in 1996. Using GPS data from the Air Force and DMA permanent GPS tracking stations along with data from a number of selected core stations from the International GPS Service for Geodynamics (IGS), DMA estimated refined coordinates for the permanent Air Force and DMA stations. In this geodetic solution, a subset of selected IGS station coordinates was held fixed to their IERS Terrestrial Reference Frame (ITRF) coordinates. A complete description of the estimation techniques used to derive these new DoD station coordinates is given in [8] and [9]. These refined DoD coordinates have improved accuracy due primarily to the elimination of the ellipsoid height bias and have improved precision due to the advanced GPS techniques used in the estimation process. The accuracy of each individual estimated position component derived in 1996 has been shown to be on the order of 5 cm (1σ) for each permanent DoD station [9]. The corresponding accuracy achieved in the 1994 effort, which is now outdated, was 10 cm (1σ) [8]. By constraining the solution to the appropriate ITRF, the improved coordinates for these permanent DoD stations represent a refined GPSrealization of the WGS 84 reference frame. The two sets of selfconsistent GPSrealized coordinates (Terrestrial Reference Frames) derived to date have been designated ‘WGS 84 (G730)’ and ‘WGS 84 (G873)’. The 2 3
433246 6118.597221 4819.884561 1339.487203 4044.910911 4425.861714 China 85409 2148. Note that the most recent additions to the NIMA station network.239153 Bahrain 85405 3633.376113 801.776718 89. to produce geodetic positions with an uncertainty of 30 cm (1σ. respectively.168441 4842.1 WGS 84 Station Set G873: Cartesian Coordinates*.842977 2329.737517 960. the station located at the US Naval Observatory (USNO) and the station located near Beijing.2 corroborate this belief.350829 1917. Instead.2.998996 6160.0 Epoch NIMA Station Number 85128 85129 85130 85130 85131 85132 Station Location Air Force Stations Colorado Springs Ascension Diego Garcia(<2 Mar 97) Diego Garcia(>2 Mar 97) Kwajalein Hawaii X (km) Y (km) Z (km) 1248.524214 1572.032190 6029. 1997. The dates when these refined station coordinate sets were implemented in the GPS OCS were 29 June 1994 and 29 January 1997.284609 2799.641465 *Coordinates are at the antenna electrical center. China. each component). The changes between the G730 and G873 coordinate sets are given in Table 2. which was shown at the time in 1994. The results shown in Table 2.248096 3976.1.464089 801.867278 6252.500193 876.656101 2.197323 6029.851686 5511. Table 2.743914 4426.277706 Ecuador 85406 1272.862677 23.054668 4965.481654 NIMA Stations Australia 85402 3939. exhibit the largest change between coordinate sets.801890 3985.181976 3467.782349 1916. This result is due to the fact that these two stations were not part of the G730 general geodetic solution conducted in 1994.982282 2200. The most recent set of coordinates for these globally distributed stations is provided in Table 2. these two stations were positioned using NIMA’s ‘GASP’ geodetic point positioning algorithm [10].221035 3599.636553 England 85404 3981.075383 Argentina 85403 2745.499094 4483.4 .772267 US Naval Observatory 85407 1112. 3613.‘G’ indicates these coordinates were obtained through GPS techniques and the number following the ‘G’ indicates the GPS week number when these coordinates were implemented in the NIMA precise ephemeris estimation process.
While similar comparisons of WGS 84 (G873) and ITRF94 are still underway. 6.2 4.8 2.7 4.0 3.2.3 2.3 2.2 Differences between WGS 84 (G873) Coordinates and Prior WGS 84 (G730) Coordinates Being Used in Orbital Operations * (Compared at 1994. The daytoday dispersion on these parameters indicates that these differences are statistically insignificant.0 8.0 39. Note that a set of 2.5 7.7 1.7 1.1 Agreement with the ITRF The WGS 84 (G730) reference frame was shown to be in agreement.0 Epoch) NIMA Station Number 85128 85129 85130 85131 85132 Station Location Air Force Stations Colorado Springs Ascension Diego Garcia(<2 Mar 97) Kwajalein Hawaii ∆ East (cm) 0.1 8. When new stations are added to the permanent DoD GPS tracking network or when existing stations (and/or antennas) are moved or replaced.6 ∆ Ellipsoid Height (cm) 3.0 8.3 4.5 0.7 NIMA Stations Australia 85402 Argentina 85403 England 85404 Bahrain 85405 Ecuador 85406 US Naval Observatory 85407 China 85409 *Coordinates are at the antenna electrical center.1 5. Further improvements and future realizations of the WGS 84 reference frame are anticipated. after the adjustment of a best fitting 7parameter transformation.3 1.1 7.0 2.8 8.1 2. extensive daily orbit comparisons between the NIMA precise ephemerides (WGS 84 (G873) reference frame) and corresponding IGS ephemerides (ITRF94 reference frame) reveal systematic differences no larger than 2 cm [40].1 31.2 1.7 3.Table 2.7 0.5 6.5 In summary. NIMA will take steps to ensure that the highest possible degree of fidelity is maintained and changes are identified to the appropriate organizations using the naming conventions described above.1 4.1 2. with the ITRF92 at a level approaching 10 cm [10].8 4. As these changes occur. 2.6 ∆ North (cm) 1. new station coordinates will be required.1 7.3 4. represent the most recent realization(s) of the WGS 84 reference frame. in particular WGS 84 (G873). these improved station coordinate sets.5 .1 10.
2.2. One way to handle these horizontal motions is to estimate velocity parameters along with the station position parameters. this approach is not practical since the observation period is not sufficiently long and the geodetic surveying algorithms in common use are not equipped to perform this function. 2. if the accuracy requirements of a DoD application warrant it.6 . The epoch of the WGS 84 (G730) reference frame. a given set of station positions represented at a particular epoch must be updated for the effects of plate tectonic motion. depending on the accuracy requirements of the geodetic survey.2 [12].ephemerides represents a unique realization of a reference frame that may differ slightly from a corresponding realization obtained from stations on the Earth. 25 cm of horizontal displacement will have accumulated in that time and application of this correction may be advisable. represented at a particular epoch. Temporal effects may also require an epoch to be designated with any set of absolute station coordinates. a station on a plate that moves at a rate of 5 cm/year may not require this correction if the epoch of the coordinates is less than a year in the past.1 Plate Tectonic Motion To maintain centimeterlevel stability in a CTRS. Temporal changes in the crust of the Earth must now be modeled or estimated. Instead. A map of the sixteen major tectonic plates is given in Figure 2. DoD practitioners must decide which tectonic plate a given station is on and apply a plate motion model to account for these horizontal effects. however. The most important changes are plate tectonic motion and tidal effects on the Earth’s crust. is 1994.0 while the epoch associated with the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame is 1997.0. The current recommended plate motion model is known as NNRNUVEL1A and can be found in [1].2 Temporal Effects Since the fidelity of the current realization of the WGS 84 reference frame is now significantly better than a decimeter. This motion has been observed to be as much as 7 cm/year at some DoD GPS tracking stations. these same coordinates are used over a 5year period. The amount of time elapsed between the epoch of a station’s coordinates and the time of interest will be a dominant factor in deciding whether application of this plate motion model is warranted. 2.2. Given sets of globally distributed station coordinates. their positions slowly degrade as the stations ride along on the tectonic plates. 2. These are each discussed briefly below. For most DoD applications. for example. If. For example. previously ignored phenomena must now be taken into account in precise geodetic applications.
.
instantaneous effect can be as large as 42 cm [11]. careful consideration must be given to these station displacements since the peak absolute. however. nutation and precession.0 EarthCentered Inertial (ECI) reference frame which is a particular. This approach may be adequate if the data collection period is long enough since the majority of the displacement is diurnal and semidiurnal. Since a detailed definition of these concepts is beyond the scope of this document. these displacements should be handled as outlined in the IERS Conventions (1996) [1]. B. Earth rotation. [13]. In the most demanding applications.2 Tidal Effects Tidal phenomena are another source of temporal and permanent displacement of a station’s coordinates. These displacements can be modeled to some degree. the mathematical relationship between the CCRS and a CTRS (in this case. B. Note that for nearrealtime orbit determination applications. This is the procedure followed in the NIMA GPS precise ephemeris estimation process. Moreover.3 Mathematical Relationship Between the Conventional Celestial Reference System (CCRS) and the WGS 84 Coordinate System Since satellite equations of motion are appropriately handled in an inertial coordinate system. C and D can be found in the references cited above. 2. widely adopted CCRS that is based on the Fundamental Katalog 5 (FK5) star catalog. the coordinates are typically represented in a ‘tidefree’ system. In practice. Traditionally. The results of following these conventions lead to station coordinates in a ‘zerotide’ system. In this ‘tidefree’ system. C and D represent the effects of polar motion.2. these effects are completely ignored or allowed to ‘averageout’. In the most demanding applications (cmlevel or better accuracy).8 . the rigorous model outlined in [1] should be applied. the WGS 84 Coordinate System) is expressed as: CTRS = [A] [B] [C] [D] CCRS (21) where the matrices A. the concept of a Conventional Celestial Reference System (CCRS) (alternately known as a Conventional Inertial System (CIS)) is employed in most DoD orbit determination operations. The specific formulations for the generation of matrices A. In practical orbit determination applications. If decimeter level or better absolute accuracy is required. [14] and [15] for indepth discussions of this topic. Earth Orientation Parameters (polar motion and Earth rotation 2. both the temporal and permanent displacements are removed from a station’s coordinates.2. analysts often refer to the J2000. coordinates determined from GPS differential (baseline) processing would typically contain whatever tidal components are present in the coordinates of the fixed (known) end of the baseline. the reader is referred to [1]. Note that many practical geodetic surveying algorithms are not equipped to rigorously account for these tidal effects. respectively. Often.2.
2. These highly predictable periodic variations have a peaktopeak amplitude of 3 milliseconds and can be modeled by using the formulation found in Chapter 8 of [1]. Further details on the prediction algorithm can be found in [17]. 2. respectively.1 Tidal Variations in the Earth’s Rotation The actual Earth rotation rate (represented by UT1) undergoes periodic variations due to tidal deformation of the polar moment of inertia.variations) that are needed to build the A and B matrices must be predicted values. The NIMA Earth orientation predictions adhere to a specific formulation documented in ICDGPS211 [16]. When this ICDGPS211 prediction model is evaluated at a specific time. Within the DoD.9 . and the uniform time scale. while recent assessments of the algorithm’s performance can be found in [18] and [19]. UT1. If an orbit determination application requires extreme accuracy and uses tracking data from stations on the Earth. these predictions represent offsets from the IRP in the direction of 0° and 270° longitude. Because the driving forces that influence polar motion and Earth rotation variations are difficult to characterize. these Earth orientation predictions are performed weekly. UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The UT1UTC predictions represent the difference between the actual rotational time scale.3. these UT1 variations should be modeled in the orbit estimation process. NIMA and the USNO supply these predictions on a routine basis.
This page is intentionally blank 2.10 .
a definition is needed for a geometric or mathematical reference surface.3. the normalized second degree zonal gravitational coefficient (C2. One dynamically derived C2. These parameters are identical to those of the GRS 80 Ellipsoid with one minor exception. The first of these is the Earth’s topographic surface.257223563). the Earth’s gravitational constant (GM). based on a body of empirical evidence. Table 3.0 .1). GM and ω. a refined value for the GM parameter [21]. The form of the coefficient used for the second degree zonal is that of the original WGS 84 Earth Gravitational Model rather than the notation ‘J2’ used with GRS 80. this improved GM parameter was recommended for use in all highaccuracy DoD orbit determination applications. The reader should also note that the refined GM value is within 1σ of the original (1987) GM value. 31 . Further details regarding this decision are provided below. The second refinement occurred when the joint NIMA/NASA Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96) project produced a new estimated dynamic value for the second degree zonal coefficient. [10]. the original WGS 84 Development Committee decided to closely adhere to the approach used by the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG).1 General Global geodetic applications require three different surfaces to be clearly defined.0 as part of the EGM96 and the other.0 ) and the angular velocity (ω) of the Earth (Table 3. geometric C2. and an equipotential surface called the geoid (Chapter 6). In 1994. f. The first refinement occurred when DMA recommended. the ellipsoid. a geocentric ellipsoid of revolution was taken as the form for the WGS 84 Ellipsoid.0 term. implied by the defining parameters. Accordingly. The parameters selected to originally define the WGS 84 Ellipsoid were the semimajor axis (a). In addition to this highly irregular topographic surface.1 contains the revised defining parameters. For this reason the four defining parameters were chosen to be a. two efforts were initiated which resulted in significant refinements to these original defining parameters. A decision was made to retain the original WGS 84 Ellipsoid semimajor axis and flattening values (a = 6378137. While selecting the WGS 84 Ellipsoid and associated parameters.0 m and 1/f = 298. Additionally there are now two distinct values for the C2. In 1993. when the latter established and adopted Geodetic Reference System 1980 (GRS 80) [20]. This surface includes the familiar landmass topography as well as the ocean bottom topography. WGS 84 ELLIPSOID 3.
this derived flattening turned out to be slightly different than the GRS 80 flattening because the ( C2.2. Although this slight difference has no practical consequences.2 Flattening (f) The flattening (f) is now one of the defining parameters for WGS 84 and remains the same as in previous editions of TR8350.257223563 (32) As discussed in 3. the vast majority of practical applications such as GPS receivers and mapping processes use the ellipsoid as a convenient reference surface. the ellipsoid flattening value was derived from ( C2.0 ) value as a defining parameter. Its adopted value is: a = 6378137. Highly specialized applications and experiments which require the ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid parameters can be handled separately. improved estimates of this parameter have become available. and thus the WGS 84 semimajor axis is based on estimates from the 19761979 time period determined using laser. 32 .0 ) value was truncated in the normalization process. Incidentally. Although more recent.2 Defining Parameters 3.1 Semimajor Axis (a) The semimajor axis (a) is one of the defining parameters for WGS 84. it is not necessary to define the ellipsoid that best fits the geoid. 3. Moreover.3. there are numerous practical reasons for retaining this flattening value along with the semimajor axis as part of the definition of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid. The original WGS 84 development effort used the normalized second degree zonal harmonic dynamic ( C2. In these applications.0 meters (31) This value is the same as that of the GRS 80 Ellipsoid.2. outside the mainstream of DoD geospatial information generation. More importantly. common sense and the expense of numerous software modifications to GPS receivers and mapping processes guided the decision to retain the original reference ellipsoid. rigorous expression. Instead. As stated in [22].2. Its adopted value is: 1/f = 298.0 ) through an accepted. the GRS 80.1. In this case. Doppler and radar altimeter data and techniques. these new estimates differ from the above value by only a few decimeters.2. this approach obviates the need to transform or recompute coordinates for the large body of accurate geospatial data which has been collected and referenced to the WGS 84 Ellipsoid in the last decade. the flattening of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid is numerically distinct from the GRS 80 flattening.
The refined value of the WGS 84 GM parameter.3.2. the GPS receiver’s interpolation process must use the same GM value that was used to generate the fitted parameters of the broadcast message. This value is recommended in the IERS Conventions (1996) [1] and is also recommended by the International Association of Geodesy (IAG) Special Commission SC3. Significant improvement in the knowledge of GM has occurred since the original WGS 84 development effort.2. 3. For the above reasons. Note that this fitting process is somewhat arbitrary but must be commensurate with the algorithm in the receiver.2 Special Considerations for GPS Based on a recommendation in a DMA letter to the Air Force [21].418 x 108 m3/s2) was implemented in the GPS Operational Control Segment (OCS) during the fall of 1994. the GPS interface control document (ICDGPS200) which defines the space segment to user segment interface should retain the original WGS 84 GM value.3 meter radial bias from the OCS orbit estimates.1 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Included (GM) The central term in the Earth’s gravitational field (GM) is known with much greater accuracy than either ‘G’. the universal gravitational constant. the mass of the Earth. This improvement removed a 1. The refined WGS 84 GM value should continue to be used in the 33 . The estimated accuracy of this parameter is discussed in detail in [24]. the refined WGS 84 GM value (3986004. or ‘M’. This approach takes advantage of the improved orbit accuracy for both the estimated and predicted states facilitated by the refined GM value and avoids the expense of software modifications to all GPS receivers. along with its 1σ uncertainty is: GM = (3986004. Because there are many thousands of GPS receivers in use around the world and because proposed. XXI IAG General Assembly [23].3.008) x 108 m3/s2 (33) This value includes the mass of the atmosphere and is based on several types of space measurements. coordinated software modifications to these receivers would be a costly. To avoid any loss of accuracy. Fundamental Constants. The process that generates the predicted broadcast navigation messages in the OCS also uses a GM value to create the quasiKeplerian elements from the predicted Cartesian state vectors.0 x 108 m3/s2) be retained in GPS receivers and in the OCS process which fits a set of broadcast elements to the Cartesian vectors. Aerospace Corporation [25] suggested that the original WGS 84 GM value (3986005. The broadcast elements are then interpolated by a GPS receiver to obtain the satellite position at a given epoch.3. unmanageable endeavor.418 ± 0.2.3 Earth’s Gravitational Constant (GM) 3.
Some geodetic applications that require angular velocity do not need to consider these fluctuations. Using the value recommended for G [26] by the IAG. 3.2. with an assigned accuracy estimate. from GM.1) x 108 m3/s2 (35) Note that GM′ is known with much less accuracy than GM due to the uncertainty introduced by GMA.9 ± 0. This value. and the accepted value for MA [27]. Equation (34). the product GMA to two significant digits yields the value recommended by the IAG for this constant. To achieve this.2.3.2. Although ω is suitable for use with a standard Earth and the WGS 84 Ellipsoid. Most importantly. it is the International Astronomical Union (IAU). Equation (33): GM′ = (3986000. this approach avoids the introduction of any error to a GPS user. and the universal gravitational constant. MA.3. it is necessary to either have a GM value for the Earth that does not include the mass of the atmosphere or have a GM value for the atmosphere itself.4 Angular Velocity of the Earth (ω) The value of ω used as one of the defining parameters of the WGS 84 (and GRS 80) is: ω = 7292115 x 1011 radians/second (36) This value represents a standard Earth rotating with a constant angular velocity.1) x 108 m3/s2 3. can be obtained by simply subtracting GMA. was adopted for use with WGS 84 and has not changed from the previous editions of this report: GMA= (3. it is necessary to know both the mass of the Earth’s atmosphere.5 ± 0.4 GM with Earth’s Atmosphere Excluded (GM′) (34) The Earth’s gravitational constant with the mass of the Earth’s atmosphere excluded (GM′). 3. Note that the actual angular velocity of the Earth fluctuates with time. or the GRS 67. version of this value (ω′): 34 .3 GM of the Earth’s Atmosphere For some applications.OCS orbit estimation process. G.
rather than ω. (37) For consistent satellite applications.8553 x 1011 + 4. the precession rate in right ascension (m) is: m = (7. Table 3.086 x 1012 + 4. ± 1.0 x 1011 rad/s 3986004..1 WGS 84 Four Defining Parameters Parameter Semimajor Axis Reciprocal of Flattening Angular Velocity of the Earth Earth’s Gravitational Constant (Mass of Earth’s Atmosphere Included) Notation a 1/f ω GM Value 6378137..3 x 1015 TU) radians/second where: TU = Julian Centuries from Epoch J2000.ω′ = 7292115. dU = JD .5.2451545 Therefore. should be used in the formula: ω* = ω′+ m (38) to obtain the angular velocity of the Earth in a precessing reference frame (ω*).0 TU = dU/36525 dU = Number of days of Universal Time (UT) from Julian Date (JD) 2451545. the angular velocity of the Earth in a precessing reference frame.3 x 1015 TU) radians/second Note that values for ω. for satellite applications.5.0 meters 298. In the above equation [28] [14]. ± 2.257223563 7292115. taking on values of ± 0.418 x 108m3/s2 (310) (39) 35 . ω′ and ω* have remained unchanged from the previous edition.1467 x 1011 radians/second that was used with the new definition of time [28].5. is given by: ω* = (7292115. the value of the Earth’s angular velocity (ω′) from equation (37).0 UT1.
The formulas used in the calculation of these constants are primarily from [20] and [29].1 Derived Geometric Constants The original WGS 84 definition. are needed for geodetic applications. as represented in the two previous editions of this document.0 is derived through the defining parameter set (a. The more commonly used geometric and physical constants associated with the WGS 84 Ellipsoid are listed in Tables 3.8553 x 1011 + 4. The differences between the dynamic and geometric even degree zonal harmonics to degree 10 are used in spherical harmonic expansions to calculate the geoid and other geodetic quantities as described in Chapters 5 and 6 of this report. Derived constants should retain the listed significant digits if consistency among the precision levels of the various parameters is to be maintained.0 equals 0. Now that the ellipsoid flattening is used as a defining parameter. other than the four defining parameters (Table 3. A complete description of the EGM96 geopotential coefficients can be found in Chapter 5.5015 x 1011.1).3 x 10 15 TU) rad/s ±0. This difference is within the accuracy of the original WGS 84 C2.1 x 108 m3/s2 ±0. GM and ω). designated the normalized second degree zonal gravitational coefficient ( C2.2 WGS 84 Parameter Values for Special Applications Parameter Gravitational Constant (Mass of Earth’s Atmosphere Not Included) GM of the Earth’s Atmosphere Angular Velocity of the Earth (In a Precessing Reference frame) 3.3 Notation GM′ Value 3986000. it is possible to derive these associated constants. The new derived geometric C2.Table 3.9 x 108 m3/s2 Accuracy (1σ ) ±0.30 x 109.3 and 3.15 x 1011 rad/s Derived Geometric and Physical Constants Many constants associated with the WGS 84 Ellipsoid. 3.1 x 108 m3/s2 GMA ω∗ 3.484166774985 x 103 which differs from the original WGS 84 C2. Using the four defining parameters.1 should be used in orbit determination applications.0 which was ±1.5 x 108 m3/s2 (7292115. the geometric C2.4. The dynamic C2. f.3.0 ) as a defining parameter.0 by 7. 36 .0 value provided in Table 5.
0 b e e2 e′ e′2 E c b/a R1 R2 R3 Value 0.9733328 x 1024 kg 0.4 Derived Physical Constants Constant Theoretical (Normal) Gravity Potential of the Ellipsoid Theoretical (Normal) Gravity at the Equator (on the Ellipsoid) Theoretical (Normal) Gravity at the pole (on the Ellipsoid) Mean Value of Theoretical (Normal) Gravity Theoretical (Normal) Gravity Formula Constant Mass of the Earth (Includes Atmosphere) m=ω2a2b/GM Notation U0 γe γp γ k M m Value 62636851.7900 m Table 3.7146 m2/s2 9.996647189335 6371008.7714 m 6371007.7803253359 m/s2 9.Table 3.00193185265241 5.1809 m 6371000.2094437949696 x 102 6.7976432222 m/s2 0.00344978650684 37 .8321849378 m/s2 9.3 WGS 84 Ellipsoid Derived Geometric Constants Constant Second degree Zonal Harmonic Semiminor Axis First Eccentricity First Eccentricity Squared Second Eccentricity Second Eccentricity Squared Linear Eccentricity Polar Radius of Curvature Axis Ratio Mean Radius of Semiaxes Radius of Sphere of Equal Area Radius of Sphere of Equal Volume Notation C2.1819190842622 x 102 6.2185400842339 x 105 6399593.73949674228 x 103 5.3142 m 8.69437999014 x 103 8.6258 m 0.484166774985 x 103 6356752.
In the literature.0092559 x 1037 kg m2 8. B and C. In a 1983 IAG report on fundamental geodetic constants [31]. These constants are the velocity of light (c) and the dynamical ellipticity (H).4413 ± 0. The dynamical ellipticity (H) is necessary for determining the Earth’s principal moments of inertia. The currently accepted value for the velocity of light in a vacuum (c) is [30].673 x 1011 m3/kg s2 8.0354872 x 1037 kg m2 (312) 38 .3.4413 6. H is variously referred to as dynamical ellipticity. mechanical ellipticity. A. [1]. the following value for the reciprocal of H was given in the discussion of moments of inertia: 1/H = 305. or the precessional constant.5 Relevant Miscellaneous Constants Constant Velocity of Light (in a Vacuum) Dynamical Ellipticity Universal Constant of Gravitation Earth’s Principal Moments of Inertia (Dynamic Solution) Notation c H G A B C Value 299792458 m/s 1/305. two other constants are an integral part of the definition of WGS 84. [23]: c = 299792458 m/s (311) This value is officially recognized by both the IAG [26] and IAU [14] and has been adopted for use with WGS 84.5 along with other WGS 84 associated constants used in special applications. Values of the velocity of light in a vacuum and the dynamical ellipticity adopted for use with WGS 84 are listed in Table 3. Table 3.0091029 x 1037 kg m2 8. It is a factor in the theoretical value of the rate of precession of the equinoxes.0005 This value has been adopted for use with WGS 84. which is well known from observation.2 Physical Constants In addition to the above constants.3.
e.4. b = semimajor and semiminor axes of the ellipsoid. 4. these are the semimajor axis (a). γ p = theoretical gravity at the equator and poles.1 General The WGS 84 Ellipsoid is identified as being a geocentric equipotential ellipsoid of revolution. the magnitude of the gradient of the normal potential function U. or geometric figure of the Earth. i. The WGS 84 ellipsoid of revolution is defined as an equipotential surface with a specific theoretical gravity potential (U). is given on (at) the surface of the ellipsoid by the closed formula of Somigliana [33]: γ =γe 1 + k sin 2 φ 1 − e 2 sin 2 φ (41) where: k= bγ p aγ e −1 a. respectively e2 φ = square of the first ellipsoidal eccentricity = geodetic latitude This form of the normal gravity equation is the WGS 84 Ellipsoidal Gravity Formula. the Earth’s angular velocity (ω) and the Earth’s gravitational constant (GM). the inverse of the flattening (1/f). As noted earlier in the case of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid (Chapter 3). respectively γ e . independent of the density distribution within the ellipsoid..2 Normal Gravity on the Ellipsoidal Surface Theoretical normal gravity (γ). by using any system of four independent constants as the defining parameters of the ellipsoid. An equipotential ellipsoid is simply an ellipsoid defined to be an equipotential surface. a surface on which the value of the gravity potential is the same everywhere. 41 . WGS 84 ELLIPSOIDAL GRAVITY FORMULA 4. This theoretical gravity potential can be uniquely determined. The equipotential ellipsoid not only serves as the reference for horizontal and vertical surfaces. but also serves as the reference surface for the normal gravity of the Earth.
normal gravity above the ellipsoid can be estimated by upward continuing γ at the ellipsoidal surface using a truncated Taylor series expansion: γh = γ + ∂γ 1 ∂ 2γ 2 h+ h ∂h 2 ∂h 2 (42) A frequently used Taylor series expansion for normal gravity above the ellipsoid with a positive direction downward along the geodetic normal to the reference ellipsoid is: 3 2 2 2 γ h = γ 1 − 1 + f + m − 2fsin φ ⋅h + 2 h a a ( ) (43) where: m= ω 2a 2 b GM f = ellipsoidal flattening a = semimajor axis φ = geodetic latitude γ = normal gravity on the ellipsoid at geodetic latitude φ The derivation of Equation (43) can be found in [33]. the gravity unit will be m/s2 which can be converted to milligals (abbreviated mgal) by the conversion factor. an alternate approach based on formulating normal gravity in the ellipsoidal coordinate system (u. This ellipsoid is confocal with the reference ellipsoid and therefore has 2 2 the same linear eccentricity E = a − b . The coordinate u is the semiminor axis of an ellipsoid of revolution whose surface passes through the point P in Figure 4. or for that matter any gravity formula in this Chapter. 1 m/s2 = 105 mgal.β.1. At moderate and high geodetic heights where Equation (43) may yield results with less than desired accuracy.λ) is recommended over the Taylor series method. Its semimajor axis (a′) is given by the radical expression u 2 + E 2 which reduces to the semimajor axis (a) of the reference ellipsoid when 42 . 4.If the MKS (MeterKilogramSecond) unit system is used to evaluate Equation (41).3 Normal Gravity Above the Ellipsoid When the geodetic height (h) is small.
000 meters by using the normal gravity components.u = b. Equation (44) is equivalent to Somigliana’s Equation (41). β) = − 1 GM ω 2 a 2 E q′ 1 1 1 2 2 2 + 2 u 2 + E 2 u + E 2 ⋅ q ⋅ 2 sin β − 6 + w ω ⋅ u ⋅ cos β (45) w o γ β ( u. The β coordinate is known in geodesy as the “reduced latitude” (the definition is seen in Figure 4. On the reference ellipsoidal surface where h = 0. 360°E).1) and λ is the usual geocentric longitude with a value in the open interval [0°E. The radical expression in Equation (44) is the true r magnitude of the total normal gravity vector γ total that is perpendicular to the equipotential surface passing through the point P at geodetic height h. γ β = 0 and u = b.2 between the component γ h and the total normal gravity vector γ total at the point P is small.2 and directed positively downward can be estimated with submicrogal precision to geodetic heights of at least 20. is the basis for using Equation (44) to approximate the component γ h . r The component ( γ h ) of the total normal gravity vector ( γ total ) that is colinear with the geodetic normal line for point P in Figure 4. γ β and γ λ in the ellipsoidal coordinate system: r 2 γ h ≅ γ total = γ 2 + γβ + γ 2 u λ (44) The normal gravity field from the ellipsoidal representation is symmetrical about the rotation axis and therefore γ λ = 0. γ β ) of the normal gravity vector γ total that are needed in Equation (44) are shown in [33] to be functions of the ellipsoidal coordinates (u. even for large geodetic heights.β) shown in Figure 4. β) = where: 1 w ω 2a 2 u2 + E2 ⋅ q 1 sin β cos β − ω 2 u 2 + E 2 sin β cos β qo w (46) E = a2 − b2 2 2 1 4E z u = ( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 − E 2 ) ⋅ 1 + 1 + 2 2 ( x 2 + y2 + z 2 − E 2 ) 12 (47) (48) 43 . r The two ellipsoidal components (γ u .1. These two components can be computed with unlimited numerical accuracy by the closed expressions: γ u ( u. The fact that the angular separation (ε) r in the Inset of Figure 4. γ u .
Then. the spherical components are projected onto the geodetic normal line through point P using the angular difference 44 . γ r and γ ψ . (415) The description of the coordinate system defined by Equations (414) is given in Chapter 2. the ellipsoidal normal gravity components γ u and γ β are rotated to a spherical coordinate system (r. z u 2 + E2 β = arctan u x2 + y2 w= u 2 + E 2 sin 2 β u2 + E2 (49) (410) 1 q= 2 qo = u2 u E 1 + 3 2 arctan − 3 u E E 1 2 b2 b E 1 + 3 2 arctan − 3 b E E (411) (412) u2 u E q ′ = 31 + 2 ⋅ 1 − arctan − 1 u E E (413) The rectangular coordinates (x. ψ .z) required in Equations (48) and (49) can be computed from known geodetic coordinates ( φ .y. λ .λ) resulting in the spherical normal gravity components.2 exactly. To compute the component γ h at point P in Figure 4.2 that is being treated as negligible in Equation (44)).h) through the equations: x = ( N + h ) cos φ cos λ y = (N + h ) cos φ sin λ z = b 2 a 2 ⋅ N + h sin φ where the radius of curvature in the prime vertical (N) is defined by the equation: N= (414) (( ) ) (1 − e a 2 sin 2 φ ) 12 . (account for the angle ε in Figure 4.
γ E and γ S in Equation (4The 17) is zero since the normal gravity potential is not a function of longitude λ . The equations to calculate the exact value of γ h at point P follow: γ h = − γ r cos(α ) − γ ψ sin (α ) (416) where from [33]: r γE r γR r γS γ u γ x γr r r r r r r γ R = R1⋅ γ E γ S = R 2 ⋅γ R →γ y →γ ψ ⇒ γ S = R 2R 1 ⋅ γ E γ β γ Ellipsoida γ Rectangula γ Spherical l r λ z λ System System System (417) u cos β cos λ 2 2 w u + E u R1 = cos β sin λ w u 2 + E2 1 sin β w 1 sin β cos λ − sin λ w 1 − sin β sin λ cos λ w u cos β 0 2 2 w u +E − (418) cos ψ cos λ R 2 = − sin ψ cos λ − sin λ α =φ−ψ.( α = φ − ψ ) between geodetic (φ) and geocentric ( ψ ) latitudes. sin ψ − sin ψ sin λ cos ψ cos λ 0 cos ψ sin λ (419) (420) r r γ λ component in the two normal gravity vectors. The definitions for the other two relevant angles depicted in the Inset of Figure 4.2 are: ε =θ−α (421) (422) γψ θ = arctan γ r such that π/2 ≤ θ ≤ π/2. 45 .
Because the difference in results between Equations (44) and (416) is less than one µgal (106 gal) for geodetic heights to 20. Numerical results have indicated that the angular separation (ε) between the component r γ h and the total normal gravity vector γ total satisfies the inequality ε < 4 arcseconds for geodetic heights up to 20. Of course. when the intended application for γ h requires high accuracy.000 meters. Numerical testing with whole degree latitudes showed that the magnitude of γ φ remains less than 0. For geodetic height h = 0. the angles α and θ are equal and ε = 0.000 meters.and βvector components of normal gravitation can be computed easily in the ellipsoidal coordinate system by omitting the last term in Equations (45) and (46) respectively. they have the same sign as the geodetic latitude for point P.000 meters. ε. For positive h. the Taylor series expansion Equation (43) for γ h should suffice. θ ) are applicable to both the northern and southern hemispheres.002% of the value of γ h for geodetic heights up to 20. the u.000 meters. But. Equation (44) will be a close approximation to the exact Equation (416) for geodetic heights up to 20. 46 . γ h can be computed using the exact Equation (416) but this requires that the computational procedure include the two transformations.2 that is orthogonal to γ h and lies in the meridian plane for point P is given by the expression: γ φ = −γ r sin (α ) + γ ψ cos(α ) (423) The component γ φ has a positive sense northward. Elsewhere for h > 0. r Equations (416) and (423) provide an alternative way to compute the magnitude γ total of the total normal gravity vector through the equation: r γ total = γ 2 + γ 2 h φ (424) In summary then. These last attraction terms account for the centrifugal force due to the angular velocity ω of the reference ellipsoid.The equations listed here for the angles ( α. For applications requiring pure attraction (attraction without centrifugal force) due to the normal gravitational potential V. For completeness the component (γ φ ) of the total r normal gravity vector γ total at point P in Figure 4. the γ φ component is zero. for nearsurface geodetic heights when submicrogal precision is not necessary. that are shown in Equation (417). each of these angles is zero when point P is directly above one of the poles or lies in the equatorial plane. R1 and R2 . For h = 0. the transformation approach would probably be unnecessary in most situations.
β) 47 .z Confocal Ellipsoid Through Point P b'=u=semiminor axis a'=(u2+E2)1/2 =semimajor axis Sphere of Radius r=a' Geo det ic Nor mal Reference Ellipsoidal Surface S o b=semiminor axis a=semimajor axis r So b'=u . Ε=Focal Length =(a2b2)1/2 b β Ε F1 . h φ F2 a P(x.z) PO .y.1 Ellipsoidal Coordinates(u. xyplane a' Figure 4.
2 Normal Gravity Component γh 48 .Me ridia nP lane P P(φ. λ .h) θ ε γφ γψ γh Z Pole Refere γr α γh h nce γtotal Inset Rotation Axis Ge oce ntri cR adi us Geo detic Nor mal Ellip soid al S urf ac Po e zp Origin ψ λ φ xp Y(90 o East) yp torial Equa e Plan X(0 o East) Figure 4.
Gravity anomaly degree variances are given in Table 5.1 Earth Gravitational Model (EGM96) The form of the WGS 84 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model is a spherical harmonic expansion (Table 5. Tracking and Data Relay Satellite System (TDRSS) and GPS techniques in the development of EGM96S (the satellite only model of EGM96 to degree and order 70). TOPEX and GPSMET along with GEOS1 and GEOSAT. its error data and associated software should forward their correspondence to the address listed in the PREFACE. The GSFC effort consisted of satellite orbit modeling by tracking over 30 satellites including new satellites tracked by Satellite Laser Ranging (SLR). DoD programs performing satellite orbit determination are advised to determine the maximum degree and order that is most appropriate for their particular mission and orbit accuracy requirements. is comprised of 130. Requesters having a need for the full WGS 84 EGM96. ERS1 and GEOSAT) with EGM96S and surface gravity normal equations. Ajisai. An Earth orbiting satellite’s sensitivity to the geopotential is strongly influenced by the satellite’s altitude range and other orbital parameters.5.317 coefficients. 51 . Lageos2. NASA/GSFC satellite tracking data and DoD tracking data in its development.1 in normalized form. complete through degree (n) and order (m) 360. Starlette. GSFC developed the high degree EGM96 solution by blending the combination solution to degree and order 70 with a block diagonal solution from degree and order 71 to 359 and a quadrature solution at degree and order 360.2 for the WGS 84 EGM96 (degree and order 360). The WGS 84 EGM96. The NIMA effort consisted of developing worldwide 30′ and 1° mean gravity anomaly databases from its Point Gravity Anomaly file and 5′ x 5′ mean GEOSAT Geodetic Mission geoid height file using leastsquares collocation with the Forsberg Covariance Model [32] to estimate the final 30′ x 30′ mean gravity anomaly directly with an associated accuracy. WGS 84 EGM96 GRAVITATIONAL MODELING 5. The development of the combination model to 70 x 70 incorporated direct satellite altimetry (TOPEX/POSEIDON. Finally. Coefficient sigmas are available to degree and order 360. An error covariance matrix is available for those coefficients through degree and order 70 determined from the weighted least squares combination solution. EGM96 was a joint effort that required NIMA gravity data. A complete description of EGM96 can be found in [41]. The EGM96 through degree and order 70 is recommended for high accuracy satellite orbit determination and prediction purposes. Stella.1) of the gravitational potential (V). The WGS 84 EGM96 coefficients through degree and order 18 are provided in Table 5. Major additions to the satellite tracking data used by GSFC included new observations of Lageos.
2 Gravity Potential (W) The Earth’s total gravity potential (W) is defined as: W=V+Φ (51) where Φ is the potential due to the Earth’s rotation. respectively = Geocentric latitude λ = Geocentric longitude = geodetic longitude C nm . The gravitational potential function (V) is defined as: V= where: GM r 1 + n max n a P sin φ ′ C cos m λ + S sin m λ nm ( ) nm ∑2 m = 0 r ∑ nm n= n ( ) (53) V GM r a n. then: 1 Φ = 2 ω2(x2 + y2) (52) where x and y are the geocentric coordinates of a given point in the WGS 84 reference frame (See Figure 2.5.1). If ω is the angular velocity (Equation (36)). S nm = Normalized gravitational coefficients 52 .m φ′ = Gravitational potential function (m2 /s2 ) = Earth’s gravitational constant = Distance from the Earth’s center of mass = Semimajor axis of the WGS 84 Ellipsoid = Degree and order.
e. m ≠ 0. k = 1.Pnm (sin φ ′) = Normalized associated Legendre function ( n − m ) !( 2n + 1) k = ( n + m) ! 1/ 2 Pnm (sin φ ′ ) Pnm(sin φ′) = Associated Legendre function = (cos φ ′) m dm d (sin φ ′ ) m [P (sin φ ′ )] n Pn (sin φ ′) = Legendre polynomial = Note: C nm Snm ( n + m) ! = ( n − m ) !( 2n + 1) k 1/ 2 1 dn n 2 sin φ ′ − 1) n n ( 2 n! d( sinφ ′) C nm Snm where: C nm . But the series should not be used for r < Earth’s surface. k = 2 The series is theoretically valid for r ≥ a. Snm = Conventional gravitational coefficients For m = 0. 53 . though it can be used with probably negligible error near or on the Earth’s surface. r ≥ Earth’s surface.. i.
119528012031E08 .174971983203E 06 .350694105785E 06 .721072657057E 06 .621012128528E 07 .990771803829E 06 .Table 5.954336911867E07 .140016683654E05 .685323475630E 07 .902694517163E08 .571730990516E 07 .904627768605E 06 .619025944205E06 .308853169333E06 .202998882184E 05 .177377719872E07 .496658876769E07 .243914352398E 05 .149957994714E 06 .151789817739E06 E03=X10 3.652438297612E 06 . E05=X105.669384278219E06 .358856860645E 06 . etc.481732442832E 07 .484165371736E 03 .536321616971E 06 .944226127525E07 .536488432483E06 .267133325490E 06 .760879384947E 07 .323349612668E06 .200928369177E06 .957254173792E 06 .539873863789E 06 .471408154267E06 .188560802735E 06 .186987635955E 09 .967616121092E 08 .295301647654E 06 . 54 .217198608738E06 .237192006935E06 .262890545501E07 .1 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model Truncated at n=m=18 Degree and Order n m 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Normalized Gravitational Coefficients Cnm Snm .329743816488E 06 .473440265853E06 .909789371450E 07 .279872910488E 06 .214847190624E06 .451955406071E 06 .862142660109E 07 .930667596042E07 .193765507243E 08 .662671572540E06 .123800392323E06 .141435626958E05 .373728201347E06 .250398657706E 06 .275114355257E 06 .248513158716E06 .
795667053872E07 .188436022794E 06 . etc.222903525945E06 .689895048176E 08 .541113191483E07 .124092493016E 06 .194666779475E07 .835115775652E 07 .863454445021E07 .240148449520E07 E03=X10 3.515791657390E07 .505370221897E07 .626941938248E 07 .496711667324E 07 .376516222392E07 .160811502143E 06 .166165092924E 07 .255352403037E 07 .308566220421E08 .590060493411E07 .509613707522E 07 .100538634409E 06 .244415707993E07 .1 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model Truncated at n=m=18 Degree and Order n m 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 Normalized Gravitational Coefficients Cnm Snm .222288318564E 07 .700233016934E07 .375885236598E 07 .118366323475E 06 .216834947618E07 .792806255331E07 .672811580072E 07 .143387502749E 06 .322196647116E07 .276714300853E 07 .654175425859E07 .493395938185E 07 .526222488569E 07 .657361610961E 07 . E05=X105. 55 .840764549716E 07 .244600105471E 06 .747440473633E07 .Table 5.900179225336E 08 .109185148045E 08 .918705975922E07 .404927981694E 07 .811460540925E 08 .891462164788E07 .191877757009E 07 .802978722615E 07 .309238461807E06 .125491334939E 06 .336629641314E08 .233422047893E 07 .742287409462E07 .477475386132E 07 .153768828694E06 .965152667886E07 .131314331796E06 .966412847714E07 .120533165603E06 .942413882081E 07 .
617619654902E 08 .142979642253E 07 .309871239854E 07 .494736238169E07 .308375794212E07 .169361024629E07 .186909958587E 07 .389580205051E 07 .252692598301E07 .1 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model Truncated at n=m=18 Degree and Order n m 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Normalized Gravitational Coefficients Cnm Snm .898252808977E07 .377848029452E 07 .460344448746E 07 .422880630662E 07 .341523275208E 08 .186309749878E 07 .390510386685E07 .435675748979E07 .391765484449E07 .664975958036E07 .253769398865E 07 .415081109011E08 .637946501558E08 .377252636558E 07 .513569699124E 07 .782536279033E08 .393995876403E 07 .119627874492E07 .148131804260E06 .521882681927E 07 . etc.974829362237E07 .183364561788E07 .590049394905E 07 .411565188074E –08 .417731829829E07 .696662308185E07 .151687209933E 07 .Table 5.621470822331E08 E03=X10 3.356131849382E07 .990693862047E07 .422982206413E 07 .320975937619E07 .244264863505E07 .268604146166E07 .627337565381E07 .309411128730E 07 .636666511980E07 .314231072723E 07 .253002147087E 08 .657280613686E08 .313762599666E 08 .219360927945E 07 .249532607390E 08 .112502994122E 07 .559217667099E 07 . 56 .598410841300E 08 .344769584593E07 . E05=X105.243989612237E07 .111780601900E07 .540654977836E 07 .118676592395E 08 .359038073075E 07 .686908127934E 07 .
1 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model Truncated at n=m=18 Degree and Order n m 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 8 9 10 11 12 13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Normalized Gravitational Coefficients Cnm Snm .368246004304E07 .242786502921E 07 .312622200222E 07 .417291319429E08 .104688722521E 07 .247831272781E08 .375003839415E 07 .100817268177E 07 .163882249728E07 .247325771791E 07 .358875097333E 07 .476507804288E08 .147910068708E 08 .204618827833E07 .226780613566E07 .685261488594E07 .983150822695E 08 . E05=X105. 57 .367789379502E 07 .183865617792E 08 .452870369936E07 .221523579587E07 .104740222825E07 .213942673775E 07 .172892926103E07 .109773066324E07 .443869677399E 07 .368121029480E07 .186968616381E 07 .516779392055E08 .320284939341E 07 .147222147015E07 E03=X10 3.144308452469E08 .650174707794E08 .288804922064E07 .153515265203E07 . etc.294747542249E07 .308914875777E07 .531841171879E08 .451897224960E07 .Table 5.350946485865E 07 .521392929041E 07 .390548173245E07 .878405809267E07 .287344273542E 07 .518980794309E 07 .481506636748E08 .596210699259E 07 .331211643896E 07 .840829163869E 08 .124935723108E 07 .322147043964E 07 .311327189117E07 .390329180008E 07 .194810485574E 07 .153970516502E 07 .410324653930E 07 .808375563996E08 .612759553199E 07 .322428691498E 07 .128788268085E 07 .408150084078E 07 .375629820829E07 .
111675061934E 08 .155243104746E07 .288799363439E07 .302155372655E08 .666983574071E08 .649265893410E08 . 58 .180996198432E07 .402316284314E 07 .283933019117E 07 .197605066395E 07 .258360856231E 07 .315322986722E 08 .336019429391E 07 .209018868094E 07 .249437600834E07 .195400194038E 07 .358904095943E08 .254177575118E 07 .117529900814E 07 .388442097559E 07 .195988656721E 07 .187574042592E 07 .323962134415E 07 .118194012847E 07 .242149702381E 07 .114211582961E07 .Table 5. etc.881581561131E08 .350760208303E07 .500527390530E08 .233671404512E 07 .193182168856E 07 .422222973697E08 . E05=X105.381356493231E 08 .325447560859E07 .140239252323E 07 .281466943714E07 E03=X10 3.1 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model Truncated at n=m=18 Degree and Order n m 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Normalized Gravitational Coefficients Cnm Snm .303161919925E08 .154987006052E 07 .519168859330E 08 .289770975177E07 .327443078739E07 .129501939245E 07 .138196369576E 07 .471139421558E08 .379671710746E 07 .483837716909E07 .190930538322E 07 .306630529689E07 .386174893776E07 .319458578129E08 .707457075637E 08 .102778499508E08 .218588720643E 07 .708412635136E 08 .678327095529E08 .422066791103E08 .220418988010E07 .660021551851E08 .145149060142E 07 .564123066224E 08 .395012419994E07 .243752739666E07 .
100093396253E07 .507232520873E 08 .1 EGM96 Earth Gravitational Model Truncated at n=m=18 Degree and Order n m 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Normalized Gravitational Coefficients Cnm Snm .348383939938E07 . E05=X105.368302736953E07 .417827734107E08 .721098449649E 08 .106560649404E07 .301992205043E 07 .343086856041E 07 .490865931335E08 .104141042028E 07 .527535358934E 08 .188470601880E 07 .136438019951E07 . 59 .288013010655E 07 .307619845144E 07 . etc.542100361657E 08 .508691038332E 08 .109906032543E07 E03=X10 3.388216085542E 08 .365331918531E08 .548759308217E 07 .405003412879E 07 .202684998021E07 .466091535881E08 .195215208020E08 .157356600363E 07 .164497878395E07 .729628518960E 08 .181328176508E07 .141983872649E 07 .135267117720E08 .204667531435E07 .128636585027E07 .688577494235E08 .388714473013E07 .548710485555E 08 .532610369811E08 .815605336410E 08 .198523455381E07 .165503425731E 07 .627919717152E 08 .Table 5.264338629459E07 .661468817624E08 .114948025244E07 .140631771205E 07 .312351953717E 08 .358771586841E 08 .675812328417E 08 .448065587564E08 .203450136084E07 .297449412422E 07 .146570755271E 07 .
4 Degree 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Degree Variance 2.3 2.9 2.8 3.6 33.7 3.9 Degree 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 Degree Variance 3.6 11.9 3.0 3.9 2.6 2.7 3.0 3.4 1.1 3.0 3.2 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.8 3.7 3.4 3.7 2.2 2.1 3.8 21.2 3.6 3.4 2.0 3.9 19.8 2.0 4.0 2.5 3.3 2.2 3.4 2.8 3.9 3.8 2.4 2.0 2.0 3.6 3.5 Degree 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 Degree Variance 2.2 11.1 3.8 2.1 3.1 2.8 2.7 3.7 4.8 3.9 2.2 2.2 3.7 3.7 19.3 3.4 2.3 3.5 3.5 2.4 3.6 3.1 3.2 3.7 2.4 3.0 19.5 4.2 2.2 9.7 7.1 2.3 2.4 2.1 2.7 3.2 3.5 2.8 3.7 2.8 2.0 3.4 3.Table 5.1 3.3 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.0 3.6 3.8 3.1 2.4 3.3 2.9 3.8 2.7 2.7 3.0 3.7 2.0 3.4 2.8 3.8 2.0 3.9 2.2 2.2 EGM96 Gravity Anomaly Degree Variances Degree 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Degree Variance 7.8 3.6 2.2 2.5 3.5 2.9 2.0 3.9 3.7 2.7 3.3 Units = (1 x 105 m/second2 )2 or mgal2 510 .0 2.8 6.0 2.9 3.2 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.9 2.2 3.1 4.
1 1.3 1.9 1.0 1.6 1.9 .6 .3 1.9 Degree 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 Degree Variance .1 1.2 1.1 1.Table 5.0 1.6 1.7 2.9 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.1 .5 1.1 1.1 1.9 2.9 2.3 1.2 1.0 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.3 2.0 1.5 1.0 2.6 1.1 1.1 2.2 1.7 1.1 Degree 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 Degree Variance 1.2 1.1 1.0 2.7 2.9 .1 1.7 .7 .0 2.4 2.7 .4 1.6 .5 1.8 .2 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.1 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.7 .0 1.6 .4 1.7 .1 1.3 1.9 .2 1.7 .3 1.3 1.5 1.8 .1 2.1 1.7 .7 .6 .6 1.9 Degree 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 Degree Variance 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.6 .0 .0 1.8 .0 2.5 Units = (1 x 105 m/second2 )2 or mgal2 511 .3 1.8 .1 1.0 1.4 1.3 1.8 .2 EGM96 Gravity Anomaly Degree Variances Degree 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 Degree Variance 2.3 1.9 .9 .9 .9 1.5 1.3 1.0 1.7 .1 1.7 .9 .7 .8 .5 1.9 .7 2.6 .9 2.0 1.9 .8 1.8 2.0 1.7 .9 1.8 .0 1.6 2.1 1.6 .0 1.8 2.0 1.9 2.
4 .4 .3 .3 .3 .4 .3 .3 .5 .3 .3 .32222 mgal).6 .3 The formula for computing gravity anomaly degree variances (cn) is: c n = γ (n −1) 2 2 m =0 ∑ (C n 2 nm + Sn2m ) γ = Mean value of theoretical gravity (979764.3 . C nm .4 .5 .3 .4 .5 .4 .4 .4 .6 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .4 .5 .5 .6 . Units = (1 x 105 m/second2 )2 or mgal2 512 .5 .4 .4 .3 . Sn m = normalized gravitational coefficients of degree (n) and order (m).3 .5 .4 .5 Degree 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 Degree Variance .5 .5 .4 .5 .3 .4 .6 .5 .5 .3 .4 .3 .6 .3 .4 .3 .4 .4 .3 .3 .2 EGM96 Gravity Anomaly Degree Variances Degree 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 Degree Variance .5 .Table 5.4 .3 .3 .5 .3 .6 .5 .3 .3 .6 .4 .6 .3 .4 .4 .4 Degree 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 Degree Variance .3 .5 .6 .5 .4 .4 .5 .3 Degree 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 Degree Variance .4 .5 .
Units = (1 x 105 m/second2 )2 or mgal2 .
This page is intentionally blank 514 .
Z) = constant (61) Traditionally. is constrained or assumed to be equal to the normal potential (U0) of a ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid. With this approach. an approximation of mean sea level heights. In common practice the geoid is expressed at a given point in terms of the distance above (+N) or below (N) the ellipsoid. For practical reasons. the WGS 84 Ellipsoid can be retained with no introduction of any additional errors by not using the ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid. W(X.54 m. When the gravity potential (W) is a constant. the constant (W). WGS 84 EGM96 GEOID 6. the geoid has been used to serve as a vertical reference surface for mean sea level (MSL) heights. The geoid is that particular geop that is closely associated with the mean ocean surface. 2) the geometric surface taken to be an ellipsoid of revolution and 3) the geoid. when a geoid is developed. In areas where elevation data are not available from conventional leveling. representing the potential anywhere on this surface.Y. some countries replace orthometric heights with normal heights and geoid undulations with height anomalies.1 General In geodetic applications three primary reference surfaces for the Earth are used: 1) the Earth’s topographic surface. the authors recognize that the WGS 84 Ellipsoid no longer represents a true ‘bestfitting’ ellipsoid. Equation (61) defines a family of equipotential surfaces (geops) [33] of the Earth’s gravity field. using orthometric heights. This use of height anomalies eliminates assumptions 61 (62) (63) . Throughout this refinement effort. In terms of the geoid.6. this effect is handled through application of a ‘zeroorder’ undulation (N0) of the geoid. however. can be obtained from the following equation [33]: h=H+N H=hN where: h = geodetic height (height relative to the ellipsoid) N = geoid undulation H = orthometric height (height relative to the geoid) Alternatively. The difference between the WGS 84 semimajor axis and the current ‘bestfitting’ value is 0.
Therefore. Representations and Analysis (64) A significant departure from past practices has been implemented in the determination of geoid undulations. The value of 0.25765. The ‘ideal’ Earth ellipsoid. 6.2 Formulas. r ) = GM m a n n ∑ ∑ Cnm cosmλ + Snm sin mλ Pnm( sin φ) γ( φ)r n = 2 r m = 0 () ( ) (65) 62 . the zero degree undulation term of 0.53 meters is based on the difference between an ‘ideal’ Earth ellipsoid in a tidefree system and the WGS 84 Ellipsoid.53 meters and the WGS 84 EGM96 correction coefficients through degree and order 360 are applied [34]. To transform from height anomalies to geoid undulations.g. in a tidefree system.1 Formulas The formula for calculating the WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations starts with the calculation of the height anomaly ζ [34]: ζ( φ.46 meters and 1/f = 298. Equation (63) illustrates the use of geoid undulations in the determination of orthometric heights (H) from geodetic heights (h) derived using satellite positions (e.. Global Positioning System) located on the Earth’s physical surface or aboard a vehicle operating near the Earth’s surface. Equation (62) can be reformulated as: h = H + N = H* + ζ where: H* = normal height ζ = height anomaly The telluroid is a surface defined where the normal potential U at every point Q is equal to the actual potential W at its corresponding point P on the Earth’s surface [33].about the density of masses between the geoid and the ground. 6.2. is defined by a = 6378136. The WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations are based on height anomalies calculated from the WGS 84 EGM96 spherical harmonic coefficients complete to degree and order 360. The ‘ideal’ ellipsoid was defined from the report of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG) Special Commission on Fundamental Constants [23]. The height anomaly is the distance between point Q on the telluroid and point P on the Earth’s surface. λ.
λ) = N 0 + ζ (φ.0(geomet ric) C8.0(geomet ric) Table 6.r) on or above the surface of the earth: GM = The Earth’s gravitational constant r = Geocentric distance to the point P a = Semimajor axis of the reference ellipsoid φ = Geocentric latitude All quantities in Equation (65) are defined for the WGS 84 EGM96 with one exception.0(geome tric) 0.168724961151E08 0. λ ) H (φ. λ) γ (66) N 0 = 0.265002225747E14 To calculate the geoid undulation N (in meters) we use the formula [41]: N(φ. Equation (65) is evaluated at a point P(φ.790303733511E06 0.484166774985E03 0.0(geomet ric) C10.1 Geometric Coefficients C2. In Equation (65). the even zonal coefficients of subscripts 2 through 10 are coefficient differences between the dynamic WGS84 EGM96 and geometrically implied coefficients.2 above are: ∆g BA (φ .0(geomet ric) C4.0 = Cn. λ ) = Bouguer gravity anomaly from EGM96 63 .0(geomet ric) C6.346052468394E11 0.53 meters (zero degree term) and the parameters to compute the correction term discussed in Section 6. λ. Cn.0(dynami c) − Cn.where Cnm and Snm are the fully normalized potential coefficients of degree n and order m from EGM96. r ) + where: ∆g BA (φ.λ.
To calculate the geoid in the zerotide system use the formula: N Z = N n + 2. The tidefree definition means that any geoid undulations calculated from EGM96 exist for a tidefree Earth with all (direct and indirect) effects of the sun and moon removed.1 is a worldwide WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulation Contour Chart developed from 64 .2 Permanent Tide Systems (67) In the calculation of geoid undulations from the EGM96 Geopotential Model. λ ) = Freeair gravity anomaly from EGM96 6. A complete set of equations to convert from one tide system to another can be found in [35]. Other geoids to consider are the mean geoid (geoid which would exist in the presence of the sun and moon) and the zero geoid (geoid which exists if the permanent direct effects of the sun and moon are removed but the indirect effect related to the Earth’s elastic deformation is retained). where: N Z = zerotide geoid (68) N n = tidefree geoid 6.2. JGP95E is the worldwide 5′ digital elevation file developed by NIMA and NASA/GSFC from best available sources for the EGM96 project.97 − 888 sin 2 φ cm . λ ) − 0. Figure 6. λ ) = defined from harmonic analysis of JGP95E (Joint Gravity Project 95) elevation database The Bouguer anomaly can be computed from the EGM96 spherical harmonic set and the harmonic analysis of the JGP95E elevation database.2.γ = Average value of normal gravity H( φ.3 Representations and Analysis The geoid undulations can be depicted as a contour chart which shows the deviations of the geoid from the ellipsoid selected as the mathematical figure of the Earth. λ ) where: ∆g FA ( φ. ∆g BA (φ.1119 × H( φ. the second degree zonal coefficient is given in the tidefree system. λ) = ∆g FA ( φ.
.
25° S. 66 .99 meters 85.5 to ±1.a worldwide 15′ x 15′ grid of geoid undulations calculated by using WGS 84 parameters and the WGS 84 EGM96 coefficients through n=m=360 in Equation (66). The WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations have an error range of ±0. λ = 78.25° E This standard deviation indicates the typical difference between the geoid and the reference ellipsoid. exhibit the following statistics: Mean Standard Deviation Minimum Maximum = = = = 0. λ = 147. taken worldwide on the basis of a 15′ x 15′ grid.56 meters 106.3 Availability of WGS 84 EGM96 Data Products The WGS 84 EGM96 standard products are: • • A 15′ x 15′ WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulation file calculated from Equation (66) The EGM96 spherical harmonic coefficients complete to degree and order 360 Additional information on the WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations. 6.75° N.57 meters 30.0 meters (one sigma) worldwide. The WGS 84 EGM96 Geoid Undulations.39 meters The locations of the minimum and maximum undulations are: Minimum: φ = 4. associated software and data files can be obtained from the location and addresses in the PREFACE.75° E Maximum: φ = 8.
A geocentric datum of large geographic extent is the North American Datum 1983 (NAD 83). a means to convert between geodetic datums is required. Direct occupation of the site is not always possible or warranted. exceeds several hundred. WGS 84 RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER GEODETIC SYSTEMS 7. The differences between WGS 84 and ITRF are in the centimeter range worldwide. Mexico. counting island and astronomicbased datums. To accomplish the conversion. An example of such a datum is the European Terrestrial Reference Frame 1989 (EUREF89). Local horizontal datums were developed in the past to satisfy mapping and navigation requirements for specific regions of the Earth. Such national or regional datums that are rigorously based on the ITRF can also be considered as identical to WGS 84. used and implemented worldwide.2 Relationship of WGS 84 to the ITRF As discussed in Chapter 2. Satellite stations positioned within WGS 84. were the basic ingredients in the development of local geodetic datum to WGS 84 datum shifts. The most accurate approach for obtaining WGS 84 coordinates is to acquire satellite tracking data at the site of interest and position it directly in WGS 84 using GPS positioning techniques. for all mapping and charting purposes.3 Relationship of WGS 84 to the NAD 83 The North American Datum 1983 (NAD 83) is a geocentric datum that was established in 1986 for the United States.7. In these cases. Therefore. development of global geocentric datums has become possible. the number of local horizontal datums in current use is significantly less and continues to decrease. In recent years. the WGS 84 is consistent with the ITRF. In the past couple of decades. WGS 84 and the ITRF are examples of such datums. It is based on 71 . Hawaii and Greenland were also connected to this datum. a datum transformation can be used to convert coordinates from the local system to WGS 84. they can be considered the same.1 General One of the principal purposes of a world geodetic system is to eliminate the use of local horizontal geodetic datums. Canada. Although the number of local horizontal geodetic datums. 7. with known local geodetic datum coordinates. local geodetic datum and WGS coordinates are both required at one or more sites within the local datum area so that a local geodetic datum to WGS datum shift can be computed. Central America and the Caribbean Islands. 7. Until a global geodetic datum is accepted. some countries and regions have been converting to datums based on the ITRF.
The difference between the GRS 80 and WGS 84 values for f creates a difference of 0. Based on these definitions. C 2. For example. NAD 83 uses the Geodetic Reference System 1980 (GRS 80) ellipsoid as its reference ellipsoid with the geometric center of the ellipsoid coincident with the center of mass of the Earth and the origin of the coordinate system.) for scales less than 1:20. WGS 84 has undergone several enhancements since its original definition.000. 0 was derived from the GRS 80 value for J2 and truncated to 8 significant digits as: C 2.2 m at 1:5.257222101 The WGS 84 Ellipsoid is for all practical purposes identical to the GRS 80 ellipsoid.51 mm (1/50 in. charting and navigation. For mapping. The orientation of the ECEF coordinate axes of the NAD 83 reference frame is identical to that of the original WGS 84 reference frame. Note that the National Map Accuracy Standard requires test points to be horizontally accurate to 0. They use the same value for the semimajor axis and have the same orientation with respect to the center of mass and the coordinate system origin. this corresponds to 4.000 or smaller and with accuracies of about 2 m.000 and 25 m at 1:50. 0 = J2/(5) 1/2 (71) The resulting WGS 84 value for 1/f is 298. The practical realization of the reference frame is determined by a network of permanent GPS tracking stations which are aligned with the ITRF. WGS 84 uses a derived value for the flattening that is computed from the normalized second degree zonal harmonic gravitational coefficient C 2. The semimajor axis and flattening parameters are adopted directly as a = 6378137 m 1/f = 298. the successor to the BIH Terrestrial 72 .257223563.1 mm in the derived semiminor axes of the two ellipsoids.85 mm (1/30 in. The global Doppler and VLBI observations were used to orient the NAD 83 reference frame to the BIH Terrestrial System of 1984.) for scales of 1:20. the two systems are indistinguishable at scales of 1:5. 0 .a horizontal adjustment of conventional survey data and the inclusion of Transit Satellite Doppler data and Very Long Baseline Interferometry (VLBI) data. one can expect to see a difference of a meter or more between the WGS 84 and NAD 83 positions of the same point. This is due to the uncertainty associated with each independent determination and the fact that the errors are additive when comparing the difference in the coordinates.000.000 or larger and 0. For geodetic applications. However. geodetic positions determined with respect to NAD 83 or WGS 84 have uncertainties of about one meter in each component.
System. Thus. navigation and geospatial information.3 to 0. coordinates determined in one system will differ from coordinates determined in the other system for a specific point. These enhancements have had no effect on mapping.∆X sin φ cos λ . using GPS techniques. charts. There can be differences of 0. The new networks have relative accuracies 12 orders of magnitude better than the original networks that define NAD 83.S. The improved WGS 84 reference frame is coincident with the ITRF at the 5 cm level. This transformation can be performed in curvilinear (geodetic) coordinates: φ WGS 84 = φ Local + ∆φ λWGS 84 = λLocal + ∆λ hWGS 84 = hLocal + ∆h where ∆φ. WGS 84 coordinates will be obtained from a Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation. ∆λ. HARNs in effect represent an upgrading of the original NAD 83 geodetic control networks.∆Y sin φ sin λ + ∆Z cos φ + ∆a (RN e2 sin φ cos φ)/a + ∆f [RM (a/b)+ RN (b/a)] sin φ cos φ} • [(RM+ h) sin 1″] ∆λ″ = [. These differences may be on the order of one meter or less and are due to systematic differences of the reference frames combined with random errors associated with the GPS observations.8 m between the original NAD 83 coordinates and the new ones. the NOAA’s National Geodetic Survey has established High Accuracy Reference Networks (HARNs) in many states in the U. through a globally distributed set of stations with very high accuracy ITRF coordinates. Meanwhile. charting and navigation applications since they are at the meter level or smaller. Each state’s HARN is adjusted separately but is tied to a national network of the highest accuracy points. [37]: ∆φ″ = {. ∆h are provided by the Standard Molodensky transformation formulas [36].4 Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformations For most applications and DoD operations involving maps. 7.∆X sin λ + ∆Y cos λ] • [(RN + h) cos φ sin 1″] and 73 1 1 (72) . WGS 84 geodetic positions can be determined with uncertainties at the 2550 cm level or better in a component depending upon the technique. although both NAD 83 and WGS 84 have undergone improvements in accuracy and precision.
the units of ∆h are meters (m) ‘ NOTE: AS “h’s” ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS. h values. λ. ∆X.f 74 .∆h = ∆X cos φ cos λ + ∆Y cos φ sin λ + ∆Z sin φ . Z values a = semimajor axis of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid b = semiminor axis of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid b/a = 1 . THE ∆h CORRECTION WILL NOT BE APPLICABLE WHEN TRANSFORMING TO WGS 84. The angle between the plane of the geodetic equator and the ellipsoidal normal at a point (measured positive north from the geodetic equator. The units of ∆φ and ∆λ are arc seconds (″). ∆h = corrections to transform local geodetic datum coordinates to WGS 84 φ. positive from 0° to 180° E and negative from 0° to 180° W) h=N+H where: h = geodetic height (height relative to the ellipsoid) N = geoid height H = orthometric height (height relative to the geoid) ∆φ. λ. corrections to transform local geodetic systemrelated rectangular coordinates (X. ∆Y. Y. ∆Z = shifts between centers of the local geodetic datum and WGS 84 Ellipsoid. negative south) λ = geodetic longitude. Y. The angle between the plane of the Zero Meridian and the plane of the geodetic meridian of the point (measured in the plane of the geodetic equator.∆a (a/RN ) + ∆f (b/a) RN sin2 φ where: φ. Z) to WGS 84related X. ∆λ. h = geodetic coordinates (old ellipsoid) φ = geodetic latitude.
75 . Updates to the datum transformation parameters are identified through the use of cycle numbers and issue dates. Datum transformation shifts derived from nonsatellite information are listed in Appendix C. Cycle numbers have been set to the numerical value of zero for all datum transformations appearing in the August 1993 Insert 1 and the WGS 84 TR8350. respectively (WGS 84 minus Local) e = first eccentricity e2 = 2f – f 2 RN = radius of curvature in the prime vertical RN = a/(l. use of mean datum shifts (∆X. Appendix A lists the reference ellipsoid names and parameters (semimajor axis and flattening) for local datums currently tied to WGS 84 and used for generating datum transformations.e2 sin2 φ)3/2 NOTE: All ∆quantities are formed by subtracting local geodetic datum ellipsoid values from WGS 84 Ellipsoid values. Improved fit between the local datum and WGS 84 may result only with better and more dense ties with local or regional control points. ∆Y. ∆Z) in the Standard Molodensky datum transformation formulas may produce results with poor quality of “fit”.e2 sin2 φ)1/2 RM = radius of curvature in the meridian RM = a(l.e2 )/(l. All new datum transformations will carry a cycle number of zero. ∆f = differences between the semimajor axis and flattening of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid and the WGS 84 Ellipsoid.2 Second Edition. As updates are made the cycle number will increment by one. Due to the errors and distortion that affect most local geodetic datums. Appendix B contains horizontal transformation parameters for the geodetic datums/systems which have been generated from satellite ties to the local geodetic control.f = flattening of the local geodetic datum ellipsoid ∆a.
the general form of the Multiple Regression Equation is (also see [38]): ∆φ = A0 + A1 U + A2 V + A3 U2 + A4 UV + A5 V2 +.. λm = midlatitude and midlongitude values.. λ = local geodetic latitude and local geodetic longitude (in degrees). An n = coefficients determined in the development U = k (φ − φ m) = normalized geodetic latitude of the computation point V = k (λ − λm) = normalized geodetic longitude of the computation point k = scale factor and degreetoradian conversion φ. ∆Z). The main advantage of MREs lies in modeling of distortion for better fit in geodetic applications. respectively. are provided in Appendix D... Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations for seven major continental size datums. covering contiguous continental size land areas with large distortion. 7.+ A99 U9 V9 where: A0 = constant A0.. of the local geodetic datum area (in degrees) Similar equations are obtained for ∆λ and ∆h by replacing ∆φ in the left portion of Equation (73) by ∆λ and ∆h. However.6 WGS 72 to WGS 84 See Appendix E. caution must be used to ensure that MREs are not extrapolated outside of the area of intended use.5 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations (MRE) The development of Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation Multiple Regression Equations [38] was initiated to obtain better fits over continental size land areas than could be achieved using the Standard Molodensky formula with datum shifts (∆X. ∆Y. Large distortions can be realized in very short distances outside of the area where the stations that were used in the development of the MREs exist. For ∆φ. respectively.. of the computation point φ m.7. 76 (73) . A1. respectively.
dual frequency GPS receiver and NIMA Precise Ephemerides and Satellite Clock States (note that the effects of Selective Availability (SA) must be removed) Same as above but using the Broadcast GPS Ephemerides and Clock States GPS differential (baseline) processing from known WGS 84 sites GPS Precise Positioning Service (PPS) navigation solutions • Instantaneous • Mean over some averaging interval GPS Standard Positioning Service (SPS) navigation solutions • Instantaneous • Mean over some averaging interval Photogrammetricallyderived coordinates from NIMA products Mapderived coordinates from digital or paper NIMA products • • • • • • Clearly. accuracy variations can occur due.8. solitary station using a ‘geodeticquality’. to the treatment of certain error sources such as the troposphere. Even within a given technique. for example.1 Discussion Numerous techniques now exist to establish WGS 84 coordinates for a given site. within the DoD. orbits and other parameters of interest Direct geodetic point positioning at a stationary. a network of stations obtained from one of these techniques yields a unique realization of the WGS 84 reference frame. almost all operational geodetic survey requirements can be met with direct geodetic point 81 . The most common. Because of these variations and periodic algorithm improvements. In the terminology of Chapter 2. The accuracy and precision achieved by these various techniques vary significantly. ACCURACY OF WGS 84 COORDINATES 8. full characterization of the accuracy achieved by all the above techniques would be quite challenging and beyond the scope of this document. Currently. the above positioning techniques do not provide WGS 84 coordinates with uniform accuracy and statistical properties. currently available techniques are listed below: • • General geodetic solution for station coordinates.
previously established survey coordinates can also yield ‘WGS 84’ coordinates with limited accuracy. Some of these alternate techniques to obtain WGS 84 coordinates are listed below: • • • • • TRANSIT Point Positioning directly in WGS 84 (1σ = 12 m) TRANSIT Point Positions transformed from NSWC9Z2 GPS differential (baseline) processing from a known (TRANSITdetermined) WGS 84 geodetic point position By a WGS 72 to WGS 84 Coordinate Transformation By a Local Geodetic Datum to WGS 84 Datum Transformation Because geospatial i formation within the DoD often originates from multiple n sources and processes. the absolute accuracy of a given WGS 84 position becomes very important when information from these various sources is combined in ‘Geographic Information Systems’ or ‘geospatial databases’.λ. image products or other geospatial information. which was used to develop the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame.h) Under special circumstances. Even GPS navigation solutions can serve a similar role.h) Other techniques which are based on older. such as the refinement of the permanent DoD GPS tracking network coordinates. as long as the accuracy of these solutions is well understood.λ. in each of the 3 position components (φ. in each of the 3 position components (φ.h) 19891994: 100 cm (1σ). This type of special technique. surveyed WGS 84 geodetic control points can often serve to improve or validate the accuracy of maps. Because of their high fidelity.λ. 82 . a general geodetic solution is performed where the positions of the entire permanent global DoD network are estimated simultaneously with many other parameters. has demonstrated an accuracy of: 5cm (1σ). in each of the 3 position components (φ. These techniques may be suitable for certain mapping applications but must be treated very cautiously if a high level of accuracy is required.positioning with GPS. The NIMAdeveloped technique [39] which performs this function has been demonstrated to achieve an accuracy at a single station of: 1994present: 30 cm (1σ).
WGS 84 surveyed control points provide an accuracy level which meets or exceeds all current operational DoD requirements. 83 . the accuracy of each ‘layer’ of information depends largely on the metric fidelity of the process used to collect that information.8. while WGS 84 provides a common global framework for all geospatial information within the DoD.2 Summary In summary.
This page is intentionally blank 84 .
As mentioned previously in this report.0. IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES 9. 1996) with an epoch of 1997.1 Introduction WGS 84 represents the current stateoftheart DoD operational reference system which has been derived from the best available satellite tracking. It supports the most stringent accuracy requirements for geodetic positioning. this requires a time epoch to be defined for all station coordinates since they are in continual motion. The absolute accuracy requirements vary significantly between these applications ranging from centimeter requirements for precise geodetic positioning to hundreds of meters for small scale maps. repositioned or their number is increased Additional data makes it possible to improve the accuracy of individual local datum relationships to WGS 84 Additional surface gravity data become available in various areas of the world to improve the gravity and geoid models The current definition of WGS 84 recognizes the continually changing physical Earth. Careful consideration by the user of the products and accuracy supported by the implementation can lead to reduced costs and reduced effort in the implementation of WGS 84 with no loss of accuracy of the product. As a consequence of the inherent high accuracy and continual refinement of the definition and realization of WGS 84. This will lead to improvements in the definition and realization of the system as: • • • The basic tracking stations which are used are updated.9. considerable care should be taken in the implementation of this system into existing and future weapons systems and geospatial information systems. cartographic users. navigation users and geospatial information users. satellite altimeter and surface gravity data. For the high accuracy geodetic positioning requirements. It is the policy of NIMA to continually improve components of the WGS 84 system to maintain it as a stateoftheart DoD operational World Geodetic System. shifting of internal masses and continental plate motions and accommodates this time dependency in its definition through a plate motion model. The guidelines presented in this Chapter are organized around basic classes of users: precise high accuracy geodetic users. This Chapter will address some of the considerations that should be made prior to the implementation of WGS 84 to ensure that the full benefits of WGS 84 are realized and are consistent with the operational product accuracy and interoperability requirements of the users. These recommendations are 91 . navigation and mapping within DoD. the coordinates of the fixed GPS tracking stations (WGS 84 (G873)) were implemented into the production of the NIMA precise orbits starting at GPS week 873 (September 29.
There is currently no world vertical system defined to unify and tie together local vertical systems.1.1. 92 . It is important for global operations and interoperability that DoD systems implement and operate as much as possible on WGS 84. An Earth orbiting satellite’s sensitivity to the geopotential is strongly influenced by the satellite’s altitude range and other orbital parameters. navigation systems and geodetic applications require a single accessible.1 General Recommendations Before satellite geodetic techniques became available. 9. implementations of the geoid undulation values as a grid in a lookup table would facilitate easier future updates than implementation as spherical harmonic coefficients. Unfortunately. numerous land records. These data will change with future refinements of WGS 84. NIMA did this for many years with Doppler observations from TRANSIT satellites and continues to do it now with GPS. and this may necessitate updates to existing implementations as future operational accuracy requirements become known.provided to stimulate users to analyze their specific implementation to determine how best to implement WGS 84 data and information. It is further recommended that in these applications coordinates be maintained with an epoch assigned to each coordinate determination along with an indication of the fixed station GPS coordinate set used for the realization. It is equally important that systems implement the WGS 84 information relative to the gravity field. DoD programs performing satellite orbit determination are advised to determine the maximum degree and order most appropriate for their particular mission and orbit accuracy requirements. The EGM96 through degree and order 70 is recommended for high accuracy satellite orbit determination and prediction purposes. navigation and mapping operations. For example. full implementation is recommended. This generally entails making survey ties between a number of local geodetic control points and their corresponding geodetic positions derived from satellite observations. This will provide the user with the ultimate positioning accuracy in WGS 84. Generally the vertical datum is defined by a series of tide gauges in the area or by approximating mean sea level by the geoid leading to numerous realizations of mean sea level. Modern maps.2 Precise Geodetic Applications For precise surveying applications. Aside from the countless maps and charts which are still based on these classical local datums. the local horizontal datum was defined independently of the local vertical datum. NIMA has developed datum transformations to convert over 120 local horizontal datums to WGS 84. 9. rather than a complete implementation which may not be necessary. as improved information becomes available to NIMA. geoid and datum transformations in a manner that will allow future update of specific portions of the data. such as WGS 84 (G873). global. 3dimensional reference frame. property boundaries and other geographic information in many countries are referenced to local datums. the local geodetic coordinates on these datums are of limited use for modern survey.
more than 100.0 m worldwide. the control heights are very accurate. The 12 meter accuracy (lσ) of the WGS 84 reference frame.2.4 Navigation Applications The navigator represents a user with applications distinct from those discussed above. Navigation applications are also characterized by large numbers of systems in the field.3 Cartographic Applications The original definition and realization of WGS 84 still satisfies the DoD’s mapping and charting requirements. This translates to 8. should be implemented. Second Edition. is more than adequate for large scale mapping.2. The current national horizontal map accuracy standard indicates that well defined points should be located with an accuracy better than 1/30 of an inch (0. TR8350.85 mm) at a 90 percent confidence level on maps with scales greater than 1:20. it is very important to have the product accuracy in mind when implementing the refinements as defined in this document. that the mapping products are on WGS 84 and not a local datum. then the application of appropriate datum transformations is necessary to preserve interoperability with other geospatial information.1.5 ±1.000 GPS military receivers. of course. If the maps or charts are on local datums. A height bias in the local mean sea level would be the major potential error source. If no leveling data are available for vertical control. elevations are estimated from height above the WGS 84 Ellipsoid and a geoid height derived from the WGS 84 Geoid model. to meters for combined integrated GPS/Inertial Navigation Systems. as defined in TR8350. Neither does there appear to be a reason to implement the geoid as spherical harmonics.g. especially for scales 1:10.000 or larger.5 m on a 1:10. Consequently. For these products the Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96). Accuracy requirements may vary from the centimeter level for precise geodetic applications.2. the accuracy of the datum transformations can vary from 1 meter to over 25 meters in each component. air and sea platforms. Implementation and update of WGS 84 in these platforms are 93 . If the elevations are based on first order geodetic leveling. Second Edition. assuming. with legacy systems having different implementations of WGS 84 than the newer systems. all datum transformations listed in this report may not be necessary. The vertical accuracy of geospatial information and resulting map products depends on how the elevations were compiled.9. probably good to centimeters with respect to ‘local mean sea level’.000. to tens of meters for the SPS GPS user. Implementation on a 30 minute or 1 degree grid may be more than adequate.1. e. the orthometric heights (height above the geoid) are substituted for elevations above mean sea level. such as aerial photogrammetry. Depending on the local datum.000 scale map which is easily met by WGS 84. The navigator is moving and positioning in realtime or after the fact on land. Specifically. The full resolution of the geoid may also not be necessary based on the changes of this geoid from the geoid documented in WGS 84. For mapping processes which use imagery. which provides a geoid with an accuracy of ±0. especially the regional values. 9. TR8350. for mapping implementation. Second Edition.
Therefore.2. Third Edition) in the most effective manner. the mean datum transformations may be sufficient for the user’s requirements.2 Summary Users need to implement the refinements of the WGS 84 (TR8350. 9. it is important that the accuracy of the basic information be retained. The implementation of the geoid in these applications should be as a lookup table with an appropriate interpolation scheme. This makes it possible for the user to tell if an update has been made to a specific transformation.costly and almost impossible to accomplish simultaneously. A few suggestions are offered. 94 . This will ensure that the applications have indeed implemented WGS 84 (TR8350. imagery intelligence and geospatial information can be derived or extracted. Use of the regional transformations versus the mean datum transformations should be analyzed with respect to the system accuracy capabilities. Implementation of regional datum transformations may not be required. the refined WGS 84 should be implemented in geospatial systems to maintain the inherent accuracy of the basic data sources.1. In some cases. Therefore. a careful analysis must be done for each implementation to determine the essential elements of the refined definition of WGS 84 that need to be implemented. 9.2. All applications may not require the maximum resolution. Third Edition) into application systems in a planned and well thought out manner. To help in deciding the grid interval. Cycle numbers have been provided to document the datum transformation changes. Since the information represented in the various layers has multiple uses and supports applications of different accuracies.5 Geospatial Information Applications Geospatial databases contain information from various sources as thematic layers from which imagery. An analysis into what aspects of these refinements are required for specific applications should be performed. a comparison should be made of the errors introduced in the geoid heights utilizing various grid sizes.
101 . high quality geodetic coordinates are provided automatically by NAVSTAR GPS User Equipment. For those using NAVSTAR GPS but still utilizing local geodetic datums and products. NIMA will continually review DoD requirements and assure that WGS 84 will remain a dynamic. the availability of the more accurate WGS 84 to Local Geodetic Datum Transformations leads to an improved recovery of local coordinates. As a result.10. interoperability and accuracy between thematic data layers. techniques and technology available in early 1997.5 meter to ±1. Major changes in this report are as follows: • • • • • • • Refined Earth Gravitational Model complete to degree and order 360 New geoid undulations accurate from ±0. Accurate coordinates will ensure consistency. viable system which meets or exceeds these requirements.0 meter Additional and improved datum transformation parameters from local to WGS 84 Modifications to the ellipsoidal (normal) gravity model New Earth Gravitational Constant (GM) New realization of the WGS 84 (G873) reference frame through a more accurate determination of NIMA and Air Force GPS monitor stations Inclusion of a new chapter on implementation guidance The value of WGS 84 will become increasingly evident with the expansion of geospatial databases and information systems. the refined WGS 84 is more accurate than its predecessor and replaces it as the three dimensional geodetic system officially authorized for DoD use. CONCLUSIONS/SUMMARY The refined World Geodetic System 1984 is based on the use of data. Since the reference system for NAVSTAR GPS is WGS 84.
This page is intentionally blank 102 .
. J. Ohio..The Implications of Higher Order Ionospheric Refraction on the Realization of the WGS 84 Reference Frame”. S. 4. June 1987.REFERENCES 1.. NSWCDD/TR96/201. Va. Utah. and Slater. Utah. “Preliminary Comparison of the WGS 84 and SV5 Reference Frames Using GPS Pseudorange Data”. and Malys. 5.R.. September 1994. editor. Mueller. 8. S. J.. 10. Fell. E. J. 6. Fl. “Improved WGS 84 Coordinates for the DMA and Air Force GPS Tracking Sites”. Proceedings of ION GPS94. “Estimating GPS Orbits. E. Dispersion and Correlation Among Transformation Parameters Relating Two Satellite Reference Frames.. J. American Geophysical Union Chapman Conference on GPS Measurements for Geodynamics.R. of Geodetic Science and Surveying Report No. D. 9.. Salt Lake City. Malys. L.R. Cunningham. R1 2. IERS Conventions (1996).. Swift. S. McCarthy.A. September 1988. Malys. Malys. J. July 1988. Naval Surface Warfare Center. Cunningham.. Proceedings of the Sixth International Geodetic Symposium on Satellite Positioning. November 1996. and Curtis. 3.P. Ohio State Univ.L. “Reference Coordinate Systems and Frames: Concepts and Realizations”. Dahlgren. Dahlgren. Ft.. Swift. 11. “WGS 84 Coordinate Validation and Improvement for the NIMA and Air Force GPS Tracking Stations”. March 1992. and Curtis. Columbus.. Cunningham. “Similarity Transformation Between NAVSAT and GPS Reference Frames”. IERS Technical Note 21. “Determination of TRANET and SMTP Tracking Station Coordinates for Use in the WGS 84”. V. Lauderdale. Dept. “Maintenance and Enhancement of the World Geodetic System 1984”. . Cunningham.P. P.. S. 1985. V. E. l July 1996. October 1992. NSWCDD TR 92557. Va. I. Vol. September 1994. Bulletin Geodesique. Proceedings of ION GPS94. 7. Salt Lake City. NSWC TR 8761. Swift. “Bridging the Gap Between TRANSIT and GPS Point Positioning . NAVSWC TR 91539. August 1991. 59.. 392. Clocks and Covariances in Support of SATRACK II”. Observatoire de Paris...
Canberra. “GPS Control Segment/ DMA Interfaces”. 20. Austin. ICDGPS211. REV A. and the Fundamental Reference Frame. 13. Earth RotationTheory and Observation. “Fundamental Geodetic Constants”. Personal Communication.H.D. 21. R2 14. Kansas City. 15 May 1994. “Earth Orientation Prediction Accuracy”. 3. Farrar. D. “Geodetic R eference System 1980”. and van Gelder. I. The IAU Resolutions on Astronomical Constants. Ungar Publishing Company. (from IUGG meeting.. Paris.. Vol. 23.. CO)..A. Proceedings of IONGPS96. IERS Technical Note 13. IERS Conventions (1992). 16. XVII General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG). Washington. TOR96(1567)1. New York. Observatoire de Paris. DC. Office Code OPG. “The DMA / GPS Earth Orientation Prediction Service”.I. Texas. Aerospace Corporation Report. “Improved WGS 84 Coordinates and GM Value for Air Force and Defense Mapping Agency Global Positioning System Monitor Stations for High Accuracy Satellite Orbit Determination”. editor. United States Naval Observatory. Bursa. Australia. G...12. C. Missouri. H. 140. Bangert. M. . 22. Paris. Bulletin Geodesique. Fundamental Constants”. 10 December 1981. Time Scales. Moritz H.. France. “Report of Special Commission SC3. IAG. 1996. DeMets. 5. 1980. 19. R. J... April 1986. No. April 1997. Moritz.H. McCarthy. H. 1987.W. and Mueller. July 1992.. Moritz. Kaplan. October 1991. DMA Letter. “A study of DMA’s Prediction Accuracy on Earth Orientation Parameters”.39 of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG). New York. 54. Report of Special Study Group No.. and Laing. Trevaux de l’ Association International de Geodesie Rapports Generaux et Rapports Techniques. Boulder. September 1996. France. Kopcha. Circular No. P. Interface Control Document. 15. 17. B. Proceedings of the Fourth International Geodetic Symposium on Satellite Positioning. 1995. P. December 1979. 163. 18.A.
24.
Ries, J.C., Eanes, R.J., Shum, C.K., and Watkins, M.M.; “Progress in the Determination of the Gravitational Coefficient of the Earth”; Geophysical Research Letters; Vol. 19, No. 6; March 20, 1992. Feess, W.; Personal Communication; July 1993. International Association of Geodesy; “The Geodesist’s Handbook 1984”; Bulletin Geodesique; Vol. 58, No. 3; Paris, France; 1984. Moritz, H.; “Fundamental Geodetic Constants”; Report of Special Study Group No. 5.39 of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG); XVI General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG); Grenoble, France; AugustSeptember 1975. Aoki, S., Guinot, B., Kaplan, G.H., Kinoshita, H., McCarthy, D.D, and Seidelmann, P. K.; “The New Definition of Universal Time”; Astronomy and Astrophysics; Vol. 105; 1982. Geodetic Reference System 1967; Special Publication No. 3; International Association of Geodesy; Paris, France; 1971. Price, W.F.; “The New Definition of the Metre”; Survey Review; Vol. 28, No. 219; January 1986. Rapp, R.H.; “Fundamental Geodetic Constants”; Report of Special Study Group No. 5.39 of the International Association of Geodesy (IAG); XVIII General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics (IUGG); Hamburg, Federal Republic of Germany; August 1983. Forsberg, R.; “A New Covariance Model for Inertia, Gravimetry and Gradiometry”; Journal of Geophysical. Research; Vol. 92, No. B2; pp. 13051310; 1987. Heiskanen, W. A. and Moritz, H.; Physical Geodesy; W. H. Freeman and Company; San Francisco, California and London, UK; 1967. Rapp, R. H.; “Use of Potential Coefficient Models for Geoid Undulation Determinations Using a Spherical Harmonic Representation of the Height Anomaly/Geoid Undulation Difference”; The Journal of Geodesy; Vol. 71, No. 5; April 1997. Ekman, M.; “Impacts of Geodynamic Phenomena on Systems for Height and Gravity”; Bulletin Geodesique; Vol. 63, No. 3; pp. 281296; 1989. R3
25. 26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Seppelin, T. O.; The Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1972; Technical Paper; Headquarters, Defense Mapping Agency; Washington, DC; May 1974. Molodensky, M.S., Eremeev, V.F., and Yurkina, M.I.; Methods for Study of the External Gravitational Field and Figure of the Earth; Israel Program for Scientific Translations; Jerusalem, Israel; 1962. (Available from the National Technical Information Service; United States Department of Commerce; Washington, DC). Appelbaum, L.T.; “Geodetic Datum Transformation By Multiple Regression Equations”; Proceedings of the Third International Geodetic Symposium on Satellite Doppler Positioning; New Mexico State University; Physical Science Laboratory; Las Cruces, New Mexico; 812 February 1982. Malys, S., Bredthauer, D., and Deweese, S.; “Error Budget for the DMA GPS Geodetic Point Positioning Algorithm Through Monte Carlo Simulation”; Proceedings of IONGPS93; Salt Lake City, Utah; September, 1993. Malys, S., Slater, J., Smith, R., Kunz, L., Kenyon, S.; “Refinements t The World o Geodetic System 1984”; Proceedings of GPS ION97; Kansas City, MO; September 1997. Lemoine, F.G., Kenyon, S.C., Trimmer, R., Factor, J., Pavlis, N.K., Klosko, S.M., Chinn, D.S., Torrence, M.H., Pavilis, E.C., Rapp. R.H., and Olson, T.R.; “EGM96 The NASA GSFC and NIMA Joint Geopotential Model”; NASA Technical Memorandum; 1997.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
R4
APPENDIX A LIST OF REFERENCE ELLIPSOID NAMES AND PARAMETERS (USED FOR GENERATING DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS)
A1
This page is intentionally blank A2 .
Some of the reference ellipsoids have more than one semimajor axis (a) associated with them. 2.f) associated with the local geodetic datums which are tied to WGS 84 through datum transformation constants and/or MREs (Appendices B. as identified in Appendix A. A3 . A typical example of such an ellipsoid is Everest whose semimajor axis (a) was originally defined in yards. changes in the yard to meter conversion ratio over the years have resulted in five different values for the constant (a). GENERAL This appendix lists the reference ellipsoids and their constants (a. These different values of axis (a) vary from one region or country to another or from one year to another within the same region or country. CONSTANT CHARACTERSTICS In Appendix A. the list of ellipsoids includes a new feature. Here.1. To facilitate correct referencing.1.REFERENCE ELLIPSOIDS FOR LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS 1. C and D). a standardized two letter code is also included to identify the different ellipsoids and/or their “versions” pertaining to the different values of the semimajor axis (a).
This page is intentionally blank A4 .
8017 300.243 6377309. Indonesia.556 6377276. Malaysia 1969*** Geodetic Reference System 1980 Helmert 1906 ID Code AA AN a (Meters) 6377563.465 EB EA EC EF EE ED RF HE 6377298.25 BR BN CC CD 6377397.345 6377301.865 6378206.8017 300.Appendix A.3 * Refer to Appendices B. *** Through adoption of a new yard to meter conversion factor in the referenced country. A.11 .8017 298.4 6378249.257222101 298.613 6377304.145 299.8017 300.8017 300.1 Reference Ellipsoid Names and Constants Used for Datum Transformations* Reference Ellipsoid Name Airy 1830 Australian National Bessel 1841 Ethiopia.1528128 299. ** As accepted by NIMA.3249646 298.063 6377295.8017 300.396 6378160 f 1 299.9786982 293.1528128 294. Malaysia (Sabah and Sarawak) India 1830 India 1956*** Pakistan*** W. C and D. Japan and Korea Namibia Clarke 1866 Clarke 1880** Everest Brunei and E.664 6378137 6378200 300.155 6377483. Malaysia and Singapore 1948 W.
189 6378155 6378160 6378135 6378137 f 1 297 298.247 297 298.3 299.3 298.25 298. A.26 298.Appendix A.257223563 * Refer to Appendices B.3249646 298.1 Reference Ellipsoid Names and Constants Used for Datum Transformations* Reference Ellipsoid Name Hough 1960 Indonesian 1974 International 1924 Krassovsky 1940 Modified Airy Modified Fischer 1960 South American 1969 WGS 1972 WGS 1984 ID Code HO ID IN KA AM FA SA WD WE a (Meters) 6378270 6378160 6378388 6378245 6377340. C and D.12 .
APPENDIX B DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED USING SATELLITE TIES TO GEODETIC DATUMS/SYSTEMS B1 .
This page is intentionally blank B2 .
2. This makes it possible for a user to determine when a particular set of transformation parameters first became available and if the current set has replaced an outdated set. 3.1 lists. A cycle number of one indicates that the current parameters have replaced outdated parameters that were in the previous edition. There are 112 local geodetic datums which are currently related to WGS 84 through satellite ties. alphabetically. Second Edition.2. B3 . 30 August 1993 or that the parameters are new to this edition (1997 Publication Date). If transformation parameter sets are updated in future editions of this publication. the cycle numbers for each parameter set that is updated will increment by one. TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS Appendices B. The year of initial publication and cycle numbers have been provided as a new feature in this edition. The continents and the local geodetic datums are arranged alphabetically.8 through B. Appendices B. Two letter ellipsoidal codes (Appendix A) have also been included against each datum to indicate which specific “version” of the ellipsoid was used in determining the transformation constants. the local geodetic datums with their associated ellipsoids. LOCAL DATUM ELLIPSOIDS Appendix B.2 through B. 1 September 1991 including Insert 1. A cycle number of zero indicates that the set of parameters is as it was published in DMA TR 8350.DATUM TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS GEODETIC DATUMS/SYSTEMS TO WGS 84 (THROUGH SATELLITE TIES) 1. GENERAL This appendix provides the details about the reference ellipsoids (Appendix A) which are used as defining parameters for the geodetic datums and systems. The ocean areas and the geodetic datums are also arranged alphabetically.10 list the constants for local datums which fall within the ocean areas.7 list the constants for local datums for continental areas.
the intent has been to assign the most realistic estimates as possible.∆Z). ERROR ESTIMATES The 1σ error estimates for the datum transformation constants (∆X. the 1σ errors for shift constants are noncomputed estimates. For datums having four or less common control stations. These estimates do not include the errors of the common control station coordinates which were used to compute the shift constants. are also tabulated. B4 .4.∆Y. obtained from the computed solutions. The current set of error estimates has been reevaluated and revised after careful consideration of the datum transformation solutions and the related geodetic information.
11 .Appendix B.1 Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems Related to World Geodetic System 1984 (Through Satellite Ties) Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Krassovsky 1940 International 1924 Clarke 1866 Australian National Clarke 1880 Clarke 1880 Clarke 1880 International 1924 International 1924 International 1924 International 1924 International 1924 Australian National Australian National Clarke 1880 International 1924 Clarke 1866 International 1924 International 1924 International 1924 International 1924 Clarke 1880 Clarke 1866 Clarke 1880 International 1924 International 1924 Bessel 1841 Code CD KA IN CC AN CD CD CD IN IN IN IN IN AN AN CD IN CC IN IN IN IN CD CC CD IN IN BR IN CD CD BR IN IN Adindan Afgooye Ain el Abd 1970 American Samoa 1962 Anna 1 Astro 1965 Antigua Island Astro 1943 Arc 1950 Arc 1960 Ascension Island 1958 Astro Beacon “E” 1945 Astro DOS 71/4 Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961 Astronomical Station 1952 Australian Geodetic 1966 Australian Geodetic 1984 Ayabelle Lighthouse Bellevue (IGN) Bermuda 1957 Bissau Bogota Observatory Campo Inchauspe Canton Astro 1966 Cape Cape Canaveral Carthage Chatham Island Astro 1971 Chua Astro CoOrdinate System 1937 of Estonia Corrego Alegre International 1924 Dabola Clarke 1880 Deception Island Clarke 1880 Djakarta (Batavia) Bessel 1841 DOS 1968 International 1924 Easter Island 1967 International 1924 * See Appendix A. B.f.1 for associated constants a.
5 Astro 1961 Clarke 1866 Leigon Clarke 1880 Liberia 1964 Clarke 1880 Luzon Clarke 1866 Mahe 1971 Clarke 1880 Massawa Bessel 1841 Merchich Clarke 1880 Midway Astro 1961 International 1924 Minna Clarke 1880 * See Appendix A. ** Due to different semimajor axes.f.1.Appendix B.12 Local Geodetic Datum Code IN IN CD IN IN IN CC IN IN IN IN EA/EC** EA EA EA ID AM IN IN IN EA IN EE WE IN CC CD CD CC CD BR CD IN CD . B.1 for associated constants a. C.1 Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems Related to World Geodetic System 1984 (Through Satellite Ties) Associated*Reference Ellipsoid European 1950 International 1924 European 1979 International 1924 Fort Thomas 1955 Clarke 1880 Gan 1970 International 1924 Geodetic Datum 1949 International 1924 Graciosa Base SW 1948 International 1924 Guam 1963 Clarke 1866 GUX 1 Astro International 1924 Hjorsey 1955 International 1924 Hong Kong 1963 International 1924 HuTzuShan International 1924 Indian Everest Indian 1954 Everest Indian 1960 Everest Indian 1975 Everest Indonesian 1974 Indonesian 1974 Ireland 1965 Modified Airy ISTS 061 Astro 1968 International 1924 ISTS 073 Astro 1969 International 1924 Johnston Island 1961 International 1924 Kandawala Everest Kerguelen Island 1949 International 1924 Kertau 1948 Everest Korean Geodetic System 1995 WGS 84 Kusaie Astro 1951 International 1924 L. See Appendix A.
f. BWI North American 1927 North American 1983 North Sahara 1959 Observatorio Meteorologico 1939 Old Egyptian 1907 Helmert 1906 Old Hawaiian Clarke 1866 Old Hawaiian International 1924 Oman Clarke 1880 Ordnance Survey of Great Airy 1830 Britain 1936 Pico de las Nieves International 1924 Pitcairn Astro 1967 International 1924 Point 58 Clarke 1880 Pointe Noire 1948 Clarke 1880 Porto Santo 1936 International 1924 Provisional South American International 1924 1956 Provisional South Chilean International 1924 1963*** Puerto Rico Clarke 1866 Qatar National International 1924 Qornoq International 1924 Reunion International 1924 Rome 1940 International 1924 S42 (Pulkovo 1942) Krassovsky 1940 Santo (DOS) 1965 International 1924 Sao Braz International 1924 Sapper Hill 1943 International 1924 * See Appendix A. ** Geodetic Reference System 1980 *** Also known as Hito XVIII 1963 B.1 Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems Related to World Geodetic System 1984 (Through Satellite Ties) Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Clarke 1880 Clarke 1880 International 1924 Clarke 1866 GRS 80** Clarke 1880 International 1924 Code CD CD CD IN CC RF CD IN HE CC IN CD AA IN IN CD CD IN IN IN CC IN IN IN IN KA IN IN IN Montserrat Island Astro 1958 M'Poraloko Nahrwan Naparima.13 .1 for associated constants a.Appendix B.
14 .1 Geodetic Datums/Reference Systems Related to World Geodetic System 1984 (Through Satellite Ties) Local Geodetic Datum Associated*Reference Ellipsoid Bessel 1841 International 1924 Clark 1880 Bessel 1841 South American 1969 GRS 80** Code BN IN CD BR SA RF FA EB BR IN CD CD HO IN IN Schwarzeck Selvagem Grande 1938 Sierra Leone 1960 SJTSK South American 1969 South American Geocentric Reference System (SIRGAS) South Asia Modified Fischer 1960 Timbalai 1948 Everest Tokyo Bessel 1841 Tristan Astro 1968 International 1924 Viti Levu 1916 Clarke 1880 Voirol 1960 Clarke 1880 WakeEniwetok 1960 Hough 1960 Wake Island Astro 1952 International 1924 Zanderij International 1924 * See Appendix A.f. ** Geodetic Reference System 1980 B.Appendix B.1 for associated constants a.
of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name ADINDAN Mean Solution (Ethiopia and Sudan) Burkina Faso Cameroon Ethiopia Mali Senegal Sudan AFGOOYE Somalia Pub.Appendix B.54750714 22 0 1991 166 +5 15 +5 204 +3 No.145 ∆f x 104 0.00480795 1 1 8 1 2 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 118 134 165 123 128 161 +25 +25 +3 +25 +25 +3 14 2 11 20 18 14 +25 +25 +3 +25 +25 +5 218 210 206 220 224 205 +25 +25 +3 +25 +25 +3 1 0 1987 43 +25 163 +25 45 +25 B.2 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AFRICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code ADI ADIM Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.21 . Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) ADIE ADIF ADIA ADIC ADID ADIB AFG Krassovsky 1940 108 0.
2 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AFRICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code ARF ARFM Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.54750714 41 0 1987 143 +20 90 +33 294 +20 No. Lesotho. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name ARC 1950 Mean Solution (Botswana.Appendix B. Zambia and Zimbabwe) Botswana Burundi Lesotho Malawi Swaziland Zaire Zambia Zimbabwe Pub.22 . Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) ARFA ARFH ARFB ARFC ARFD ARFE ARFF ARFG 9 3 5 6 4 2 5 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 138 153 125 161 134 169 147 142 +3 +20 +3 +9 +15 +25 +21 +5 105 5 108 73 105 19 74 96 +5 +20 +3 +24 +15 +25 +21 +8 289 292 295 317 295 278 283 293 +3 +20 +8 +8 +15 +25 +27 +11 B. Zaire. Swaziland.145 ∆f x 104 0. Malawi.
23 .145 0.54750714 5 0 1991 79 +25 129 +25 145 +25 0 1991 173 +25 253 +25 27 +25 0 1987 136 +3 108 +6 292 +6 B.14192702 2 CAP Clarke 1880 112.54750714 24 12 0 0 1997 1997 157 175 +4 +6 2 23 +3 +9 299 303 +3 +10 1 BID International 1924 251 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name ARC 1960 Mean Solution (Kenya and Tanzania) Kenya Tanzania AYABELLE LIGHTHOUSE Djibouti BISSAU GuineaBissau CAPE South Africa Pub.Appendix B.54750714 25 0 1991 160 +20 6 +20 302 +20 No.2 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AFRICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code ARS ARSM Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.145 0.145 ∆f x 104 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) ARSA ARSB PHA Clarke 1880 112.
145 0.145 ∆f x 104 0.54750714 8 LIB Clarke 1880 112.14192702 14 4 0 0 1991 1993 130 112 +6 +25 117 77 +8 +25 151 145 +8 +25 0 1991 83 +15 37 +15 124 +15 0 1987 263 +6 6 +9 431 +8 No.2 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AFRICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code CGE Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.145 0.145 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) B.24 .54750714 4 EUR EURF EURT LEH Clarke 1880 112.54750714 5 DAL Clarke 1880 112. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name CARTHAGE Tunisia DABOLA Guinea EUROPEAN 1950 Egypt Tunisia LEIGON Ghana LIBERIA 1964 Liberia Pub.54750714 4 0 1987 90 +15 40 +15 88 +15 0 1991 130 +2 29 +3 364 +2 International 1924 251 0.Appendix B.
10037483 1 MER Clarke 1880 112. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name MASSAWA Eritrea (Ethiopia) MERCHICH Morocco MINNA Cameroon Nigeria M'PORALOKO Gabon NORTH SAHARA 1959 Algeria Pub.54750714 2 6 0 0 1991 1987 81 92 +25 +3 84 93 +25 +6 115 122 +25 +5 0 1987 31 +5 146 +3 47 +3 0 1987 639 +25 405 +25 60 +25 No.845 ∆f x 104 0.Appendix B.145 0.145 0.2 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AFRICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code MAS Name Bessel 1841 ∆a(m) 739.54750714 9 MIN MINA MINB MPO Clarke 1880 112.145 0.54750714 1 NSD Clarke 1880 112.25 .145 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) B.54750714 3 0 1993 186 +25 93 +25 310 +25 0 1991 74 +25 130 +25 42 +25 Clarke 1880 112.
54750714 2 0 1993 123 +25 206 +25 219 +25 * This ∆a value reflects an avalue of 6377483.54750714 2 0 1991 106 +25 129 +25 165 +25 0 1987 130 +3 110 +6 13 +8 No.145 0.2 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AFRICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code OEG Name Helmert 1906 ∆a(m) 63 ∆f x 104 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) PTN Clarke 1880 112.Appendix B.135* 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name OLD EGYPTIAN 1907 Egypt POINT 58 Mean Solution (Burkina Faso and Niger) POINTE NOIRE 1948 Congo SCHWARZECK Namibia SIERRA LEONE 1960 Sierra Leone VOIROL 1960 Algeria Pub.145 0.54750714 1 0 1991 148 +25 51 +25 291 +25 SCK Bessel 1841 653.865 meters for the Bessel 1841 Ellipsoid in Namibia.54750714 8 0 1997 88 +15 4 +15 101 +15 VOR Clarke 1880 112.26 .145 0.10037483 3 0 1991 616 +20 97 +20 251 +20 SRL Clark 1880 112.145 0. B.00480795 14 PTB Clarke 1880 112.
14192702 2 9 0 0 1991 1991 150 143 +25 +10 250 236 +25 +10 1 7 +25 +10 No.845 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name AIN EL ABD 1970 Bahrain Island Saudi Arabia DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) Sumatra (Indonesia) EUROPEAN 1950 Iran HONG KONG 1963 Hong Kong HUTZUSHAN Taiwan Pub.14192702 27 0 1991 117 +9 132 +12 164 +11 0 1987 377 +3 681 +3 50 +3 Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0.3 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ASIA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code AIN AINA AINB BAT Bessel 1841 739.10037483 5 EUR EURH HKD International 1924 251 0.14192702 2 HTN International 1924 251 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) B.14192702 4 0 1991 637 +15 549 +15 203 +15 0 1987 156 +25 271 +25 189 +25 International 1924 251 0.31 .Appendix B.
655* 0.28361368 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) INGB 1 0 1993 182 +25 915 +25 344 +25 INH INHA INHA1 Everest (1830) 860.28361368 6 62 0 1 1991 1997 209 210 +12 +3 818 814 +10 +2 290 289 +12 +3 B.28361368 11 0 1993 217 +15 823 +6 299 +12 6 7 0 0 1991 1991 282 295 +10 +12 726 736 +8 +10 254 257 +12 +15 ∆a(m) ∆f x 104 No.Appendix B.28361368 0.757* 860.32 .28361368 2 0 1993 198 +25 881 +25 317 +25 Name Everest Everest (1830) Everest (1956) Everest (1830) 860.655* 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name INDIAN Bangladesh India and Nepal INDIAN 1954 Thailand INDIAN 1960 Vietnam (near 16°N) Con Son Island (Vietnam) INDIAN 1975 Thailand Thailand * See Appendix A Pub.655* 0.655* 835.3 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ASIA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code IND INDB INDI INF INFA ING INGA Everest (1830) 860.
of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name INDONESIAN 1974 Indonesia KANDAWALA Sri Lanka KERTAU 1948 West Malaysia and Singapore KOREAN GEODETIC SYSTEM 1995 South Korea Pub.3 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ASIA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code IDN Name Indonesian 1974 ∆a(m) 23 ∆f x 104 0.00114930 1 KAN Everest (1830) 860.33 .Appendix B.937* 0.655* 0.28361368 3 KEA Everest (1948) 832.28361368 6 0 1987 11 +10 851 +8 5 +6 0 1987 97 +20 787 +20 86 +20 0 1993 24 +25 15 +25 5 +25 No. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) KGS WGS 84 0 0 29 0 2000 0 +1 0 +1 0 +1 * See Appendix A B.
of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name NAHRWAN Masirah Island (Oman) United Arab Emirates Saudi Arabia OMAN Oman QATAR NATIONAL Qatar SOUTH ASIA Singapore Pub.54750714 2 2 3 0 0 0 1987 1987 1991 247 249 243 +25 +25 +20 148 156 192 +25 +25 +20 369 381 477 +25 +25 +20 No.145 0.145 ∆f x 104 0.00480795 1 0 1987 7 +25 10 +25 26 +25 0 1987 128 +20 283 +20 22 +20 0 1987 346 +3 1 +3 224 +9 Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.14192702 3 SOA Modified Fischer 1960 18 0.54750714 7 QAT International 1924 251 0.Appendix B.34 .3 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ASIA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code NAH NAHA NAHB NAHC FAH Clarke 1880 112. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) * See Appendix A B.
845 0.Appendix B.3 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ASIA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code TIL Name Everest ∆a(m) 838.444* ∆f x 104 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 48 +12 TOY TOYM Bessel 1841 739. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name TIMBALAI 1948 Brunei and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sabah) TOKYO Mean Solution (Japan.35 . Okinawa and South Korea) Japan Okinawa South Korea South Korea Pub.28361368 8 0 1987 679 +10 669 +10 No.10037483 31 0 1991 148 +20 507 +5 685 +20 TOYA TOYC TOYB TOYB1 16 3 12 29 0 0 0 1 1991 1991 1991 1997 148 158 146 147 +8 +20 +8 +2 507 507 507 506 +5 +5 +5 +2 685 676 687 687 +8 +20 +8 +2 B.
Appendix B.00081204 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 Australia and Tasmania AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 Australia and Tasmania Pub.00081204 0 1987 133 +3 48 +3 148 +3 90 0 1987 134 +2 48 +2 149 +2 B.41 . Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 105 AUG Australian National 23 0.4 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: AUSTRALIA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code AUA Name Australian National ∆a(m) 23 ∆f x 104 0.
Sweden and Switzerland} Pub.85 ∆f x 104 0. Luxembourg. FRG (Federal Republic of Germany)*. Belgium.14192702 85 0 1997 374 +2 150 +3 588 +3 0 1987 87 +3 98 +8 121 +5 * Prior to 1 January 1993 B. Italy. Spain. Netherlands. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 19 EUR EURM International 1924 251 0. Portugal.5 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: EUROPE Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code EST Name Bessel 1841 ∆a(m) 739. Finland.10037483 No. France.51 . of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name COORDINATE SYSTEM 1937 OF ESTONIA Estonia EUROPEAN 1950 Mean Solution {Austria. Greece.Appendix B. Norway. Gibraltar. Denmark.
Netherlands and Switzerland} Cyprus Egypt England.14192702 No. Ireland. Denmark.52 . of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name EUROPEAN 1950 (cont’d) Western Europe {Limited to Austria. B. Scotland and Shetland Islands** England. FRG (Federal Republic of Germany)*. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) EURA 52 0 1991 87 +3 96 +3 120 +3 EURE EURF EURG 4 14 40 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 104 130 86 +15 +6 +3 101 117 96 +15 +8 +3 140 151 120 +15 +8 +3 EURK 47 0 1991 86 +3 96 +3 120 +3 * Prior to 1 January 1993 ** European Datum 1950 coordinates developed from Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (OSGB) Scientific Network 1980 (SN 80) coordinates. France.5 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: EUROPE Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code EUR Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0. Channel Islands.Appendix B. Scotland and Shetland Islands** Pub.
14192702 No. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) EURB EURH 2 27 0 0 1991 1991 84 117 +25 +9 95 132 +25 +12 130 164 +25 +11 EURI EURJ EURL EURC EURD EURT 2 3 1 20 18 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 1993 97 97 107 87 84 112 +25 +20 +25 +3 +5 +25 103 88 88 95 107 77 +25 +20 +25 +5 +6 +25 120 135 149 120 120 145 +25 +20 +25 +3 +3 +25 B.Appendix B.53 .5 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: EUROPE Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code EUR Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name EUROPEAN 1950 (cont’d) Greece Iran Italy Sardinia Sicily Malta Norway and Finland Portugal and Spain Tunisia Pub.
Finland. Isle of Man. Scotland. Norway. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) HJO International 1924 251 0.54 .Appendix B.604 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name EUROPEAN 1979 Mean Solution (Austria.811 0. Sweden and Switzerland) HJORSEY 1955 Iceland IRELAND 1965 Ireland ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 Mean Solution (England.5 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: EUROPE Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code EUS Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0. Spain.11960023 OGBM 38 0 1987 375 +10 111 +10 431 +15 B. Netherlands.14192702 22 0 1987 86 +3 98 +3 119 +3 No. Shetland Islands and Wales) Pub.11960023 7 0 1987 506 +3 122 +3 611 +3 OGB Airy 573.14192702 6 0 1987 73 +3 46 +3 86 +6 IRL Modified Airy 796.
11960023 No.Appendix B.00480795 5 11 0 1987 225 +25 65 +25 9 +25 0 0 1993 1997 28 23 +2 ±4 121 124 +2 +2 77 82 +2 ±4 B. Isle of Man and Wales Scotland and Shetland Islands Wales ROME 1940 Sardinia S42 (PULKOVO 1942) Hungary Poland Pub. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 (cont’d) England England. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) OGBA OGBB 21 25 0 0 1991 1991 371 371 +5 +10 112 111 +5 +10 434 434 +6 +15 OGBC 13 0 1991 384 +10 111 +10 425 +10 OGBD MOD International 1924 251 0.14192702 3 0 1991 370 +20 108 +20 434 +20 1 SPK SPKA SPKB Krassovsky 1940 108 0.5 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: EUROPE Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code OGB Name Airy ∆a(m) 573.55 .604 ∆f x 104 0.
Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) SPKC SPKD SPKE SPKF SPKG CCD Bessel 1841 739.845 0.5 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: EUROPE Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code SPK Name Krassovsky 1940 ∆a(m) 108 ∆f x 104 0.56 .Appendix B. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name S42 (PULKOVO 1942) (cont’d) Czechoslovakia* Latvia Kazakhstan Albania Romania SJTSK Czechoslovakia * * Prior to 1 January 1993 Pub.10037483 6 5 2 7 4 0 0 0 0 0 1997 1997 1997 1997 1997 26 24 15 24 28 +3 +2 +25 +3 +3 121 124 130 130 121 +3 +2 +25 +3 +5 78 82 84 92 77 +2 +2 +25 +3 +3 6 0 1993 589 +4 76 +2 480 +3 B.00480795 No.
Appendix B.6 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code CAC Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69.4 ∆f x 104 0.37264639 19 0 1991 2 +3 151 +3 181 +3 No. of Satellite Stations Used Transformation Parameters
Name CAPE CANAVERAL Mean Solution (Florida and Bahamas) NORTH AMERICAN 1927 Mean Solution (CONUS) Western United States (Arizona, Arkansas, California, Colorado, Idaho, Iowa, Kansas, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada,New Mexico, North Dakota, Oklahoma, Oregon, South Dakota, Texas, Utah, Washington and Wyoming)
Cycle Pub. Number Date
∆X(m)
∆Y(m)
∆Z(m)
NAS
Clarke 1866
69.4
0.37264639
NASC
405
0
1987
8
+5
160
+5
176
+6
NASB
276
0
1991
8
+5
159
+3
175
+3
B.61
Appendix B.6 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code NAS Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69.4 ∆f x 104 0.37264639 No. of Satellite Stations Used Transformation Parameters
Name NORTH AMERICAN 1927 (cont’d) Eastern United States (Alabama, Connecticut, Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Illinois, Indiana, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Mississippi, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, Tennessee, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia and Wisconsin)
Cycle Pub. Number Date
∆X(m)
∆Y(m)
∆Z(m)
NASA
129
0
1991
9
+5
161
+5
179
+8
B.62
Appendix B.6 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: NORTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code NAS Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69.4 ∆f x 104 0.37264639 No. of Satellite Stations Used Transformation Parameters
Name NORTH AMERICAN 1927 (cont’d) Alaska (Excluding Aleutian Islands) Aleutian Islands East of 180°W West of 180°W Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island) San Salvador Island Canada Mean Solution (Including Newfoundland) Alberta and British Columbia
Cycle Pub. Number Date
∆X(m)
∆Y(m)
∆Z(m)
NASD
47
0
1987
5
+5
135
+9
172
+5
NASV NASW NASQ
6 5 11
0 0 0
1993 1993 1987
2 2 4
+6 +10 +5
152 204 154
+8 +10 +3
149 105 178
+10 +10 +5
NASR NASE
1 112
0 0
1987 1987
1 10
+25 +15
140 158
+25 +11
165 187
+25 +6
NASF
25
0
1991
7
+8
162
+8
188
+6
B.63
New Brunswick.64 .4 ∆f x 104 0. of Satellite Stations Used Transformation Parameters Name NORTH AMERICAN 1927 (cont’d) Eastern Canada (Newfoundland.37264639 No. Jamaica and Turks Islands) Cycle Pub. Grand Cayman. Cuba.6 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: NORTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code NAS Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69. Nova Scotia and Quebec) Manitoba and Ontario Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan Yukon Canal Zone Caribbean (Antigua Island. Barbados. Caicos Islands. Dominican Republic. Barbuda.Appendix B. Number Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) NASG 37 0 1991 22 +6 160 +6 190 +3 NASH NASI 25 17 0 0 1991 1991 9 4 +9 +5 157 159 +5 +5 184 188 +5 +3 NASJ NASO NASP 8 3 15 0 0 0 1991 1987 1991 7 0 3 +5 +20 +3 139 125 142 +8 +20 +9 181 201 183 +3 +20 +12 B.
Number Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) NASN 19 0 1987 0 +8 125 +3 194 +5 NAST NASU 1 2 0 0 1987 1987 9 11 +25 +25 152 114 +25 +25 178 195 +25 +25 NASL NAR GRS 80 0 0.37264639 No. of Satellite Stations Used Transformation Parameters Name NORTH AMERICAN 1927 (cont’d) Central America (Belize. El Salvador. Honduras and Nicaragua) Cuba Greenland (Hayes Peninsula) Mexico NORTH AMERICAN 1983 Alaska (Excluding Aleutian Islands) Aleutian Islands Canada Cycle Pub.6 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: NORTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code NAS Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69.65 . Costa Rica.00000016 22 0 1987 12 +8 130 +6 190 +6 NARA 42 0 1987 0 +2 0 +2 0 +2 NARE NARB 4 96 0 0 1993 1987 2 0 +5 +2 0 0 +2 +2 4 0 +5 +2 B.Appendix B.4 ∆f x 104 0. Guatemala.
of Satellite Stations Used Transformation Parameters Name NORTH AMERICAN 1983 (cont’d) CONUS Hawaii Mexico and Central America Cycle Pub.66 .00000016 No.6 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: NORTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code NAR Name GRS 80 ∆a(m) 0 ∆f x 104 0. Number Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) NARC NARH NARD 216 6 25 0 0 0 1987 1993 1987 0 1 0 +2 +2 +2 0 1 0 +2 +2 +2 0 1 0 +2 +2 +2 B.Appendix B.
14192702 6 COA International 1924 251 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name BOGOTA OBSERVATORY Colombia CAMPO INCHAUSPE 1969 Argentina CHUA ASTRO Paraguay CORREGO ALEGRE Brazil Pub.14192702 17 0 1987 148 +5 136 +5 90 +5 0 1987 134 +6 229 +9 29 +5 0 1987 206 +5 172 +3 6 +5 B. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 7 CAI International 1924 251 0.14192702 No.71 .7 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: SOUTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code BOO Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0.14192702 0 1987 307 +6 304 +5 318 +6 20 CHU International 1924 251 0.Appendix B.
72 . Colombia. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) PRPM 63 0 1987 288 +17 175 +27 376 PRPA 5 0 1991 270 +5 188 +11 388 +14 PRPB 1 0 1991 270 +25 183 +25 390 +25 PRPC 3 0 1991 305 +20 243 +20 442 +20 PRPD PRPE 4 11 0 0 1991 1991 282 278 +15 +3 169 171 +15 +5 371 367 +15 +3 B.14192702 ±27 No.Appendix B. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 Mean Solution (Bolivia. Ecuador. Chile. Peru and Venezuela) Bolivia Chile Northern Chile (near 19°S) Southern Chile (near 43°S) Colombia Ecuador Pub.7 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: SOUTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code PRP Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0. Guyana.
Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) PRPF PRPG PRPH HIT International 1924 251 0.7 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: SOUTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code PRP Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0.14192702 9 6 24 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 298 279 295 +6 +6 +9 159 175 173 +14 +8 +14 369 379 371 +5 +12 +15 2 0 1987 16 +25 196 +25 93 +25 * Also known as Hito XVIII 1963 B. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (cont’d) Guyana Peru Venezuela PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963* Southern Chile (near 53°S) Pub.73 .Appendix B.14192702 No.
Guyana. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) SANM 84 0 1987 57 +15 1 +6 41 +9 SANA SANB SANC SAND SANE 10 4 22 9 7 0 0 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 62 61 60 75 44 +5 +15 +3 +15 +6 1 2 2 1 6 +5 +15 +5 +8 +6 37 48 41 44 36 +5 +15 +5 +11 +5 B. Trinidad and Tobago and Venezuela) Argentina Bolivia Brazil Chile Colombia Pub.Appendix B.74 . Ecuador.00081204 No. Colombia. Chile. Paraguay. Bolivia. Brazil.7 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: SOUTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code SAN Name South American 1969 ∆a(m) 23 ∆f x 104 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 Mean Solution (Argentina. Peru.
00081204 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (cont’d) Ecuador (Excluding Galapagos Islands) Baltra and Galapagos Islands Guyana Paraguay Peru Trinidad and Tobago Venezuela Pub. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) SANF 11 0 1991 48 +3 3 +3 44 +3 SANJ 1 0 1991 47 +25 26 +25 42 +25 SANG SANH SANI SANK SANL 5 4 6 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 1991 1991 1991 1991 1991 53 61 58 45 45 +9 +15 +5 +25 +3 3 2 0 12 8 +5 +15 +5 +25 +6 47 33 44 33 33 +5 +15 +5 +25 +3 B.7 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: SOUTH AMERICA Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code SAN Name South American 1969 ∆a(m) 23 ∆f x 104 0.Appendix B.75 .
Appendix B.7 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: SOUTH AMERICA
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code SIR Name GRS 80 ∆a(m) 0 ∆f x 104 0.00000016 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters
Name SOUTH AMERICAN GEOCENTRIC REFERENCE SYSTEM (SIRGAS) South America ZANDERIJ Suriname
Pub. Date
∆X(m)
∆Y(m)
∆Z(m)
66 ZAN International 1924 251 0.14192702 5
0
2000
0
+1
0
+1
0
+1
0
1987
265
+5
120
+5
358
+8
B.76
Appendix B.8 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code AIA Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.145 ∆f x 104 0.54750714 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters
Name ANTIGUA ISLAND ASTRO 1943 Antigua and Leeward Islands ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 Ascension Island ASTRO DOS 71/4 St. Helena Island BERMUDA 1957 Bermuda Islands CAPE CANAVERAL Mean Solution (Bahamas and Florida)
Pub. Date
∆X(m)
∆Y(m)
∆Z(m)
1
0
1991
270
+25
13
+25
62
+25
ASC
International 1924
251
0.14192702
2 SHB International 1924 251 0.14192702 1 BER Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639 3 CAC Clarke 1866 69.4 0.37264639 19
0
1991
205
+25
107
+25
53
+25
0
1987
320
+25
550
+25
494
+25
0
1987
73
+20
213
+20
296
+20
0
1991
2
+3
151
+3
181
+3
B.81
Appendix B.8 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN
Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code DID Name Clarke 1880 ∆a(m) 112.145 ∆f x 104 0.54750714 3 0 1993 260 +20 12 +20 147 +20 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters
Name DECEPTION ISLAND Deception Island and Antarctica FORT THOMAS 1955 Nevis, St. Kitts and Leeward Islands GRACIOSA BASE SW 1948 Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge and Terceira Islands (Azores) HJORSEY 1955 Iceland ISTS 061 ASTRO 1968 South Georgia Island
Pub. Date
∆X(m)
∆Y(m)
∆Z(m)
FOT
Clarke 1880
112.145
0.54750714 2 0 1991 7 +25 215 +25 225 +25
GRA
International 1924
251
0.14192702
5
0
1991
104
+3
167
+3
38
+3
HJO
International 1924
251
0.14192702 6 0 1987 73 +3 46 +3 86 +6
ISG
International 1924
251
0.14192702 1 0 1991 794 +25 119 +25 298 +25
B.82
145 0.37264639 1 ASM Clarke 1880 112. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 1 0 1991 174 +25 359 +25 365 +25 NAP International 1924 251 0.14192702 3 0 1991 425 +20 169 +20 81 +20 PLN International 1924 251 0. 5 ASTRO 1961 Cayman Brac Island MONTSERRAT ISLAND ASTRO 1958 Montserrat and Leeward Islands NAPARIMA. BWI Trinidad and Tobago OBSERVATORIO METEOROLOGICO 1939 Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores) PICO DE LAS NIEVES Canary Islands Pub. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name L.4 ∆f x 104 0.8 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code LCF Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69.54750714 0 1987 42 +25 124 +25 147 +25 No.Appendix B.14192702 1 0 1987 307 +25 92 +25 127 +25 B. C.14192702 4 0 1991 10 +15 375 +15 165 +15 FLO International 1924 251 0.83 .
37264639 11 0 1987 11 +3 72 +3 101 +3 QUO International 1924 251 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) PUR Clarke 1866 69.14192702 2 0 1987 203 +25 141 +25 53 +25 SAP International 1924 251 0.4 0.8 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code POS Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name PORTO SANTO 1936 Porto Santo and Madeira Islands PUERTO RICO Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands QORNOQ South Greenland SAO BRAZ Sao Miguel and Santa Maria Islands (Azores) SAPPER HILL 1943 East Falkland Island Pub.84 .Appendix B.14192702 2 0 1987 164 +25 138 +25 189 +32 SAO International 1924 251 0.14192702 2 0 1991 499 +25 249 +25 314 +25 No.14192702 5 0 1991 355 +1 21 +1 72 +1 B.
8 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: ATLANTIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code SGM Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0.14192702 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name SELVAGEM GRANDE 1938 Salvage Islands TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 Tristan da Cunha Pub.14192702 1 0 1991 289 +25 124 +25 60 +25 0 1987 632 +25 438 +25 609 +25 B.85 .Appendix B. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 1 TDC International 1924 251 0.
54750714 1 REU International 1924 251 0.14192702 1 IST International 1924 251 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 1 MIK Clarke 1880 112.9 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: INDIAN OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Code ANO Name Australian National ∆a(m) 23 ∆f x 104 0.Appendix B.14192702 0 1987 208 +25 435 +25 229 +25 0 1987 133 +25 321 +25 50 +25 0 1987 491 +25 22 +25 435 +25 No. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 Cocos Islands GAN 1970 Republic of Maldives ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 Diego Garcia KERGUELEN ISLAND 1949 Kerguelen Island MAHE 1971 Mahe Island REUNION Mascarene Islands Pub.145 0.14192702 2 KEG International 1924 251 0.00081204 1 GAA International 1924 251 0.91 .14192702 1 0 1987 145 +25 187 +25 103 +25 0 1987 41 +25 220 +25 134 +25 0 1987 94 +25 948 +25 1262 +25 B.
Appendix B. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name AMERICAN SAMOA 1962 American Samoa Islands ASTRO BEACON “E” 1945 Iwo Jima ASTRO TERN ISLAND (FRIG) 1961 Tern Island ASTRONOMICAL STATION 1952 Marcus Island BELLEVUE (IGN) Efate and Erromango Islands Code AMA Pub.37264639 2 ATF International 1924 251 0.14192702 1 ASQ International 1924 251 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) B.10 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name Clarke 1866 ∆a(m) 69.14192702 1 IBE International 1924 251 0.4 ∆f x 104 0.14192702 1 TRN International 1924 251 0.101 .14192702 3 0 1987 127 +20 769 +20 472 +20 0 1987 124 +25 234 +25 25 +25 0 1991 114 +25 116 +25 333 +25 0 1987 145 +25 75 +25 272 +25 0 1993 115 +25 118 +25 426 +25 No.
14192702 1 GEO 251 0. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name CANTON ASTRO 1966 Phoenix Islands CHATHAM ISLAND ASTRO 1971 Chatham Island (New Zealand) DOS 1968 Gizo Island (New Georgia Islands) EASTER ISLAND 1967 Easter Island GEODETIC DATUM 1949 New Zealand GUAM 1963 Code CAO Pub.4 0.14192702 4 CHI 251 0.102 .Appendix B. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) B.10 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name International 1924 International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0.37264639 0 1987 84 +5 22 +3 209 +5 0 1987 211 +25 147 +25 111 +25 0 1987 230 +25 199 +25 752 +25 0 1987 175 +15 38 +15 113 +15 0 1987 298 +15 304 +15 375 +15 No.14192702 4 GIZ International 1924 251 0.14192702 14 GUA Clarke 1866 69.14192702 1 EAS International 1924 International 1924 251 0.
States of Micronesia LUZON Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island) Code Pub.Appendix B.14192702 1 LUZ LUZA Clarke 1866 69.14192702 1 IDN 23 0.4 0.10 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 104 5 DOB International 1924 Indonesian 1974 International 1924 251 0.37264639 6 0 1987 133 +8 77 +11 51 +9 0 1991 647 +25 1777 +25 1124 +25 0 1991 189 +25 79 +25 202 +25 0 1993 24 +25 15 +25 5 +25 0 1987 252 +25 209 +25 751 +25 No. Fed. of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number 0 Transformation Parameters Name Guam GUX l ASTRO Guadalcanal Island INDONESIAN 1974 Indonesia JOHNSTON ISLAND 1961 Johnston Island KUSAIE ASTRO 1951 Caroline Islands.00114930 1 JOH 251 0.14192702 2 KUS International 1924 251 0. Date 1987 ∆X(m) 100 +3 ∆Y(m) 248 +3 ∆Z(m) 259 +3 B.103 .
of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number 0 Transformation Parameters Name Mindanao Island MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 Midway Islands Midway Islands OLD HAWAIIAN Mean Solution Hawaii Kauai Maui Oahu OLD HAWAIIAN Mean Solution Hawaii Code LUZB MID Pub.14192702 1 1 OHA OHAM OHAA OHAB OHAC OHAD OHI OHIM OHIA International 1924 251 0.10 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 104 1 International 1924 251 0.4 0.104 . Date 1987 ∆X(m) 133 +25 ∆Y(m) 79 +25 ∆Z(m) 72 +25 +25 1227 +25 B.37264639 15 2 3 2 8 0 0 0 0 0 1987 1991 1991 1991 1991 61 89 45 65 58 +25 +25 +20 +25 +10 285 279 290 290 283 +20 +25 +20 +25 +6 181 183 172 190 182 +20 +25 +20 +25 +6 1 0 2003 1987 403 912 ±25 +25 81 58 ±25 277 ±25 No.Appendix B.14192702 15 2 0 0 2000 2000 201 229 +25 +25 228 222 +20 +25 346 348 +20 +25 Clarke 1866 69.
of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number 0 0 0 Transformation Parameters Name Kauai Maui Oahu PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 Pitcairn Island SANTO (DOS) 1965 Espirito Santo Island VITI LEVU 1916 Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands) WAKEENIWETOK 1960 Marshall Islands Code OHIB OHIC OHID PIT Pub.10 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name ∆a(m) ∆f x 104 3 2 8 International 1924 251 0.145 0.105 .14192702 1 MVS 112.Appendix B.14192702 1 SAE International 1924 Clarke 1880 251 0.14192702 10 0 1991 102 +3 52 +3 38 +3 0 1987 51 +25 391 +25 36 +25 0 1987 170 +25 42 +25 84 +25 0 1987 185 +25 165 +25 42 +25 No. Date 2000 2000 2000 ∆X(m) 185 205 198 +20 +25 +10 ∆Y(m) 233 233 226 +20 +25 +6 ∆Z(m) 337 355 347 +20 +25 +6 B.54750714 1 ENW Hough 133 0.
14192702 2 0 1991 276 +25 57 +25 149 +25 No.106 . of Satellite Stations Used Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Name WAKE ISLAND ASTRO 1952 Wake Atoll Code WAK Pub. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) B.Appendix B.10 Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Continent: PACIFIC OCEAN Local Geodetic Datums Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name International 1924 ∆a(m) 251 ∆f x 104 0.
APPENDIX C DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS DERIVED USING NONSATELLITE INFORMATION C1 .
This page is intentionally blank C2 .
and one special area under the European Datum 1950 (ED 50). LOCAL DATUM ELLIPSOIDS Appendix C. 1 September 1991 including Insert 1. 2.1 lists alphabetically the local geodetic datums and their associated ellipsoids.2. There are ten such local/regional geodetic datums. A cycle number of one indicates that the current parameters have replaced outdated parameters that were in the previous edition. the cycle numbers for each parameter set that is updated will increment by one.DATUM TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS TO WGS 84 (THROUGH NONSATELLITE TIES) 1. If transformation parameter sets are updated in future editions of this publication. A cycle number of zero indicates that the set of parameters are as they were published in DMA TR 8350. 3. TRANSFORMATION CONSTANTS Appendix C. GENERAL This appendix provides the details about the reference ellipsoids (Appendix A) used as defining parameters for the local geodetic datums which are related to WGS 84 through nonsatellite ties to the local control. Two letter ellipsoidal codes (Appendix A) have also been included to clearly indicate which “version” of the ellipsoid has been used to determine the transformation constants. The year of initial publication and cycle numbers have been provided as a new feature in this edition.2 alphabetically lists the local geodetic datums and the special area under ED 50 with the associated shift constants. This makes it possible for a user to determine when a particular set of transformation parameters first became available and if the current set has replaced an outdated set. C3 . 4. 30 August 1993 or that the parameters are new to this edition (1997 Publication Date). ERROR ESTIMATES The error estimates are not available for the datum transformation constants listed in the Appendix C. Second Edition.2.
This page is intentionally blank C4 .
f.1 for associated constants a.11 .Appendix C. C.1 Local Geodetic Datums Related to World Geodetic System 1984 (Through nonSatellite Ties) Associated* Reference Ellipsoid Bessel 1841 International 1924 International 1924 Bessel 1841 International 1924 Bessel 1841 Everest Krassovsky 1940 International 1924 Clarke 1880 International 1924 Local Geodetic Datum Bukit Rimpah Camp Area Astro European 1950 Gunung Segara Herat North Hermannskogel Indian Pulkovo 1942 Tananarive Observatory 1925 Voirol 1874 Yacare Code BR IN IN BR IN BR EF KA IN CD IN * See Appendix A.
This page is intentionally blank C.12 .
845 0. Lebanon.10037483 0 1987 403 684 41 EURS International 1924 251 0. Jordan Kuwait. Antarctica EUROPEAN 1950 Iraq.10037483 0 1987 384 664 48 Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Pub.14192702 0 1991 103 106 141 CAZ International 1924 251 0. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) C.Appendix C. Saudi Arabia and Syria GUNUNG SEGARA Kalimantan (Indonesia) HERAT NORTH Afghanistan HEN International 1924 251 0.21 .845 ∆f x 104 0.14192702 0 1987 104 129 239 Code BUR Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name Bessel 1841 ∆a(m) 739.14192702 0 1987 333 222 114 GSE Bessel 1841 739.2 NonSatellite Derived Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Local Geodetic Datums Name BUKIT RIMPAH Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia) CAMP AREA ASTRO Camp McMurdo Area. Israel.
2 NonSatellite Derived Transformation Parameters Local Geodetic Datums to WGS 84 Local Geodetic Datums Name HERMANNSKOGEL Yugoslavia (Prior to 1990) Slovenia.28361368 0 1993 283 682 231 Code HER Reference Ellipsoids and Parameter Differences Name Bessel 1841 ∆a(m) 739.387* 0.22 .14192702 PUK Krassovsky 1940 108 0. Croatia.54750714 0 1997 73 247 227 TAN International 1924 251 0.145 0.1 YAC International 1924 251 0.14192702 0 1987 155 171 37 VOI Clarke 1880 112.10037483 0 1997 682 203 480 Cycle Number Transformation Parameters Pub.845 ∆f x 104 0.Appendix C. Bosnia and Herzegovina and Serbia INDIAN Pakistan PULKOVO 1942 Russia TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 Madagascar VOIROL 1874 Tunisia and Algeria YACARE Uruguay * See Appendix A. Date ∆X(m) ∆Y(m) ∆Z(m) 0 1987 189 242 91 C.00480795 0 1993 28 130 95 INDP Everest 827.
APPENDIX D MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS FOR SPECIAL CONTINENTAL SIZE LOCAL GEODETIC DATUMS D1 .
D2 .This page is intentionally blank.
France. Bolivia. Peru. Germany*. Denmark. * Prior to October 1990. Colombia. Chile. to obtain better transformation fit in geodetic applications. APPLICATIONS The coverage areas for MREs application are defined in detail for each datum. Brazil. Uruguay and Venezuela.) CONUS and Canadian Mainland South American Mainland (Argentina. Table D. MREs coverage area should never be extrapolated and are not to be used over islands and/or isolated land areas. GENERAL This appendix provides the Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) parameters for continental size datums and for contiguous large land areas (Table D1). which cover continental size land areas. The main advantage of MREs lies in their modeling of distortions for datums. Guyana. Paraguay.1 DATUMS WITH MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS DATUM NAME Australian Geodetic 1966 Australian Geodetic 1984 Campo Inchauspe Corrego Alegre European 1950 North American 1927 South American 1969 AREA COVERED Australian Mainland Australian Mainland Argentina Brazil Western Europe (Austria. Ecuador. W. 2. D3 .MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS 1. The Netherlands and Switzerland.
D4 .This page is intentionally blank.
30074 UV3 + 1.69250 .48″ ∆λ = 3.0. V = K (λ .61098 U2V .00092 U5 .26013 U2V5 .1.25″E Shift ∆φ = 5.39326 UV + 0.06639 U4V5 + 0.93484 U2V + 0. Quality of fit = ± 2.12678 UV .1.87138 U .3.42988 U9 .134°).19238 + 0.62.30″S λ = 144° 11′ 41.43221 U3V5 .24256 UV9 + 38.05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.0.0.07428 V9 + 0.27946 U6V7 .16.71516 UV8 + 0.89189 U6 + 5.0.19184 U9V8 ∆λ″ = 4.0.23076 V2 .18012 U2V8 .0.78″S λ = 144° 11′ 37.07565 V6 . K = 0.52309 V .08514 U8V + 0.50104 V + 0.72907 U3V8 .17″E D5 .2.92″ WGS 84 φ = ()17° 00′ 27.0.06403 U7V8 + 89.38064 V3 + 2.1.07772 V8 + 1.40748 U2V6 + 0.12666 U + 0.0. Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.42069 U2 .20185 V9 + 5.24329 U2V 9 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ + 27°).0.0 m Test Case : AUA φ = ()17° 00′ 32.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming Australian Geodetic Datum 1966 (AUA) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : Australian Mainland (excluding Tasmania) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = 5.44249 UV2 .97897 U8 + 5.
17891 U9 .41584 U2 .0.1.0.27814 UV2 .13598 V3 + 0.19443 U3V9 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ + 27°).0.20604 + 0.23859 U2V9 ∆λ″ = 4.0.4.03785 V8 .17″S λ = 144° 24′ 33. V = K (λ .37714 U4 .10194 U3 .1.46832 U8 + 0. Quality of fit = ± 2.50″ ∆λ = 4.07934 UV2 + 0.73036 U .05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.67″S λ = 144° 24′ 29.0 m Test Case : AUG φ = ()20° 38′ 00.0. K = 0.25225 U + 0.38095 V7 + 0.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming Australian Geodetic Datum 1984 (AUG) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : Australian Mainland (excluding Tasmania) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = 5.06820 V2 + 0.0. Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.0.0.34670 UV3 .52913 U4V + 0.29″E Shift ∆φ = 5.0.13008 U2V5 .0.35777 V9 + 4.40″E D6 .84581 U2V7 .0.29432 U2V3 + 0.0.58528 V .38620 UV .31948 U9 + 0.30676 V8 + 0.11″ WGS 84 φ = ()20° 37′ 55.67877 .46107 V4 + 1.38699 U2V + 0.28840 U2 + 0.134°).68776 U2V6 .16735 V9 .17996 UV4 .57942 V + 0.0.
19709 UV2 .0 m Test Case : CAI φ = ()29° 47′ 45.29575 U2V3 + 0.09073 U3V4 + 1.0.16″W D7 .00036 U9V6 ∆λ″ = .0.00202 U7 + 0.17100 V + 0.73″S λ = ()58° 07′ 40.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming Campo Inchauspe Datum (CAI) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : Argentina (Continental land areas only) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆ φ″ = 1.93117 + 0.68″S λ = ()58° 07′ 38.2.69396 V .08625 V7 .0.2. V = K (λ + 64°).47151 V5 + 0.52924 U .22037 U4 .0.07955 V2 + 1. Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.18225 U + 0.0.00499 U4 .20377 UV4 .24506 UV4 .0.04216 UV + 0.0.20″W Shift ∆φ = 1.18962 U2 + 0.0.26842 V9 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ + 35°).0.48605 V3 .0.96″ WGS 84 φ = ()29° 47′ 43.33556 V7 + 0.0.15707963 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.04403 U2 + 0.00628 U8 + 0.05675 V5 + 0.01701 UV5 .00172 U8V4 + 0.01575 U3V5 .06674 U6 + 0. K = 0.67470 + 0.02180 U4V .0.15483 U2V2 .95″ ∆λ = 1. Quality of fit = ± 2.
Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming Corrego Alegre Datum (COA) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : Brazil (Continental land areas only) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = . Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.15.40004 U3V + 4.34504 U3 .74089 U .06672 U5V . K = 0.42853 U3 + 2.61047 U8 + 138.76072 U7V + 122.51.33740 U5V5 .46.35753 U5V .34750 U3V + 4.63715 U + 2.41019 U3V4 .05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.98875 U2 + 0.24841 U3V3 . Quality of fit = ± 2.27″W D8 .89883 UV + 0.8.24298 U2V3 + 19.22589 V2 .0.73442 U4 .10″ WGS 84 φ = ()20° 29′ 02.24996 V .46053 + 0. V = K (λ + 50°).96900 UV4 .1.21968 V .84315 + 0.127.67574 U9V3 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ + 15°).0.92268 U7 .68277 U9V2 .35977 UV3 + 8.87138 U4 + 43.8586 U8V8 ∆λ″ = .0.8.2428.0.02″S λ = ()54° 47′ 13.04261 U5V4 .86666 U9V + 45.17″W Shift ∆φ = 1.14.05″S λ = ()54° 47′ 15.87277 U6 + 11.54151 U2V + 0.0 m Test Case : COA φ = ()20° 29′ 01.69235 U2V 3 .1.0.5.0.0.66052 UV + 2.17101 U4V + 16.26289 U7V + 334.75655 V5 .03″ ∆λ = 2.125.
0.94075 V .76407 U3 .92923 UV4 .0.49096 U4V4 + 9.78909 U9 .0.0 m Test Case : EUR φ = 46° 41′ 42.4.97974 V5 + 1. Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.04974 U4V .2.31939 U3 .05283 UV9 + 0.10572 U2V7 + 0.3.65261 + 2.52522 U3V 3 + 16.25844 U9V2 + 5.52°).95430 U2V + 0.6.85976 U2V4 .1 (Page D3) for the list of countries covered by the above set of MREs.50572 U + 1.81″N λ = 13° 54′ 50.98425 UV + 0.89″N λ = 13° 54′ 54.2.70401 U4 .0.80215 U7V2 .30068 V2 .48015 U9V4 + 0. V = K (λ .1.87141 U5V7 .10706 UV + 0.45428 U4V6 .1. D9 .14.05401 V8 .13447 .06392 U + 0.05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.26743 U2 + 0.16438 V9 .1.17.1.48711 UV3 + 7.60″E * See Table D.37600 U2 + 1.22899 U5V2 .28734 U8V3 + 8.0.77921 V + 0.79701 UV5 .57701 U6 .3.09″E Shift ∆φ = 3.32516 U6V + 4.1.10°).98750 U8V + 7.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming European Datum 1950 (EUR) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : Western Europe* (Continental contiguous land areas only) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = .17197 U4 + 1.1. K = 0.71041 U4V 9 Where : NOTE U = K (φ .5.41956 U5 . Quality of fit = ± 2.8.61351 U2V3 + 5.2.02445 U3V9 ∆λ″ = .08344 U7 .49″ WGS 84 φ = 46° 41′ 39.08″ ∆λ = 3.26917 U2V7 + 0.
78687 U3V4 + 2.2.0.80920 UV6 .2.0.19.09705 UV .3.31086 UV3 .87058 U4V2 .55747 U2V .47743 UV + 0.15866 V2 .81118 UV2 .19854 U4V4 .36261 U7V6 + 0.3.1.04600 V7 + 63.68405 UV2 .21565 V6 + 62.29″ ∆λ = 3.26448 U9 .3.2.48837 UV7 .45916 V4 + 14.11259 UV8 + 0.29199 U + 0.00834 V9 + 5.61796 V .16″ D10 WGS 84 φ= 54° 26′ 08.8.76644 U2 + 0.29701 U3V9 + 0.75815 U4 .0.58363 U2V2 .74517 U2V5 .75323 UV4 + 0.79395 + 2.01480 V8 + 10.09575 U5V8 ∆λ″ = .01473 V8 .1.6.20307 V3 + 7.0.14.36099 + 3.51228 U4V5 .41″W Shift ∆φ = 0.1017 U3V + 3.1.02041 U4V2 .2.52702 U6V2 + 7.0 m Test Case : NAS φ= 54° 26′ 08.1.0.27239 U5 + 3.28815 U4V + 1.60°).84700 V4 + 31.97703 U2 + 3.0.27589 V .0.83682 U5V3 + 9. V = K (λ + 100°).47331 UV5 + 0.0.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming North American Datum 1927 (NAS) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : Canada (Continental contiguous land areas only) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = 0.18129 U3V7 + 8.29333 U4V7 + 0.3.23485 U7V3 .18177 V7 + 5.05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.06991 U4V 7 + 0.09113 U2V9 + 5.65640 UV4 + 17.35742 U2V3 + 1.44999 V5 .30085 UV6 + 0.13.1.38963 U9V2 + 0.81200 U3V .41614 U2V5 . K = 0.67″N λ = ()110° 17′ 02.0.42398 U2V7 .02067 V9 + 47.01631 U2V4 + 1. Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.04828 UV9 + 36.1.08421 V2 .42448 U5 .64961 U8V2 + 0.17655 U4V9 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ .46457 U2V7 + 0.17587 U2V2 .28954 U3 .55842 U6 + 6.18139 U5V2 + 1.45704 U9V2 .3.14465 U2V9 + 0.15795 U2V + 0.49513 UV3 + 0.59444 U3V5 + 0.0.57″W .03894 U3 .93797 U7V5 .50303 V3 .15181 V6 + 0.1.0. Quality of fit = ± 2.08456 U3V8 + 0.1.67474 U3V2 + 0.96″N λ = ()110° 17′ 05.
06004 V4 + 0.11450 V4 + 27. K = 0.4.17204 UV3 .12948 U3V5 + 3.98399 U3V + 0.08646 U4V9 ∆λ″ = .44507 U8V + 0.0.0.05853 UV2 .1.0.09919 U2 .18882 UV8 .81162 UV5 .1.0.0 m Test Case : NAS φ = 34° 47′ 08.88437 + 2.96723 UV6 .0.01444 V9 + 0.08″ WGS 84 φ = 34° 47′ 09. excluding Alaska and Islands) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = 0.07653 U3V9+ 0.30139 U4V + 1.16984 .04320 U9 .1.30575 U6V3 .96555 U7 + 0.1.0.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming North American Datum 1927 (NAS) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : USA (Continental contiguous land areas only.73357 U2V3.49831 V3 .0.0. Quality of fit = ± 2.49211 U2V2 + 2.83″N λ = ()86° 34′ 52.4.31974 U3 .05061 V + 0.76804 UV + 0.0.05396 U5 + 2.05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.10″W D11 .13239 U2V + 0.41827 U9 .03449 U4V + 0.12415 UV3 + 0.52162 U2V .05183 V6 .13374 V2 .18″W Shift ∆φ = 0.0.0. V = K (λ + 95°).0.59013 U9V3 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ . Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.03385 V8 + 49.0.0.0.59.36″ ∆λ = 0.14197 V6 .07439 V7 .04794 UV9 .37°).0.37548 V5 .76082 U8 + 0.19″N λ = ()86° 34′ 52.57801 U3 .26361 U2 .88585 UV4 .09585 V + 1.76173 U + 0.0.
04265 U7V7 . Input λ as () from 180°W to 0°E in degrees.87669 U6 .0.01360 U7V3 .29942 UV4 + 0.24913 UV .81697 U9V9 ∆λ″ = .0.54687 U2V .0.1.0.31053 U5V7 .09228 U8V5 . Quality of fit = ± 2.1.5.0.05209 U + 0.0.36″ ∆λ = 2.30410 V5 + 0.0.68899 U9V7 + 2.14474 V4 + 0.0.4.0.0.0.86117 U4V5 + 0.40405 U + 0.12837 UV .05387 U2 .25158 V + 1.1.36278 U3V2 .16″ WGS 84 φ = ()31° 56′ 35. K = 0.1.0.0.0.46367 U7 + 4.47866 U5 + 0.82″W D12 .0.0.27168 U6V7 + 4.0.50268 V .67504 .12327 U9 .11351 U5V .62692 U3V3 .12370 U6V5 .31466 U4V3 + 2.17897 U8 . V = K (λ + 60°).14400 U3V + 0.22996 U9V5 + 0.09561 U7V5 .09523 U2V5 + 0.17056 V3 .1.39001 U8V9 .29059 U8V3 + 5.77967 + 0.18616 U3V5 + 0.57205 UV7 + 0.0.87562 U9V7 + 0.76074 U9V9 Where : NOTE : U = K (φ + 20°).07213 U8V9 .00937 U2V .66″W Shift ∆φ = 1.21518 U3V8 + 0.54090 U4 + 0.5.1.58774 U6V9 + 0.95″S λ = ()65° 06′ 18.01750 U8 + 1.05235988 Input φ as () from 90°S to 0°N in degrees.62710 U8V7 + 1.06085 U9V .01305 U9 + 1.10149 U2 + 0.27950 U5V .0 m Test Case SAN φ = ()31° 56′ 33.0.85033 U6V3 .31″S λ = ()65° 06′ 20.85556 UV6 .74977 V3 .1.Multiple Regression Equations (MREs) for Transforming South American Datum 1969 (SAN) to WGS 84 Area of Applicability : South America (Continental contiguous land areas only) MRE coefficients for φ and λ are : ∆φ″ = .
APPENDIX E WGS 72 TO WGS 84 TRANSFORMATION E1 .
This page is intentionally blank E2 .
In such instances. As indicated in Table E. c.1 should not be used for satellite local geodetic stations whose WGS 72 coordinates were determined using datum shifts from [36]. and then transform the local datum coordinates to WGS 84 using Appendices B or C. when proceeding directly from WGS 72 coordinates to obtain WGS 84 values. a change in the longitude reference. The preferred approach is to transform such WGS 72 coordinates. b. Table E. The following cases are important to note: a. back to their respective local datums. Table E. it is important to be aware that ∆φ. In addition. the WGS 72 to WGS 84 transformation listed in Table E.WGS 72 to WGS 84 TRANSFORMATION 1.1 do not reflect the effect of differences between the WGS 72 and WGS 84 EGMs and geoids. ∆λ. the WGS 84 coordinates will differ from the WGS 72 coordinates due to a shift in the coordinate system origin.1 can be used with the following equations to obtain WGS 84 coordinates for the sites: φ WGS 84 = φ WGS 72 + ∆φ λWGS 84 = λWGS 72 + ∆λ hWGS 84 = hWGS 72 + ∆h 2.1 should be used only when no other approach is applicable. a scale change (treated through ∆r) and changes in the size and shape of the ellipsoid. using datum shifts from [36]. These transformed coordinates should agree to within approximately +2 meters with the directly surveyed WGS 84 coordinates using TRANSIT or GPS point positioning.1. E3 . Situations arise where only WGS 72 coordinates are available for a site. ∆h values calculated using Table E. Table E.1 equations are to be used for direct transformation of Dopplerderived WGS 72 coordinates.
∆λ.0 m ∆r = 1. Latitude is positive north and longitude is positive east (0° to 180°). ∆h changes calculated using WGS 72 coordinates to the WGS 72 coordinates (φ.4 m To obtain WGS 84 coordinates. λ. add the ∆φ. respectively).∆a + ∆r ∆f = 0.5 sin φ + a ∆f sin2 φ . (Units = Meters) INSTRUCTIONS E.554 ∆h = 4.1 Formulas and Parameters to Transform WGS 72 Coordinates to WGS 84 Coordinates ∆φ″ = (4.5 cos φ) / (a sin 1″) + (∆f sin 2φ) / (sin 1″) FORMULAS ∆λ″ = 0.4 . h.Table E.3121057 x 107 a = 6378135 m PARAMETERS ∆a = 2.
APPENDIX F ACRONYMS F1 .
This page is intentionally blank F2 .
APPENDIX F ACRONYMS AGD 66 AGD 84 BIH BTS CCRS CEP CIS CONUS CTP CTRS CTS DMA DoD DoT ECEF ECI ECM ED 50 ED 79 EGM EGM96 EUREF89 FRG GEOPS GSFC GLONASS GPS GRS 80 HARNs IAG IAU IERS = Australian Geodetic Datum 1966 = Australian Geodetic Datum 1984 = Bureau International de l’Heure = BIH Terrestrial System = Conventional Celestial Reference System = Celestial Ephemeris Pole = Conventional Inertial System = Contiguous United States = Conventional Terrestrial Pole = Conventional Terrestrial Reference System = Conventional Terrestrial System = Defense Mapping Agency = Department of Defense = Department of Transportation = EarthCentered EarthFixed = EarthCentered Inertial = Earth’s Center of Mass = European Datum 1950 = European Datum 1979 = Earth Gravitational Model = Earth Gravitational Model 1996 = European Terrestrial Reference Frame 1989 = Federal Republic of Germany = Geopotential Surfaces = Goddard Space Flight Center = Global Navigation Satellite System = Global Positioning System = Geodetic Reference System 1980 = High Accuracy Reference Networks = International Association of Geodesy = International Astronomical Union = International Earth Rotation Service F3 .
IGeS IGS IRM IRP ITRF ITS IUGG JGP95E MC&G MREs MSL NAD 27 NAD 83 NASA NAVSTAR GPS NGS NIMA NNSS NSWC NSWCDD OCS OSGB 36 OSGB SN 80 PPS PSAD 56 RMS SAD 69 SLR SPS TD TDRSS TR TRF UK = International Geoid Service = International GPS Service for Geodynamics = IERS Reference Meridian = IERS Reference Pole = IERS Terrestrial Reference Frame = Instantaneous Terrestrial System = International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics = Joint Gravity Project 1995 Elevation = Mapping. Charting and Geodesy = Multiple Regression Equations = Mean Sea Level = North American Datum 1927 = North American Datum 1983 = National Aeronautics and Space Administration = Navigation Satellite Timing and Ranging GPS = National Geodetic Survey = National Imagery and Mapping Agency = Navy Navigation Satellite System = Naval Surface Warfare Center (formerly Naval Surface Weapons Center) = Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division = Operational Control Segment = Ordnance Survey of Great Britain 1936 = Ordnance Survey of Great Britain Scientific Network 1980 = Precise Positioning Service = Provisional South American Datum 1956 = RootMeanSquare = South American Datum 1969 = Satellite Laser Ranging = Standard Positioning Service = Tokyo Datum = Tracking and Data Relay Satellite System = Technical Report = Terrestrial Reference Frame = United Kingdom F4 .
US USNO UT UTC VLBI WGS WGS 60 WGS 66 WGS 72 WGS 84 = United States = United States Naval Observatory = Universal Time = Universal Time Coordinated = Very Long Baseline Interferometry = World Geodetic System = World Geodetic System 1960 = World Geodetic System 1966 = World Geodetic System 1972 = World Geodetic System 1984 F5 .
This page is intentionally blank F6 .
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?